diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-0.txt | 6150 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-0.zip | bin | 106122 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-h.zip | bin | 3000542 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-h/67528-h.htm | 11325 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-h/images/img-009.jpg | bin | 347937 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-h/images/img-023.jpg | bin | 336141 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-h/images/img-031.jpg | bin | 349380 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-h/images/img-045.jpg | bin | 351017 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-h/images/img-057.jpg | bin | 317473 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-h/images/img-071.jpg | bin | 350058 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-h/images/img-081.jpg | bin | 329205 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-h/images/img-093.jpg | bin | 350104 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67528-h/images/img-cover.jpg | bin | 185893 -> 0 bytes |
16 files changed, 17 insertions, 17475 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb68046 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #67528 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/67528) diff --git a/old/67528-0.txt b/old/67528-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 7b51fcd..0000000 --- a/old/67528-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6150 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Cross and the Hammer, by Henry -Bedford-Jones - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: The Cross and the Hammer - A Tale of the Days of the Vikings - -Author: Henry Bedford-Jones - -Release Date: February 28, 2022 [eBook #67528] - -Language: English - -Produced by: Al Haines - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CROSS AND THE -HAMMER *** - - - - - - - - THE CROSS AND - THE HAMMER - - _A Tale of the Days of the Vikings_ - - - _By H. BEDFORD-JONES_ - - - - PUBLISHED BY - DAVID C. COOK PUBLISHING Co. - ELGIN, ILLINOIS - - - - - COPYRIGHT, 1912. - BY DAVID C. COOK PUBLISHING Co., - ELGIN, ILLINOIS. - - - - - CONTENTS. - - I. How the Vow Was Made - II. The Shooting Match - III. Jarl Hakon of Norway - IV. The Rescue in the Bay - V. The Escape from Thrandheim - VI. Hiorunga Bay - VII. How Vagn Kept His Vow - VIII. "Skoal to King Olaf!" - IX. How Astrid Fared Forth - X. Farewell to Dublin - XI. At Ethelred's Court - XII. The Flight From London - XIII. Alfred of Mercia - XIV. In Bretland - XV. In Winter Quarters - XVI. An Ambuscade - XVII. Ketil Turns Up - XVIII. A Mission for the King - XIX. At King Svein's Court - XX. The King and the Towel - XXI. The Death of Hakon - XXII. The Sacrifice To Thor - XXIII. How the Chiefs Were Baptized - XXIV. Olaf's Atonement - XXV. The Wrestling Match - XXVI. The Cross and the Hammer - - - - -FOREWORD. - -This is a story about the very real people and events; if ever you -chance to read the old Sagas of Norway you will come upon most of the -characters of this tale. The viking age was not Christian, it was -full of the clash of arms and of unknightly deeds, yet its story is -vitally interesting. - -The Hammer of Thor, the War-god of northern Europe, did not yield to -the Cross of Christ without a struggle, and the story of Norway's -conversion is intensely dramatic. King Hakon the Good, a foster-son -of the English King Athelstan, was forced to recant his faith in -order to hold his throne; King Olaf Triggveson lost his kingdom, or -rather gave it up, at Svolde Sound, because he refused to do the -like; and King Olaf the Thick, who followed him, fell beneath the -heathen weapons of his subjects, becoming the patron saint of Norway. - -It was the first King Olaf who broke the power of the old gods and -who introduced Christianity into his realm. Short as was his reign, -he was the greatest king Norway ever had. He built the first church -in the land, and sent the first missionaries to Iceland; during his -reign Thangbrand, the priest, won that island to the true faith. - -Many of the incidents narrated are taken direct from the Sagas, and -although King Olaf is said to have died at Svolde, the story of his -escape is well authenticated; I give his own words in refusing to win -back his kingdom. He went to Rome and the Holy Land and held rule -there under the Crusader Kings of Jerusalem, dying fifty years later. -King Edward the Confessor used to have the story of his life chanted -to his court once every year, upon his death being reported in -England during that king's reign. - -H. BEDFORD-JONES. - - - - -NOTES. - -"_bonders._"--This word is used in the Sagas to represent the free -farmers of Norway, who held their lands from the king, or owned them; -they were subject only to the orders of the king or his Jarls, and -are equivalent to our own "farmers," except that they had special -rights and privileges. - -"_scat._"--A fine or any other penalty which might be imposed on an -offender by an assembly of the people. The scat was usually a fine -of money, lands, or goods. - -"_skoal._"--This plain word corresponds to our own "Hurrah!" It -means both long life, good health, and joy, and is still used in -Norway in that sense. - -I have avoided the use of many words which are usually retained in -the translations of the old Sagas. Nearly all the facts about which -the story of Sigurd Fairhair is woven are historical, and are taken -from the Heimskringla, and the Saga of King Olaf by the Abbot Berg -Sokkason. Both histories were compiled from the accounts of -eye-witnesses of the events contained therein, to a great extent, and -especially was this true with the life of Olaf Triggveson.--_The -Author_. - - - - -The Cross and the Hammer - -_A Tale of the Days of the Vikings_ - -_By H. BEDFORD-JONES_ - - - -CHAPTER I. - -HOW THE VOW WAS MADE. - -The great hall of the Danish kings at Leira was filled to overflowing -on this autumn evening of the year 994, for King Harald Gormson had -fallen in battle some weeks before, and his son Svein Twyskiegge, of -Forkbeard, was celebrating his accession feast in the hall of his -fathers. - -Around the town lay a whole city of tents and brush huts, for besides -the Danish lords present, sixty ships had come from Jomsborg, bearing -the noblest of the famous Viking brotherhood, under their chiefs Jarl -Sigvald and Bui the Thick. Visitors and Danes were clad in their -bravest array, and both town and camp presented a scene of the gayest -festivity. - -Within, the hall was hung with ancient arms and trophies of the -chase, the floor was strewn with a thick layer of fresh rushes, and -the long tables were heaped high with dishes. At one end of the hall -sat King Svein, with his chiefs and the Jomsborg nobles, while above -them towered the high-seat or throne of the king; along the hall were -ranged the vikings and men of Denmark, with Queen Gunhild and her -ladies sitting at the far end. - -Servants flitted in and out, bearing food and horns of ale, while in -the center of the hall, between the tables and before the seat of the -king, sat two skalds, singing to the music of their harps the great -deeds of King Harald and of his son, the new king. Presently, as the -hunger of the throng was somewhat appeased, all began to wonder what -vow the king would make, for it was the custom that at the heirship -feast the new king should make a vow to do some great and noble deed. - -Seated near Queen Gunhild as guests of honor were two boys, one fair -and ruddy-cheeked, the other darker and with very quick, bold eyes. -The latter, Vagn Akison, was a nephew of Bui, the Jomsborg chief, and -grandson of Palnatoki, the founder of the viking brotherhood; -although he was only seventeen, he and his cousin Sigurd were already -well known for the prowess. - -Sigurd Fairhair, who was a year younger than Vagn, was in high -spirits to-night, for a little before King Svein had given him a very -fine sword, and he was proud of it. - -Glancing over at him with a smile, Queen Gunhild said, "Sigurd, have -you shown Astrid your new sword?" - -"Of course he has," replied Astrid, her niece, who sat beside Sigurd, -and her dark eyes gleamed with fun. "He is going to try its edge on -the big pine tree near the harbor to-morrow!" - -At this sally a laugh went up, and Vagn cried, "Be careful not to -bring down the tree into the harbor, Sigurd! It would be a pity to -sink all our best ships!" - -Sigurd reddened, and retorted, "Well, I never aroused the whole camp -just because a pig was wandering around in the bushes!" - -This turned the laugh on his cousin, who had wakened the camp the -night before, mistaking a pig for a spy, and even the Queen joined -heartily in the merriment. - -Suddenly a silence fell on the tables, for King Svein had arisen and -was holding in both hands a great silver bowl. Amid a dead hush he -drained it, handed it to an attendant, and stepped to the high-seat. -Grasping an arm of this, the king turned. - -"Here, as I ascend the throne of my father Harald, I vow that with -the help of God I will lead my fleet to the land of England, and ere -three winters have passed I will chase King Ethelred from the land -and sit in his throne!" - -[Illustration: "_I will lead my fleet to the land of England._"] - -As King Svein took his seat a low murmur of astonishment ran around -the hall, followed by a tremendous shout of "Skoal! Skoal!" for this -was a great vow to be fulfilled. - -"See how pale the Queen is," whispered Astrid to Sigurd. "The vow -must have surprised her also." - -Indeed, Queen Gunhild had turned white, for the King's vow meant that -a great war would be undertaken, and how it would end no man could -tell. Before Sigurd could reply, Jarl Sigvald arose and called for -silence. - -"Men of Denmark and Jomsborg," he said slowly, in his deep voice, the -light glinting on his dark, strong face and black eyes, "I also would -make a vow, and no light one. As you all know, Jarl Hakon, a heathen -man and doubly a traitor, rules Norway while the rightful king, -Tryggvee's son, is a wanderer or mayhap dead. This then is my vow: -that I go to Norway ere three winters pass, take the rule from the -hands of Jarl Hakon, and drive him from the land." - -Sigvald sat down, amid a dead hush of amazement; but it was broken by -a shout from young Vagn Akison. - -"Skoal, Jarl Sigvald, skoal!" - -Then what a cheer went up! Ere it subsided, Sigvald's brother, -Thorkel the Tall, leaped to his feet and swore to follow the Jarl; -Bui the Thick joined him, and amid fresh cheers, Vagn, from the other -end of the hall, cried: - -"I, too! And ere I return I will slay Thorkel Leira, the villain who -betrayed my father to his death!" - -"Skoal!" shouted Sigurd, excitedly, "I'm with you, Vagn!" - -As the tumult subsided, the Queen looked at Vagn and Sigurd sadly. -"You are rash boys, you two! Do you realize what blood and tears -these oaths will cost?" - -Sigurd answered her respectfully. "Noble Gunhild, that may well be; -yet Jarl Hakon is an evil man and a pagan, as is Thorkel. At any -rate, I won't have to try my new sword on the tree, now!" His keen -gray eyes twinkled. - -The Queen made no reply, however, and sat watching King Svein; but -Astrid whispered: - -"I think that was splendid! I wish I could go, too!" - -Vagn laughed. "You'd be a fine one! Why, the first war-horn would -send you down below trembling!" - -"It wouldn't either!" retorted the girl indignantly. "I can shoot -better than you or Sigurd, either of you!" - -"Good! I challenge you to a match to-morrow," cried Sigurd. "We'll -go over to the shore beyond the harbor, where no one will interrupt, -and if you best either of us I'll give you my trained falcon from -France!" - -"Then look out," laughed Astrid, "because I'm going to win the bird -to-morrow morning!" - -With this she arose and followed the Queen, who was leaving. The two -boys, not wishing to join in the carouse that most of the vikings -would keep up for the better part of the night, also left the hall -and proceeded to their own tent. - -"What think you of these vows, Sigurd?" asked Vagn, as they went -along. - -"Well, now that we have cooled down, it looks rather different," -replied Sigurd, thoughtfully. "It is one thing for King Svein to -conquer England, with the resources of a realm at his command, and -another for Sigvald to conquer Norway with only the brother of -Jomsborg behind him." - -"But remember, Fairhair, we are Christians, while Hakon is a pagan -and a traitor; that will make some difference, surely! My own vow -was no hasty thing; I must avenge my father's death or else be -disgraced forever." - -Sigurd nodded thoughtfully, for he well knew that the fierce vikings -would yield small obedience to a man who appeared unable to avenge -the betrayal of his father. As they turned in at their tent, a man -ran up, and Vagn recognized one of Bui's men in the moonlight. - -"Hello, Egil, what is it?" - -"You and Sigurd are wanted at council in Jarl Sigvald's big tent," -panted the man. - -Without delay, the boys followed him to the large tent of the Jarl. -Here they found all the Jomsborg leaders assembled, and took their -places beside Bui of Bornholm, who was speaking as they entered. - -"It was a rash vow, Sigvald, but we cannot back out, and it may well -be that we shall win great honor in the effort, win or lose. Our -vikings are the best warriors in the world to-day, and we will at -least give a hard battle to Hakon and his son Eirik." - -A murmur of assent ran around the tent, and Sigvald arose. - -"Brothers, I was over-hasty in the vow, but it cannot be helped. -This is my counsel; that since the attempt must be made, we make it -without delay, send for the rest of our men, and strike at Norway's -capital without delay. What think you?" - -Vagn stepped forward. "I will answer for my father's ships and men. -Let us strike before Hakon can meet us; we have the pick of our men -here, with most of our ships. We can leave here at the end of the -week, wait at Limafiord for the rest of our men, then sweep up to -Thrandheim." - -"Good for you, Vagn!" cried his uncle. "Men say that I am somewhat -stout, but my friends never complain of my weight in battle!" -Everyone laughed, for although Bui deserved his nickname, he was one -of the greatest warriors of the day. "I'll let Sigurd here go with -you, if you want him," he continued, and the boy's heart leaped with -joy, for this was indeed just what he did want. - -Jarl Sigvald smiled. "Then is it agreed that we go from here to -Limafiord on the fourth day?" - -"Yes!" The answer was accompanied by a clash of weapons, as the -chiefs struck sword and spear on shield, and the council was over, -although most of the leaders remained to talk over details and -despatch a messenger to Jomsborg at once. - -The boys returned to their tent, however, and as they dropped off to -sleep the shouts of "Skoal! Skoal!" drifted faintly to them from the -town, and they knew that the vikings and the Danes were still making -vows, some of which they would bitterly repent in the morning. - - - - -CHAPTER II. - -THE SHOOTING-MATCH. - -Early next morning the boys were afoot, and after a hasty breakfast -beside a camp fire they took their bows and quivers and started for -town. - -Astrid lived with Queen Gunhild at the Kings' Hall, and thither they -directed their steps. Early as it was, the place was thronged with -servants, who were laying fresh rushes in the hall and putting the -place in order for the day. Seeing a house-carl pass, with his -clipped hair and golden collar, Sigurd called him and sent him to ask -if the Lady Astrid was ready. - -Five minutes later Astrid herself appeared, bearing bow and quiver, -and joined them with a cheery, "Good-morning, my vikings! Has your -rash resolution cooled off yet?" - -"Small chance of that," replied Vagn, his half-grave, half-humorous -eyes lighting up in a quick smile. - -"My falcon is ready to change owners," added Sigurd, "but then there -is no chance for that to-day, of course." - -"Oh, indeed!" Astrid's dark eyes flashed gayly. "That remains to be -seen, my lord of Jomsborg and Bornholm!" - -Talking and laughing, they started off, leaving the town behind and -cutting across the fields to the harbor. There, as they came to the -brow of the hill, they paused. Far below lay the great fleet, the -sixty Jomsborg ships and those of the assembled Danish lords, their -shield-rims glittering in the morning sun, their dragon-prows and -high carved sterns gilded or painted in bright array. - -Astrid caught her breath in admiration. "Oh, how wonderful it is to -be a viking! I wish I were a boy!" - -The other two laughed. "It is not so very wonderful," smiled Sigurd. -"I think it is hard work. Every morning the drilling and practice in -arms, the weapons to be rubbed up--and the rowing! Whew, my back -hurts even to think of those low, heavy oars!" - -"There's our ship, with the gilded prow," pointed Vagn, to a large -long-ship apart from the rest. "Sigurd talks a lot about work, but -he is equal to any man in the fleet with sword and shield, save his -father, or the Jarl--" - -"Or yourself," broke in his cousin quickly. "However, let's get on; -I'm anxious to decide the fate of my falcon." - -They left the road, and after walking two or three miles, came out on -a lonely stretch of shore, wild and rocky. Vagn had brought an old -wooden shield with him, and he set this up as target on a large rock -a hundred feet distant. - -"Do you shoot first," ordered Astrid. "I'll go next, then Vagn." - -Sigurd nodded, and selected an arrow. Stringing his bow, he laid the -shaft and pulled the string to his ear. Twang! The arrow was buried -deep in the shield, just above the center boss of iron. - -"Good enough!" cried Vagn, running forward, but Astrid only smiled -and raised her bow. The string twanged, and an answering echo came -back as the arrow glanced off and the shield fell backward. - -"Hurrah!" cried Vagn, picking it up. "Full on the iron boss! But -you can't do it again!" - -Sigurd ran forward to see also, and as they examined the shield, a -sudden cry startled them. Turning, they saw Astrid struggling with -three men, while more appeared coming from behind a corner of the -cliff. - -"Norsemen and spies!" exclaimed Sigurd, and without an instant's -hesitation he picked up Astrid's arrow and ran forward, fitting it to -his bow. - -"Your sword!" called Vagn, tearing the peace-bands from his own -weapon as he ran. A shout answered him, and the Norseman ran forward -to meet Sigurd. A spear whizzed by his head, and he loosed the bow. - -The foremast viking fell with a clash, and as the others paused -Sigurd tore the peace-bands from his sword. Next instant he was -surrounded, struggling, striking, and he realized that more and more -men had appeared from behind the cliff. - -Now a blade gleamed beside him, and Vagn's voice sounded in his ear. -One man was down--two; but others filled their places, and a heavy -axe was poised over Sigurd. As it fell the boy darted in beneath the -blow, and his sword fell on the viking's shoulder; but at that -instant something crashed on his light steel cap, and he knew no more. - -Sigurd awoke with a dull pain in his head, to find his arms tightly -bound and the midday sun beating down on him. Raising his head, -Fairhair saw that he lay on the forecastle of a small ship, with Vagn -beside him, wounded in the shoulder and unconscious. - -He saw nothing of Astrid, and a burning thirst consumed him; with a -great effort he rose to a sitting position and looked around. They -were out at sea, and the land lay far behind them; in the stern and -waist of the ship were fifteen or twenty Norsemen. - -"That was a stiff crack I gave you, lad, but the steel cap saved your -skull," sounded a voice, and Sigurd twisted around. Behind him stood -a dark man with an unpleasant face and straw-colored hair; evidently -he was the leader, for he had just come out of the cabin. - -Sigurd tried to speak, but his tongue was dry, and the man laughed. -"Here, Thord," he called, "bring a horn of water." - -One of the men in the waist took a horn and filled it from the cask -beside the mast, handing it up to the leader, who put it to the boy's -lips. Sigurd drank greedily, and then the other threw a few drops -over Vagn, who opened his eyes. - -He struggled to rise, with a sharp cry. - -"Thorkel Leira! I--" The effort was too much for him, and he fell -back again. Their captor smiled sneeringly. - -"He is in a bad way to fulfill his vow, eh?" This was the man whom -Vagn had sworn to kill, the betrayer of his father! As he realized -this, Sigurd's head cleared. - -"Why have you attacked us? Who are you?" he asked indignantly. - -Thorkel laughed again. "Vagn, there, seemed to know my face! You -two and the girl, whom I take to be Gunhild's niece, will make a nice -gift to Jarl Hakon! Great boasts, great boasts!" - -Sigurd flushed. As he looked at the viking, his heart gave a sudden -leap, for, framed in the cabin doorway behind, he saw the face of -Astrid, her finger on her lips. Making no sign, he answered the -leader calmly. - -"In that case, leave us alone till we get to Thrandheim." As he said -this, Sigurd lay down again, turning his back on Thorkel. The latter -sneered, and stepped to the edge of the forecastle, above the ship's -waist. Sigurd opened his eyes, and saw Astrid making signs, and -holding in her hand his sword. - -Sigurd comprehended the plan instantly. He silently drew his feet up -and gathered his muscles; Thorkel was giving orders, a few paces -away, and paid no heed to him. The boy slowly rose to one knee; he -saw Astrid run toward him, and at the same instant he threw himself -headfirst at Thorkel, striking him fairly in the waist. - -The viking fell forward with a cry, and lay motionless on the deck -beneath. Sigurd would have followed him over the low rail, but for a -hand that gripped his bound arms and stayed him; then he felt the -bonds cut and a sword pushed into his hand. - -"Hold the ladder," panted the girl, "while I arouse Vagn." - -Sigurd sprang to the top of the narrow ladder that led up from the -deck below just as the surprised men seized their weapons. An arrow -tore through his hair; another followed, but Sigurd parried it with -his blade, and another after it. This was an old viking exercise, -and the boy felt no fear; but with a cry of dismay Astrid ran to the -cabin, quickly returning with a shield. - -"Here, this will help you!" Sigurd grasped it just in time to ward -off a spear, and now the first man was on the ladder. He held a -shield above his head, but Sigurd swung his sword and brought it down -with all his might. The keen weapon sheared through the tough bull's -hide, and the man fell back among his comrades. - -Thord, who had brought the water, now made a dash, coming up the -ladder three steps at a time, and wielding an axe. As he reached the -top Sigurd drove his sword, but too late; the axe descended on his -shield and bore him to his knees. Again the weapon whirled above -him, and Thord staggered backward with a hoarse cry, clearing the -ladder in his fall. - -Springing up, Sigurd saw Astrid behind him, bow in hand, and Vagn, -pale but determined, stepped to his side. Those below drew back, and -the boys saw them reviving Thorkel, who was stunned by his fall. -Sigurd leaned on his sword. - -"Look here, Vagn, we can't keep this up all day; one or two good -showers of arrows will finish us." - -Vagn pointed to the cabin. "We can hold that against them all, and -Astrid says that food and water are inside." - -Sigurd laughed. "You look like a Valkyrie, Astrid! I owe you thanks -for my life, too--but what is Thorkel up to?" - -"Back--back to the cabin!" cried Astrid. "They are climbing around -the bow to take us from behind!" - -A glance showed them half a dozen men climbing through the bow under -the dragon's head up to the forecastle. It was useless to try to -hold the whole fore-deck, so the two boys and Astrid ran to the -cabin, shut the heavy door, and bolted it securely. There was no -window, and only one or two high loop-holes gave fresh air to those -within. - -"What chance have we of rescue?" asked Astrid, sitting down on a pile -of furs. - -"Little enough," replied Vagn, moodily, while Sigurd threw himself -down beside her. "No one knows where we went, and we won't be missed -till noon. It must be about three hours past that now." - -The Norsemen, realizing the futility of trying to break in, made no -sign; and the afternoon slowly wore away. The ship was bearing north -under full sail, and all three captives realized that it was only a -matter of time before they would have to give up. - -Evidently the Norsemen had been spying on the Danes. Vagn had been -struck down by a glancing blow, and all three had been taken to the -ship, which left the land at once. Astrid had been left unbound, and -had taken advantage of the opportunity as soon as Sigurd became -conscious. - -Toward evening a rap sounded on the door, and the voice of Thorkel -called to them: - -"Vagn Akison! Can you hear me?" - - - - -CHAPTER III. - -JARL HAKON OF NORWAY. - -"Well enough," replied Vagn, "what is it?" - -"I suppose you see that you cannot hold out for ever; but it would be -needless trouble for my men to batter in the door. To-morrow we will -meet Jarl Hakon, and if you give yourselves up in peace I will not -bind you." - -"What shall we do?" whispered Vagn. "It is true that we cannot hold -out here." - -"Do!" exclaimed Astrid. "Would you trust your father's betrayer? -Wait till we meet Hakon, that will be time enough to give up!" - -Vagn raised his voice. "We wish nought to do with traitors, Thorkel. -Let Jarl Hakon speak with us; till then we will bide." - -Thorkel made no answer, and they heard him move away. The three -captives ate some of the food, drank a little stale water, and with -nightfall the boys took watch and watch, leaving the single couch to -Astrid. - -Toward morning, however, the latter awoke and insisted on doing her -share of the watching; so Sigurd, dead tired, yielded up his watch -and dropped off to sleep. The boys were now suffering from their -wounds, but they had refused to let Astrid bind them up, as this was -strictly against the laws of the Jomsvikings. - -These fierce men were trained with the greatest strictness, indeed, -and death was the penalty for the slightest infraction of their laws. -Wounds might not be bound up, and no pain might be complained of; for -suffering was only part of the long training that made the Jomsborg -brotherhood the most terrible fighters in the world. - -Both boys were wakened by a jar that shook the ship, and they found -the sun well up. "What was that shock?" they cried, in alarm. - -"Another ship," replied Astrid. "I can see nothing, but I heard the -sound of oars and voices." - -Springing to the loopholes, they found that they could see nothing; -but the sound of excited talking came to them, and in a few moments -steps advanced quickly to the door. - -"Ho, Vagn Akison! Astrid of Vendland! Open!" - -Astrid seized Vagn's arm. "It is Jarl Hakon! I know his voice well!" - -Without hesitation, Sigurd, sheathing his sword, threw open the door. -There in the sunlight stood a man of lofty stature, magnificently -armed and with beard and hair as sunny as that of Sigurd; but his -face was gloomy, and his eyes quick and shifty. - -"Do you yield to me?" he asked quietly. - -Astrid laughed. "So you war against girls, Jarl? Well, I suppose I -must surrender!" - -The Jarl smiled, and laid his hand on her hair. "Keep the bow, -child; you have done nobly and well. Come to my own ship." - -As they followed him down the ladder and over the side, Sigurd saw -that Hakon's hair was streaked with gray, and that he walked stiffly -as from old wounds. Beside Thorkel's ship lay another, a splendid -warship, and as they climbed over the bulwarks the two ships were -cast apart. Hakon led the way to his cabin, and said, kindly: - -"Sit you down and fear not. Thorkel has told me the tale of the -vows, especially that of yours, Vagn Akison. By the hammer of Thor, -your comrades will have tough work if they think to take Norway from -me!" He smiled grimly. - -"Jarl," exclaimed Astrid, "was it by your orders that we have been -attacked? Remember that Svein is my uncle!" - -Hakon nodded. "I am sorry, indeed, that you were taken; you will be -returned unharmed later, with whatever scat Svein thinks just. But -who are you, Fairhair?" - -Sigurd laughed. "That is truly what men call me, Jarl; my name is -Sigurd Buisson." - -Hakon whistled in surprise. "So! Then I have two good hostages! -All the better; I will take you up to Thrandheim with me, but have no -fear, for you will be well treated--at least for the present." - -With this Hakon left the cabin, giving it up to them, and the voyage -began. The boys were indeed treated well, their weapons were left -them, and had it not been for the surrounding circumstances they -would have enjoyed themselves immensely. - -That night they made the southern end of Norway, for the ship was -pushed on with all speed, both of sail and oars. Jarl Hakon was -racing for his kingdom now, and no effort was spared to reach -Thrandheim, Norway's capital, as soon as might be. - -Next morning they landed at Howes, and Hakon sent speedy messengers -north over the mountains to his son Jarl Eirik, who was in Raumarike; -and splitting up war arrows, dispatched them to all the chiefs near -by as a token to gather men at once. Then, with fresh rowers, the -ship hastened on as never ship had hastened before, for the realm of -Norway was at stake. - -The following evening they stopped at Raumsdale to send out the -war-arrow and get new rowers; but they pushed on quickly, and on the -third day sped up the Thrandheim Firth and reached the city just -after sunset. - -An immense crowd greeted them, for the news had sped fast, and they -landed amid a great shouting and clash of arms. Jarl Hakon kept the -boys with him, and sent Astrid to the King's Hall, where she would be -given waiting-women and cared for as became her rank. Then, without -going thither himself, he turned aside, followed by all the -multitude, and proceeded to the great temple of Thor, the War-god. - -Jarl Hakon was a pagan, believing firmly in the old gods of Norway, -as indeed most of his subjects did. The Thrandheim temple was the -greatest in the land, and Jarl Hakon, as ruler of the country, was -the high-priest. - -As they passed beneath the great stone doorway Sigurd Fairhair -shivered, and Vagn whispered to him, "Firm, Sigurd, hold firm!" - -Sigurd pressed his hand in reply. As they saw whither they were -going, the boys had resolved not to take part in the worship of the -heathen gods, for both were Christians. The temple was high and -gloomy, and the torches lit it very poorly; but around the sides they -could see statues of Odin the one-eyed, Freya the beautiful, and the -other gods. At the end, opposite the doorway, stood a high altar -before the golden statue of Thor, and Hakon slowly ascended the steps. - -As he did so, the vikings, bonders, and townfolk fell on their knees, -and beyond the altar Sigurd noticed the priests bringing in a white -bull for sacrifice. Looking around, he saw that he and Vagn were the -only ones standing; others saw it, too, and an angry mutter ran -through the vast building, like the low gathering of a storm. - -The two boys paled, but stood firm and erect, as Jarl Hakon uttered a -short prayer to the war god. When his voice ceased, the mutter -behind him swelled into a roar, with fierce shouts of "Kneel!" -"Kneel!" "Death to the Christians!" - -Hakon turned and raised his hand, the roar dying away at once. When -he saw the cause of the tumult his face darkened. - -"To your knees, to your knees! Would you insult Thor in his own -temple?" - -"We kneel to none save the white Christ," spoke out Sigurd boldly, -though his heart beat fast. - -Hakon's hand flew to his sword, and the crowd surged forward; then -the Jarl's hand dropped, and he motioned to one of his men. - -"Harald, take these two to the King's Hall and see that no harm comes -to them, on your life. Go!" - -Without a word the boys followed the man as he led the way out, their -heads high and their hands on their swords. The Norsemen made way -for them with muttered threats, but gaining the open air, their guide -led them through the dark streets, and in a few minutes stopped at -the Hall. - -They were led to a room, and the door was bolted. At the rasp of the -bolt Vagn broke silence. - -"Whew! That was a close shave for us, old man! I was scared stiff -when you answered Hakon!" - -"So was I," admitted Sigurd, smiling. "But we are too valuable as -hostages, so it didn't take much bravery. See here, are we going to -stay with Hakon?" - -"Not if we can help it," laughed Vagn. "I suppose we'll be watched -closely, though, and then we must look out for Astrid." - -Sigurd nodded. "Well, we'll see her in the morning. She is not in -danger for the present, anyway." - -Sigurd was mistaken, however, for they did not see Astrid for a week. -They were closely confined to their room, and only on the sixth day -following were they allowed to leave it. Their warder was the same -who had led them from the temple the first night. As he came in on -the sixth morning, he left the door open, and said: - -"You are free of the town, but do not leave it. Jarl Hakon has gone, -so you had best be watchful, as I am responsible for you." - -"Where has Hakon gone? Is the Lady Astrid here?" asked Vagn. - -"I know nothing of any Lady Astrid, but Jarl Hakon has gone south to -More to raise men, and will return to meet Jarl Eirik, mayhap." - -The two boys did not wait to learn more, but hastened out to the -great hall, and there they found a woman who directed them to -Astrid's room. Making their way thither, Astrid came to the door -with a cry of joy. - -"Oh, I thought you were dead! I saw Jarl Hakon once, but he was -terribly busy and would tell me nothing. Where have you been?" - -Vagn outlined their adventure at the temple, and told of their -subsequent imprisonment in a few words. - -"I never would have dared do that!" exclaimed Astrid as he finished. -"To brave all those men that way! But come over here to this window -and speak low; there are women in the next room." - -Making sure that the door was fast, Sigurd and Vagn joined her at the -window. - -"Last night I heard two men talking out in the hall, and I listened. -Jarl Eirik has gathered a great force of men from Raumadale and -Halogaland and Thrandheim, and is fitting out an immense fleet in the -greatest haste. Hakon is raising men in North and South More. Two -nights ago, just before Hakon left, a messenger came from Eirik. - -"Here is their plan. When Hakon has raised all the men he can, he -will come north to meet Eirik, who is making his way south. They -expect to have at least 150 longships when they combine forces, and -intend to wait for your fleet in Hiorunga Bay and take them in a -trap." - -"A trap!" cried Sigurd. "With that great force?" - -"Yes, because they are afraid of the men of Jomsborg, even with the -numbers three to one. The peasants are to tell Jarl Sigvald that -Hakon is in Hiorunga Bay with only one or two ships, and Sigvald and -Bui will hurry in to capture him, thus falling among the whole fleet. -Do you see?" - -Sigurd's eyes flashed. "So Hakon is a traitor still! This is -terrible, Vagn; in a trap like that no one will escape!" - -"I am afraid not, Fairhair," Vagn shook his head sadly. "Sigvald -will fall into it, for he is impetuous and hasty, as is your father -also. I see only one thing to do." - -"What is that?" cried the others, as he paused. - -"That is for you, Sigurd, and me to steal a boat here in the harbor -and sail out south. We have a bare chance of reaching Sigvald in -time. Has Eirik reached Thrandheim yet?" He turned to Astrid. - -"Not yet, but he is expected at any time." - -"Then we may make it!" broke in Sigurd, excitedly. - -Here Astrid drew herself up, and said, in a determined voice, "Wait a -minute! If you go I go, too; you needn't think you can leave me -behind!" - - - - -CHAPTER IV. - -THE RESCUE IN THE BAY. - -"That you sha'n't," replied Vagn. "We may be blown out to sea or -captured by Eirik or Hakon; there is no telling. You are safe here." - -Astrid's eyes flashed, and she cried, angrily, "I say I will go! If -we are taken, I will be just as safe; and you two can handle a small -boat in any sea." - -"But, Astrid," objected Sigurd, in dismay, "at best it will take us -three days, and--" - -"So much the more need of another person. Now say no more." She set -her mouth determinedly, and Vagn's opposition vanished in a peal of -laughter. - -"Come on," he cried gayly; "I would rather fight a dozen Norsemen -than try to oppose you! We'll go down to the harbor now and see -about a boat." - -"You seem to think it is no more than a matter of picking out a boat -and raising the sail," laughed Sigurd, as they left the hall. - -"No," returned Vagn, "but there's no use thinking about obstacles -before they appear." - -The streets were thronged with men from the countryside roundabout, -and the armorers seemed to be doing a thriving business. No one paid -any attention to the three, and they soon made their way to the -waterside. - -As they walked slowly along, looking at the ships in the harbor, -Sigurd suddenly stopped. - -"Hurrah! I believe that I have a better plan still!" he cried. "Do -you see that ship over there with the yellow eyes painted in her -prow?" - -"What of her?" asked Vagn. - -"Don't you remember? She was in Jomsborg a month since, and her -captain is an old friend of Jarl Sigvald's. Why can't we get him to -take us down below Hiorunga Bay to meet the fleet?" - -"The very thing!" Astrid clapped her hands in delight. "I confess -that it seemed well-nigh hopeless to make our way in a small boat -without being captured or blown far out to sea. But suppose he won't -take us?" - -"He will," returned Vagn, "I remember his name--Ulf Ringsson, and he -will be glad to help Sigvald. How shall we see him?" - -"Do you take Astrid back to the hall, and I will row out in a small -boat," replied Sigurd. "If any are watching us, we will throw them -off that way." - -So Astrid and Vagn turned back, and Sigurd sauntered about for a -time, as if watching the shipping. Presently he wandered down to a -boatman. - -"Lend me your boat for an hour or two, my friend," he said, handing -the man a coin. - -"Willingly," responded the man, pushing out his craft and putting the -oars into it. "Business is not so good these days; I fear that I may -have to go with Jarl Eirik if I want to make money!" - -"Better not," laughed Sigurd, "you might meet Jomsborg steel, and -that would be bad luck." - -The man chuckled as he shoved Sigurd off. "No danger, my lord! If -I'm not here when you return, just pull the boat up and leave her." - -Sigurd nodded, and pulled slowly from the shore. He did not head -straight out to the ship, but visited other craft first, asking -questions of their crews and appearing simply curious. After a -little he reached the side of Ulf's ship, and slipping under the side -opposite the shore, clambered over the rail. - -As he set foot on the deck, a tall man rose and faced him. "Who are -you and what do you want?" - -Sigurd smiled and took off his fur cap. "I want Ulf Ringsson, and I -am Sigurd Buisson of Bornholm." - -Ulf grasped his hand with a cry of surprise, and led him to the cabin. - -"The crew is ashore, but it is best to take no chances. Now what are -you doing here? I heard you had been taken by Hakon." - -The boy swiftly outlined his adventures, told of the trap that was to -be laid for the Jomsborg fleet, and asked Ulf to help them. - -"Of course, Sigurd, of course! I can stow you two and the Lady -Astrid away comfortably, but if we are overhauled--well, my men are -no fighters, you know!" - -"We'll take our chance of that," replied Sigurd, thanking him warmly -for his aid. "Now, when can you sail? Every minute counts." - -"I know, but I can't possibly start sooner than the morning of the -third day from now. Say midnight of the second night after this. My -cargo is not all in, and it would look too suspicious altogether. -But the 'Otter' is a fast ship, and we will get down the coast much -faster than will Eirik with his warships." - -"You can expect us then," said Sigurd. "Will you meet us on shore?" - -"It will be better so," replied Ulf. "I will get the 'Otter' farther -out before nightfall, and will wait for you opposite here with a -small boat." - -With a parting handshake Sigurd slipped over the side again, and -rowed slowly through the shipping on his way back. As he passed a -large ship, he saw that the sailors were making a clumsy effort to -raise the sail. Indeed, from their looks he took them for newly -raised levies from the country on their way to join Hakon, as the -ship was a war vessel. He rested a moment, watching them with a -smile; then it died away as he saw an officer, whose back was turned -toward him, standing directly beneath the heavy spar that the men -were hoisting. - -"He'd better look out," thought Sigurd, "if those fellows lost their -grip on the rope--ah, I thought so!" - -For, even as the thought flashed through his mind, the rope had -slipped loose from the men, and the yard fell, striking the officer a -glancing blow and knocking him overboard. - -With a shout Sigurd drove his oars into the water and reached the -place where the man had gone down before the confused men on the ship -could put out a boat. He could see nothing of the man, so, quickly -throwing off his fur cap and cloak and unbuckling his sword-belt, -Sigurd took a long breath and dived from the boat's side. - -For an instant the ice-cold water paralyzed him; then, opening his -eyes, the boy struck down. There, just beneath him, was the -senseless face of--Thorkel Leira! - -Sigurd checked his stroke. Why not leave this traitor and villain to -his fate, so richly deserved? Why risk his own life for that of a -worthless fellow such as Thorkel? But he only hesitated an instant; -hastily gripping the man's hair, he made for the surface. - -Although Sigurd was a good swimmer, he reached the air with a great -sigh of relief, for he had been under water nearly a minute, and the -water was too cold for comfort. Thorkel had been struck senseless -and made no resistance. - -As he emerged, a shout sounded in his ear, and there beside him was a -small boat. His own skiff was not far, and after the men at his side -hauled up Thorkel, he struck out for his own boat. Sigurd realized -only too well that he did not want to be questioned, for any mishap -now would ruin their plans of escape; so, paying no heed to the -shouts of the Norsemen, he clambered over the stern of his craft, -donned his fur coat hastily, and made for the shore. - -He pulled up the boat and made off at once. His dripping clothes had -already frozen, and the cloak hid most of them, so that he regained -the hall without question. As he entered his room, Vagn greeted him -with a cry of amazement when he threw off the cloak. - -"What on earth--" he began, but Sigurd interrupted with a laugh. - -"Water, rather, Vagn. Help me get these wet things off first." - -Jarl Hakon had sent them a goodly supply of garments, and when Sigurd -had changed to dry clothes he recounted the adventure to his cousin. - -"Good for you, old man!" cried Vagn, as he finished. "I don't think -that I would have resisted the temptation to let him drown and get -rid of the wretch. Did any recognize you?" - -Sigurd shook his head. "I got away too quickly, and Thorkel was -senseless. The yard struck him on the shoulder, so I suppose he -wasn't very badly hurt. Don't say anything to Astrid about it." - -"Why not?" asked Vagn, in surprise. - -"Well," Sigurd hesitated, "she would make a fuss about it, and--well, -I really wish you wouldn't, old fellow!" - -Seeing that Sigurd really wished it so, Vagn agreed, and they went to -Astrid's room to tell her of their plans with Ulf. - -Astrid greeted them with a laugh. "You changed pretty quickly, -Sigurd," she said. - -"Why, what do you mean?" Both boys stared at her. - -"Oh, one of my maids just ran in and told me how some yellow-haired -stranger rescued our old friend Thorkel down in the harbor, and ran -off before they could find out who he was. So I knew that it must be -Fairhair, here!" - -"So it was, Astrid!" cried out Vagn. "If I'd been there I would have -let the scoundrel drown!" - -"No you wouldn't, Vagn," protested Sigurd. "You might kill him in -fair fight, but you wouldn't let him drown without trying to save -him!" - -"Never mind," declared Astrid, looking at Sigurd, "it was a noble -thing to do, Fairhair, and I am proud of you for it." - -Sigurd blushed rosily, and hastily turned the conversation by -describing his meeting with Ulf. - -"By the way," added Vagn, "I found out something. At night our doors -are locked and a man sleeps outside in the hall, before them. Hakon -must think we are worth keeping!" - -Sigurd thought it over. "The only way I can see is to entice our -guard inside and tie him up, then go to Astrid's room and seize her -guard before he can cry out. Any way, Astrid, be ready on the second -night from this, about midnight, and we will get you somehow." - -"We had best not be seen together in the meantime," cautioned the -girl, "or someone may become suspicious." - -Vagn nodded. "That's right. Well, we won't see you till we come for -you, then!" - -"All right," laughed Astrid, as they left. "Good-by, till then!" - - - - -CHAPTER V. - -THE ESCAPE FROM THRANDHEIM. - -That night the two boys watched, and discovered that their guard was -changed at midnight, so they decided to make the attempt as soon as -the guards were changed, as this would give them more time to get -away safely. - -The two succeeding days passed slowly, and the boys spent them in -wandering about the town. They excited no attention, as in the -harbor were one or two Danish ships, a vessel from England, and -another from Iceland, both of the latter being trading ships -wintering in Norway. Sigurd could not repress a shudder as once they -passed the gloomy temple of Thor. - -"When will these people ever become Christian?" he said to his -cousin, as they gazed at the massive stone portal. "Should we really -conquer Norway, let our first deed be to tear down this blood-stained -old place, and erect in its stead a temple to Christ!" - -"Aye," corrected Vagn. "'If!' A vow is an easy thing, Fairhair, to -make, but a hard one to fulfill. Norway has many chiefs as noble as -Jarl Hakon, and no country can be conquered against its will while -there is one to lead the people against the invader. King Svein, or -his son Canute, may well take England, for Ethelred is a cruel and -hated king; but I misdoubt that we shall ever come to Thrandheim as -conquerors." - -On the second evening, when Harald came to lock them in their room, -he grumbled, "If it were not for you two, I would be with the Jarls -now. It will soon be all up with your Jomsborgers now!" - -"Why, what do you mean?" cried Vagn. "Eirik hasn't come here yet!" - -"Nor will he," rejoined Harald, as he shot the bolt. "He passed -outside the Firth to-day with sixty ships, and will join his father -by to-morrow night at More." - -"How many ships will both Jarls have?" called out Sigurd. - -The man paused in the hallway. "Close onto two hundred, for Hakon -took seventy-four south with him, and he will collect as many more in -the south." - -As the man's steps died away the two boys stared at each other in -dismal silence. - -"Too late, Sigurd!" Vagn's voice broke. - -"Not yet," contended Sigurd, stoutly. "Ulf said that the 'Otter' was -fast enough to pass Eirik, and besides, our own fleet may not have -come so far north yet. Never give up!" - -"That's true," granted Vagn, "for the men will probably want to land -and plunder. Well, there may be hope yet." - -They stood watch and watch until midnight; then, after the relieved -guard had retired, Vagn nudged Sigurd and the latter emitted a long, -dismal groan. - -At the second groan the man outside stirred; at the third he undid -the bolts, and said, "Here, what's wrong? Are you sick?" - -Sigurd groaned again, muttering something, and the man entered. As -he did so, Vagn threw his cloak over his head while Sigurd sprang at -him. For an instant he struggled furiously, but the cloak stifled -him, and soon he was lying bound on the floor, while the boys darted -off down the hall. - -Silently they made their way down to the women's quarters, meeting no -one. The man before Astrid's door was half asleep, and they secured -him with only a slight struggle. As they did so, the door opened and -the girl came out, a dark cloak over her kirtle. - -"Good!" she whispered, as she saw the man lying bound. "I'm all -ready." - -They gained the street without mishap, and ran at top speed down the -hill to the harbor, without meeting a person. Arriving at the -waterside, they found the "Otter's" boat awaiting them, with Ulf -himself on the shore, wrapped in a cloak. - -As they rowed out to the ship, Vagn told Ulf how they had escaped, -and as they reached the "Otter," Ulf leaped on deck, crying in a low -tone, "All ready men! Slip the cable and out oars." - -The oars, already muffled, were run out, and the men soon made the -"Otter" move briskly through the water, the faint starlight serving -to guide them through the shipping. A little later they gained the -open Firth, and the huge square sail was hoisted. They were at last -on their way home! - -"Well, that is the last I will see of Thrandheim for many a day." -declared Ulf, as they watched the shores flit by. "It will not -matter much, though. There is little to be gained in trading from -this country, and next voyage I think I will go to England or -Flanders. Now, don't you want to turn in? I have made the cabin -ready for the Lady Astrid, and I suppose that you can turn in with -the men, as I will." - -By morning they were well down the coast, and as the "Otter" was a -notably fast ship, Ulf had no fear of pursuit. All day they sailed -south, and at evening the ship's prow was turned out to sea. - -"Eirik's fleet passed down yesterday afternoon," explained Ulf, "and -we do not want to run into them. If the wind holds fair we will be -nearly opposite Hiorunga Firth by morning, and will turn in to the -coast then." - -When the boys wakened in the morning they saw that the "Otter" was -indeed heading east, but a thick fog lay over the sea and the wind -had dropped, the "Otter" being propelled by her oars. - -"We are near the coast," declared Ulf, "and as the sun must be just -rising this fog will blow away before long." - -Suddenly, as they forged slowly ahead, the helmsman hailed Ulf, who -sprang into the forecastle. - -"Come hither, friends," he called to the boys, and pointing ahead, -"what is that yonder?" - -There, ahead of them, it seemed as though many lights were burning -dimly through the mist. For a few minutes they gazed, puzzled; then -Vagn gave a cry. - -"Turn her prow, quickly!" he shouted to the helmsman. "Those are not -fires at all! That is a fleet yonder, and the fog where they are -must have cleared off, so that the sun shines on the gilded -dragon-prows! That is what we see!" - -It was too late, however, for a few minutes later the fog cleared off -around them, and not a mile away they saw the high cliffs of Norway; -while, farther off, gleamed the white sails of a great fleet of ships. - -"Which fleet is it?" cried Sigurd, his heart leaping. - -"I know not," responded Ulf. "We must run in and take our chance. -If the worst comes to the worst, we can outrun them, for the wind is -coming up strongly. Now for breakfast." - -They ate a hurried meal, while the "Otter" plowed on swiftly through -the waves. At the end of an hour Vagn, who was watching from the -forecastle, cried out in joy. "It is our own fleet! I see a sail -with a red cross!" - -"That is Hiorunga Firth, there to the north," declared Ulf, as Astrid -joined them in the prow. "See, the fleet is heading in toward it, -and we may be in time yet, for we will be up with them in half an -hour." - -In less than that space of time, indeed, they had come so near that -they could make out the individual ships, and as they all knew Jarl -Sigvald's ship by sight, Ulf steered toward that division. - -[Illustration: _As they all knew Jarl Sigvald'a ship by sight, Ulf -steered toward that division._] - -What a sight it was! Ship after ship, with their gayly painted sails -and glittering prows, in the shape of birds and beasts, all crowded -with armed men, while, far ahead, shone the sails of more. - -"That looks strange, Vagn," said Sigurd, uneasily. "I do not see any -of my father's ships; it must be that he has pressed ahead, and may -fall into Sigvald's trap!" - -A few minutes later the nearest ship hailed them, and as the -Jomsvikings recognized Vagn and Sigurd a mighty shout went up, which -rolled from ship to ship as the news spread through the fleet, and -amid a roar of war-horns and clashing of arms, the "Otter" drew up to -the ship of Jarl Sigvald, the oars being hastily drawn in, and Vagn -leaped aboard, followed closely by Sigurd. - -Sigvald was overjoyed at their escape, but there was no time for -telling the story now. Vagn swiftly described the plot of Jarl -Hakon, and a yell of rage arose from the men who had crowded around. -It was echoed from the other ships, who had drawn in, as the helmsman -shouted out the tidings. - -"We have no time to lose, then," cried Sigvald, "for Bui has gone -ahead and has landed men to plunder." He turned to the "Otter." -"Ulf," he shouted, "keep the Lady Astrid on board, and wait for three -days at the midmost of the Herey Isles, a mile or two south. If you -hear no news of us by then, fly with all speed to King Svein." - -Ulf waved his hand, and with a last good-by the boys parted from -Astrid as the ships were cast asunder. - -"I will put you on board your ship," exclaimed Sigvald to Vagn, "as -we go. Up sail! Out oars!" He seized his great war-horn and blew a -mighty blast. The men sprang to their places, and as they passed -through the fleet cheer after cheer went up for the plucky boys who -had brought the news. Hastily sails arose again and blades flashed -out in the morning sun, for Bui, who had landed ahead of the fleet -near Hod Island, must be warned at once. - -They drew alongside Vagn's ship, and the two boys sprang on board. -Vagn's men, who had followed his father and grandfather in many a -hard fray, went wild at the sight of him, and greeted Sigurd no less -heartily. But Fairhair was worried about his father, who he knew was -over-rash, and suddenly he heard the helmsman give a great cry of -dismay, and saw him wave his arms. - -"What is it?" he cried, as he dashed up the ladder, followed by Vagn. -But there was no need of words. There, cutting swiftly around the -end of Hod Island toward Hiorunga Bay, was the division of Bui, in -mad haste. He had fallen into the trap! - - - - -CHAPTER VI. - -HIORUNGA BAY. - -"Forward!" Jarl Sigvald's war-horn rang out its command, and the -fleet pressed on to support their rash chief. Sigurd gave a groan of -dismay, but Vagn encouraged him. - -"He won't be taken, Fairhair, but will return when he sees the trap. -Nevertheless, we have fallen into it, for Sigvald cannot back out now -with honor; we must go forward and fight like Jomsborg men!" - -Bui's ships disappeared around the north end of Hod Island; then, as -Sigvald got his fleet into battle array, with each half-dozen ships -lashed side by side, they came back into sight, with lowered sails -and oars lashing the waters to spray. - -The ship of Bui was the first to reach the fleet, and as he stood in -the forecastle and shouted of his discovery, Sigvald checked him, and -ordered him to form his battle-line behind the fleet. Bui rowed past -Vagn's ship, and as he did so Sigurd sprang on the rail, with a shout. - -There was no time for stopping, so his father only waved his hand in -passing, and called out, in joy and surprise, "Skoal, Sigurd! Use -your best weapons to-day!" It was the last word Sigurd ever had with -his father, Bui of Bornholm. - -As the fleet moved forward slowly, one by one the ships of Bui -straggled back and formed behind Sigvald's line. The Jomsborg men -might have fled still, but they scorned to do that, and it was -against their laws. The day was clouding up now, and as they turned -the headland into the bay, the wind suddenly changed and blew dead -against them--and there, moving on them, lay the Norse fleet! - -Spreading out like a great crescent, glittering with oars and steel, -Hakon's fleet moved forward, while Sigvald broke his array into three -parts. Vagn Akison, by virtue of his father's place and his own -renown, commanded a third part of the ships; beside his vessels lay -those of Bui, while Sigvald commanded the last twenty. - -"Look, Vagn!" cried Sigurd, as they watched the Norsemen, still a -half-mile distant, "they are breaking up likewise!" - -"Yes," replied Vagn bitterly, "but there must be nearly two hundred -ships there, crowded with men. That means sixty or seventy against -each of our divisions of twenty!" - -Then, leaping into the waist, Vagn distributed the byrnies, or shirts -of woven steel rings, and opened several chests of swords and axes, -so that the men could get at them. He and Sigurd were fully armed, -and naught remained but to await the attack. - -It was not long in coming. Jarl Hakon's banners were suddenly -raised, with a great burst of war-horns, and a flight of stones and -arrows fell among the Jomsborg ships. Sigvald's banner was run up -likewise, and his men replied, but the Norsemen had the advantage, -for the wind was with them, and fast rising to a gale. Nevertheless, -the Jomsvikings shot well, and occasioned great confusion among their -foes, for their long, sharp shafts pierced shield, byrnie and body. - -As the two fleets drew together, most of the bows were flung aside, -and the spear-racks were emptied. Sigurd and Vagn, standing on the -high forecastle with their chosen men, plied their weapons fast; but -a minute later, with a crash that nearly threw them to the deck, the -fleets came together. - -"Concentrate on the ship against us!" shouted Sigurd, and a hail of -spears poured into the large ship whose prow ground into that of -Vagn's. The Norsemen strove to board, but a terrible burst of -weapons met them, and an instant later Sigurd gave a cry of joy. - -"Hurrah! We will win yet!" Vagn echoed the cry, for their attacker -was slowly withdrawing. - -"Cast a grapnel on them!" ordered Vagn, and as the Norse ship was -secured he leaped into her, followed by Sigurd and his forecastle -men. The Norsemen gave way, but as the Jomsvikings pressed forward a -new burst of horns arose, and into the press sailed a dozen fresh -ships. - -"Back for your lives!" called Sigurd, as he saw a crowd of the enemy -pouring aboard. "Back to our ship!" - -They could see nothing of the battle on either hand, for they were -surrounded by the Norse ships; but as they gained the deck of their -own vessel they heard a wild shout from Bui's ships, and again the -Norse line shrank backward. As Sigurd looked around, he saw Jarl -Hakon's ship just behind their own. - -"Look there, Vagn! Order the men to turn their spears on Hakon!" - -Vagn did so, and a storm of spears and arrows poured upon the Jarl's -ship. He stood proudly in the forecastle, and for a moment the rain -of weapons almost hid him; then he reappeared, smiling, but his armor -was ripped to pieces, and he shook himself free of it. - -Now a fresh burst of foemen bore down on Vagn's division, and only -the higher sides of the vikings' ships saved them. Men were falling -fast, but as yet the vikings had not suffered nearly so much as had -the enemy. The fighting had not yet become hand to hand, and in the -thickly crowded Norse ships not a Jomsborg spear failed of its mark, -and the trained skill of the vikings told heavily against the -unskilled levies of Hakon. - -Suddenly Sigurd laughed, and staggered. "What means the laugh, -Fairhair?" called Vagn, who was directing his men in the waist. - -"An arrow, but in the arm only," replied Sigurd. A shaft had pierced -his arm, just above the elbow, but he snapped off the barb and drew -it through the wound, and continued fighting. The next moment, -however, another arrow flew past his head and was buried in the rail -behind him; a third followed it, glancing from his helmet. - -Sigurd realized that someone was aiming at him steadily, and marking -the direction from which the arrows came, he saw the face of Thorkel -Leira in one of the ships below. The man was just aiming a fourth -shaft, half covered by the shield of a follower. - -Catching the arrow on his shield, Sigurd flung a spear in reply, with -all his force. The weapon struck full on the shield that covered -Thorkel, pierced it, and Thorkel staggered back. A fresh attack drew -Sigurd's attention, however, and when he looked for Thorkel again, -his ship had withdrawn. Now there happened a strange and terrible -thing. - -The day had steadily grown darker, with a rising wind. Suddenly a -blaze of lightning fell athwart the sky, and Jarl Hakon's ship stood -forth in the sight of all, wrapped in lambent flame, the Jarl himself -standing triumphantly in the stern, grasping a hammer like that of -Thor. - -A cry of horror arose from the Jomsvikings, who took the figure for -that of the war god; and the lightning was followed by a thick hail, -the stones as large as eggs, which burst full in the faces of the -Jomsborg men. - -"Thor with us! The gods fight for us!" An exultant shout pealed -upward from the Norse host, who pressed onward with renewed vigor. -All at once a cry broke from Vagn, a cry of anger and dismay. - -"Sigurd! Look yonder!" - -There behind them Jarl Sigvald had cut the lashings of his ships and -was fleeing! The Jomsborg men seemed wild with terror, for now they -thought that Hakon was right, that Thor and Odin were in truth -fighting for him, and they lost heart. - -Sigvald's ship cut through the press close behind that of Vagn, and -as it passed the boy called out: - -"Sigvald! Turn and fight! Turn and fight!" - -But Sigvald only urged his men to greater efforts, and the sail was -run up. At this Vagn seized a spear from the deck, and with a curse -hurled it at the fleeing Jarl. The spear missed him, but struck down -the helmsman at his side, and the ship was gone from sight in a -moment. - -Louder and louder pealed the war-horns of Hakon, as ship after ship -followed Sigvald in his flight. Vagn's men gave one angry yell, then -fought on in silence. Presently their attackers drew back for -breathing-space, and as they did so the boys saw Bui's ships close at -hand. - -Bui was without hope, but he was true to his vows, and fought on -stoutly. The Norse ships gave way before his onset, and with a shout -of triumph Bui's men cut their lashings to pursue. It was a fatal -error; for even as they did so fresh Norse ships drove down on them, -broke their solid front, surrounded them and began to pour in -boarders. - -Sigurd, watching helplessly, saw the Norsemen sweep aboard and slowly -clear the deck; Bui retreated to the forecastle with a few of his -men, but he was surrounded now, and his foes closed in. The old -warrior fought on steadily; Sigurd caught a glimpse of his father in -single combat with a gigantic Norseman, wielding an axe. Bui -slipped, and the axe whirled above him and fell on his helmet, -wounding him terribly; but recovering, Bui cut down his foe, then -leaped to the rail. - -"Overboard, all Bui's men!" rang out his voice, loudly. Just then -the fight closed in on Vagn afresh, but Sigurd caught a flash of -armor, and knew that his father had died as a viking should, beneath -the waves. - -The Jomsborg ships broke up now, each fighting desperately to the -last. One by one they were boarded and swept clean of men, and at -length it came the turn of Vagn's ship. - -Then, as the Norsemen swept over the side, the vikings put sword and -axe in play for the first time, the boys at their head. Time after -time the flood poured across the bulwarks, and time after time the -Jomsborg steel stemmed the tide and drove it back. At last a wild -yell arose behind them, and those of the crew who were left retreated -slowly to the forecastle, fighting desperately. - -A very handsome man, of lofty stature, swept over the prow with his -men, and cut his way to Vagn. The two met with a clash of swords, -and the tall man, evidently a leader of note, fell beneath Vagn's -blows; he was up again, however, and his men swiftly closed around -Vagn. Sigurd gave a shout of rage, and sprang to his friend's side, -but too late. - -The sea of fierce faces swept down on him, but recoiled before the -Jomsborg axes. Vagn lay motionless, and Sigurd, bestriding his body, -faced the handsome leader, axe in hand. The other's sword flashed, -and for a moment Sigurd was hard put to it to ward off the storm of -blows; then his axe fell on the other's helm, and the man staggered -back. Before he could follow up his advantage, Sigurd slipped in a -pool of blood--he saw a sword whirled above him, gave his battle-cry -once more--and sank across the body of Vagn. - -With the fall of Vagn and Sigurd, the battle was over. Thirty-five -ships had fled with Sigvald, twenty-five had remained with Bui and -Vagn. One by one they were boarded and cleared, for Jarl Hakon gave -no quarter; one by one they floated out of the whirl, empty but for -dying and dead. The vikings died beneath sword and spear, or -followed Bui's example and plunged beneath the waves, while far in -the distance the white sails of Sigvald glittered awhile and then -vanished to the south. - - - - -CHAPTER VII. - -HOW VAGN KEPT HIS VOW. - -"That is all, I think; twenty of them. No, this one stirred -somewhat. Here, lift him up." - -Sigurd opened his eyes. Over him were bending two men, one his -handsome opponent, the other--Thorkel Leira. The boy struggled to -his feet, the former assisting. - -It was only mid-afternoon, the storm had passed, and about the -Jomsborg ships lay the Norse fleet. Glancing around, Sigurd saw the -decks heaped with dead, and in the waist of the ship was a little -group of Jomsvikings, their arms bound. Then he remembered Vagn. - -Thorkel Leira was holding a horn of water to Vagn's lips, and as -Sigurd, weak and dizzy, knelt at his friend's side, he wondered why -Thorkel thus aided his deadly enemy. He was soon to know. - -Vagn looked up. As he caught sight of Thorkel he dashed the horn -aside and struggled up on Sigurd's arm. Before he could speak, -however, a group of men approached and bound the boys' arms, under -the orders of the handsome chief. Then they were led into the waist -of the ship and joined the others. - -The men gave a murmur of joy. "It was a noble fight, eh, Vagn?" -muttered an old viking, Biorn of Bretland, or Wales. "I have fought -for twenty years under your father Aki and your grandfather -Palnatoki, and I never saw a greater battle than this." - -"It is a sad one for the brotherhood, Biorn," replied Vagn weakly, -"when the Jarl himself turned tail and fled." - -A murmur of anger ran around the group, then Sigurd asked, "Who is -the tall man, and what will they do with us?" - -Biorn nodded toward some small boats near by. "They are taking us on -shore, I know not why. Neither do I know the man." - -A group of Norsemen approached, and the captives were led to the -boats, which were swiftly rowed to the shore. Here, upon a long -fallen tree, sat the Jomsborg men, with their feet bound in a long -rope; but their hands were left free. - -The Norsemen surrounded them, binding up wounds, exchanging rough -jests on the battle, and examining with awe and wonder these vikings -whose name was so famous, and who had fought so stoutly against such -great odds. - -Presently the tall man and Thorkel Leira landed. "I have it, -Sigurd!" cried Vagn. "That handsome man must be Jarl Eirik, Hakon's -son!" - -At that instant the handsome man came up to the captives. - -"You fought well and stoutly, Jomsvikings," he said, "and I am in -truth sorry that Jarl Hakon has ordered that no quarter be given, for -I would fain spare your lives if I might." - -"It is the fortune of war," replied Vagn, smiling bravely. "Had we -conquered, I do not think that Sigvald would have spared Hakon -either, yet Christian men have more merciful customs than you who -follow Thor and Odin." - -The other flushed slightly, turning to Thorkel. "It is not to my -taste, Thorkel, to slay these helpless men thus." - -Thorkel smiled his cunning, cruel smile. "It is much to my taste, -Jarl, to slay Vagn Akison!" - -At this Vagn cried out, "Yet you feared to stand before me in battle, -Thorkel! Say, will you loose my bonds and meet me now with sword or -axe?" - -A murmur of assent arose from the Norsemen who stood around, but -Thorkel shook his head, as he fingered the big axe in his hand. - -As Thorkel withdrew to speak with the handsome man for a moment, old -Biorn leaned over and whispered excitedly to Sigurd: "It is just a -chance, Fairhair, so try it." - -Sigurd nodded as Thorkel returned. "Best begin with the chiefs, -Thorkel," he cried, although his heart beat madly, for if Biorn's -plan did not work nothing could save his life. Thorkel advanced and -stood in front of him. - -"Since you are in haste to die, let it be so." - -"Wait!" exclaimed Sigurd, as the man swung his axe aloft. "Let -someone hold my hair, lest it be defiled and soiled." - -A Norseman, with a word of admiration at the lad's bravery, stepped -forward and gathered up the boy's long, fair hair in his hands, and -the axe swung. - -As it descended, Sigurd jerked his body so strongly to one side that -the axe was buried in the earth, and Thorkel lost his balance and -fell forward. A laugh went up from the crowd as the angry man rose, -but the handsome chief advanced and held his arm. - -"Who are you, handsome lad?" - -"I am called Sigurd, and am Bui's son," replied Sigurd, looking up to -the other's eyes, which met his in admiration. "The Jomsborg men are -not yet all dead!" - -"Truly you are a son of Bui!" exclaimed the other. "Will you take -life and peace from me?" - -"If you have the power to give it," answered Sigurd. - -The man drew himself up. "He offers who has power to give--Jarl -Eirik Hakonson." - -"Thanks, Jarl," replied Sigurd, with a breath of relief, "I will -accept it." The whisper of old Biorn had proved true. - -Thorkel, with a dark frown, plucked up his axe, and cried angrily, -"Though you spare all these men, Eirik, Vagn shall not escape me!" - -With that he raised the axe. As the weapon whirled, Biorn flung -himself against Thorkel's knees. The man stumbled, the axe fell; and -Vagn, springing up in a flash, seized it and fulfilled his vow. - -A great shout of applause rang out, for above all things Norsemen -love a brave deed. They crowded around admiringly, and Jarl Eirik -with a smile, said, "Will you also take life, Vagn?" - -"That I will," answered Vagn, "if you will also give it to my men as -well." - -"Loose them from the rope," commanded the Jarl, and it was done. - -By this time evening was coming on, and the Norsemen hastily made a -camp on the shore; Jarl Hakon was encamped across the bay. The men -sat around the fires and talked in low tones, and presently the two -boys were summoned to the fire of the Jarl. - -Eirik greeted them with a winning smile. "Sit down and eat, friends, -for I have somewhat to think over. My father gave express commands -that no Jomsviking was to be spared; why I gave you life I know not, -save that you were but boys, and full of courage. Now, whither would -you go?" - -Vagn looked at Sigurd. The latter nodded, and Vagn told Eirik the -story of Ulf and Astrid, who were waiting a few miles away. When he -finished the Jarl sat in thought for a moment. - -"Here is my counsel. If I send you both off together, my father will -send a ship after you to slay you, and I will not have my promise -broken. I go home from here by land to the mountains, and so to my -own earldom. I would advise that you, Vagn, come with me, for I can -protect you, and let Sigurd rejoin Ulf with the eighteen Jomsvikings -who are left. I will send you home, Vagn, within a month at most." - -"That is a good plan," exclaimed Vagn. "Do you not think so, -Fairhair?" - -Sigurd assented, though he disliked to part with his cousin; but -there was no help for it, and so it was decided. - -Early the next morning the Jomsborg men and Sigurd ran out three -small boats and said farewell to Vagn. Eirik armed them all well, -and made them many presents; and as they pushed off Vagn stood on the -shore, waving farewell. - -"I'll see you at Jomsborg next month," called Sigurd. "Farewell!" - -Under a fair wind the three boats ran quickly down the bay, rounded -the end of Hod Island, and arrived in an hour at the Herey Islands. -Steering in between the largest and smallest, they reached into the -bay, and there before them lay the "Otter." - -A shout of greeting came to them, and as they pulled up to the side -Ulf Ringsson sprang on the rail. - -"What news of the battle? Who won?" - -Sigurd pointed to his men, all of them wounded. "These are all left -of the Jomsvikings," he replied. A cry of horror went up, and Ulf -staggered back. - -"Impossible! Where is your father Bui, Jarl Sigvald, Vagn Akison, -Aslak Holmskalle? They cannot be dead!" - -"Some are even worse off," said Sigurd, climbing the rail wearily. -"Vagn is safe, my father is dead with Aslak, and Sigvald and his men -have fled home again." - -While Astrid greeted Sigurd, and his wounded and weary men clambered -on board, Ulf remained stunned with amazement. "Fled! Fled!" he -muttered. "The Jarl himself false to his vows!" - -He could not believe it; for it was the most sacred law of Jomsborg -that no viking should turn his back to a foe. Sigurd told of the -fight, while the excited sailors questioned his men, and as he -finished Astrid sprang forward. - -"You are wounded, Sigurd! See, your arm is all red, and your head is -bloody!" - -"Yes, bind it up," laughed Sigurd bitterly, "for the Jomsborg rules -are shattered with the brotherhood forever!" Then he reeled, and -would have fallen save for the strong hand of Ulf. - -They carried him to the cabin, and while the men set sail, Ulf, who -was skilled as a leech, extracted the broken arrow-head and bound up -the wound. The other, on his head, was not dangerous, and Sigurd -soon fell into a deep sleep, not waking till the afternoon. - -The rocking of the ship told him that they were out at sea, so he -hastened on deck; to his surprise, the land was out of sight, and a -heavy gale was blowing. - -"So you are awake!" cried Astrid. "How do you feel?" - -"Ready for another battle," laughed Sigurd, then his brow clouded -over as he thought of his father. Astrid, divining his thoughts, was -silent for a moment, then changed the subject. - -"We had no sooner left the land than this gale broke on us, and Ulf -says that it is growing stronger every minute." - -Sigurd looked around. Indeed, the gale was a heavy northeaster, and -now he noticed that the sail was close-reefed, and that everything -was stowed away save the three boats in which he had come to the -"Otter," which were lashed securely in the shelter of the high stern. - -"Hello, I'm glad to see you around so soon!" cried Ulf cheerily, and -the boy gripped his hand in thanks. - -"If Jarl Hakon were here, Ulf, he would say that Ran, the ocean -queen, was trying to complete the work begun by Thor and Odin at -Hiorunga Bay." - -Sigurd smiled at Astrid, but the captain looked about anxiously. - -"We are in for a bad blow, Sigurd. It is good that the 'Otter' is -stanch, for to tell you the truth, we are far from our course for -Denmark, and it may well be that we shall be driven farther still." - - - - -CHAPTER VIII. - -"SKOAL, TO KING OLAF!" - -Much as they loved the keen wind and dash of the spray, Sigurd and -Astrid were soon driven from their post in the bow of the "Otter," -for the seas began rolling up tremendously, and they were forced to -seek the shelter of the cabin. The men were all stowed away below, -save for the watch on duty, and as the "Otter" was a stanch vessel, -and Ulf a good captain, Sigurd had no fear but that they would -outride the storm safely. - -"How strange it all seems!" remarked Astrid that evening. "Only a -few short weeks ago we were all together at the heir-ship feast of my -uncle, and now the Jomsborg power is shattered, Vagn is far off in -Norway, and here we are driving no one knows where, over the sea! I -wonder what became of your falcon!" - -Sigurd laughed. "I wonder what! Never mind, we will soon be back -again with good Queen Gunhild. Hello! how goes it, Ulf?" - -[Illustration: "_Never mind, we will soon be back again with good -Queen Gunhild._"] - -The captain entered, dripping with brine, and shook his head. -"Badly, Sigurd. It is fully the worst storm I ever saw, and I was a -fool for ever putting to sea at this time of year. However, we must -trust in God and do our best to weather it." - -So for five days the "Otter" scudded before the gale, utterly -helpless. There was plenty of work for all, however, for the giant -seas swept the low hull repeatedly, and everyone was kept busy -bailing the ship, from morning to night. It was lucky, indeed, that -the eighteen Jomsvikings had come aboard with Sigurd, for as it was -all were so exhausted by the constant labor that they worked -mechanically, and at the end of every watch they lashed themselves to -the bulwarks and dropped to sleep at once. - -On the fifth evening Sigurd was sitting in the cabin, talking to -Astrid, when they were startled by a loud crash, followed by shouts -and cries. Sigurd ran out on deck. - -"The mast!" shouted Ulf in his ear. Sigurd turned and saw only a -ragged stump. Ulf motioned him inside, for the gale blew all words -away, and when the door was closed cried in despair. - -"Sigurd, I have done my best! Had the mast held we would have been -safe, for the storm is breaking, I think; but an hour since I saw -land in the west, and we cannot beat off now." - -"Know you what land it was?" inquired Astrid. Ulf shook his head -despondently. - -"For aught I know, it may be Scotland, or the Fareys, or the Orkneys, -or even that Vinland which the Icelanders say Eirik the Red -discovered. I am lost, and we are in the hands of God." - -Presently Ulf went out again, and managed to rig enough canvas to the -stump of the mast to keep the "Otter's" head before the wind. In -this fashion they drove ahead all night, and with daybreak a long -line of cliffs was disclosed, straight ahead, and only a few miles -away. - -As they stood watching on the forecastle, Astrid pulled at Sigurd's -arm. "Why can't we escape in those boats, when the 'Otter' drives -ashore?" she shouted in his ear, pointing to the three boats lashed -in the stern. This had not occurred to Sigurd or Ulf, because the -viking ships themselves were so small that they rarely carried boats, -as they could be drawn up on shore easily enough. - -"Hurrah! Good idea, Astrid!" Sigurd hastened to Ulf's side, but the -latter shrugged his shoulders at the plan. - -"To what end? We will only be putting off death for a few minutes; -once we drive on those cliffs and it will be over." - -Nevertheless, at Sigurd's urging the boats were made ready, for -although the storm was breaking they were fast nearing the shore. -Into each boat were put arms and food, well secured. - -"We must leave before she strikes," shouted Ulf, "else the seas will -sweep boats and all away." - -Sigurd nodded, and returned to Astrid. The cliffs were not a mile -away now, and they could see the white spray flying high from the -dark rocks. Presently Ulf motioned to them, and they descended into -the waist of the ship, joining the crowd about the boats. Sigurd -took command of one, Ulf of another, and Biorn of Bretland commanded -the third; then all awaited the word. The "Otter" was low in the -water now, and it would be no great task to launch the boats over her -side. - -Presently Ulf gave a sharp command. "Out!" The six men assigned to -each boat lifted it, poised it an instant on the rail, then as a -giant crest foamed along the three boats were borne out together. A -man leaped in each, and fended off from the "Otter's" side with a -spear, while the rest hastily embarked. - -"Farewell, old Otter!" cried Ulf, the last to leave; and as they -swept from the vessel they saw her suddenly lurch and reel wildly. - -"Just in time!" said Sigurd to Astrid, who was in his boat. "She -struck then, but scraped over; next time--" - -While he was speaking, the ship heeled far over on her side, amid a -cloud of flying foam; but they could not watch her further, for now -they were fighting for their own lives. Sigurd was at the tiller, -and he followed Ulf closely, while the men rowed steadily. The seas -swept them in under the cliffs, and Ulf suddenly raised his hand and -waved it. Straight at the high walls his boat darted, and then -Sigurd saw a little stretch of beach before them as he swept in. - -With a last stroke the men drove the boats up, then leaped out and -drew them up. Sigurd carried Astrid up the beach and looked around. -The cliffs did not seem so steep now, and Sigurd realized that they -would be able to climb them, just as Ulf joined him. The captain was -in more hopeful spirits now. - -"Your plan certainly saved us, lady," he exclaimed to Astrid. "I had -given up hope--strange I did not think of those boats myself. But we -so seldom use small boats that I never gave them a thought. Now, -Fairhair, what had we best do?" - -Sigurd looked out to sea, where the hull of the "Otter" was fast -breaking up under the smashing blows of the waves. "Well, I think we -had better take the arms and food from the boats, scale those cliffs, -and see where we are. We have over a score of well-armed men, and -the folk, whoever they are, will hesitate before molesting us." - -Ulf turned and gave the necessary orders, then, followed by Biorn and -the rest, they made for the cliffs. These, as Sigurd had foreseen, -offered no great difficulties to the Norsemen, who were all used to -climbing about their native fiords, and in half an hour they stood on -the brow and looked about. - -Before them lay a heavily wooded country, rolling with small hills -and valleys, but without a sign of habitation. The storm was nearly -over now, and while the seas still rolled mountain-high below them, -the sun was just breaking through the clouds, and in the distance -they caught the sheen of a river. The men hailed the sun with a cry -of delight, and Ulf pointed to the river. - -"Let us make for that, Sigurd, and there we can have fresh water and -a meal. After that we can decide what to do." - -So, striking away from the sea, they entered the forest. It was the -end of autumn now, and though the leaves had fallen from many of the -trees, the forest was composed in great part of pines, fresh and -green. Even Biorn looked puzzled as he tried to make out the country. - -"I do not think it is Scotland," he said, "and certainly it is -neither the Fareys nor the Orkneys. It is not my own land of Wales, -for that was far from our course; it might be Ireland, but I have -never been in that land." - -"Ireland!" cried Astrid. "Why, isn't that where men say Olaf -Tryggveson is king?" - -"So it is," rejoined Sigurd, "but it must be a wide land, and we have -small hope of finding Northmen here." - -"Well," remarked Ulf, "we can but push on boldly. If we are indeed -in Ireland, we are lucky, for men say that in that country there is -the finest civilization in Europe--" - -"There used to be, Ulf," growled old Biorn, "just as there used to be -in Wales, my own land; but the heathen vikings have well-nigh -destroyed it all." - -Soon they come out on the banks of a wide and sluggish river, and -with cries of joy the men rushed down to the bank and plunged in, -drinking greedily and washing the salt brine from their bodies. -Sigurd filled a horn for Astrid, but as she returned it a shout broke -from Biorn: - -"Back! Back! Out swords, men!" - -At the same moment a flight of arrows fell among the men, striking -down two of the sailors, and a wild yell reëchoed from the trees. -The Jomsvikings, protected by their byrnies and helmets, hastily -scrambled up the bank and fell into line around the leaders, the -others forming behind them. - -Dark forms flitted among the trees, and Sigurd called out, "Shield to -shield, men! Hold your spears ready for the word." - -The vikings' bows were useless, the strings having been soaked, so -they waited helplessly. Arrows fell thickly, but Sigurd covered -Astrid with his shield, and they did no further harm. Then, with a -yell, a crowd of men broke out of the forest; they were clad in -woolen tunics, a few wore armor, while all held spears and axes. As -they charged, Sigurd gave the word. - -The attackers broke as the heavy Jomsborg spears sent half a dozen to -the ground; but as they did so a war-horn rang out behind them, and a -voice cried in Norse, "At them, men! For the Cross!" - -Through the forest glades swept a band of steel-clad men, driving the -others before them in headlong flight. As pursuers and pursued -vanished amid the trees, their leader approached the little band of -shipwrecked men. - -Although Sigurd was tall, he noted with surprise that this man was a -good head and shoulders above him, and broad in proportion. His -features were frank and open, his eyes blue and piercing, and his -hair was red-gold, waving over his golden armor. He wore a blue -cloak, a gold helm and gold-linked byrnie, and on his shield was a -great cross in red. - -"Are you Christian men?" he asked, as he drew near, fixing his eyes -on Sigurd. - -"That we are," cried the latter, joyfully. "Where are we? Who are -you who rescued us so opportunely?" - -"You are on the coast of Ireland, and my city of Dublin is only three -miles distant. These Irish would never have dared come so near had -they not thought me absent from home on a cruise. I am Olaf, son of -King Tryggve of Norway." - -At this the Jomsvikings gazed in wonder on the handsome chief; then -with a blast on his war-horn old Biorn led the shout: - -"Skoal to King Olaf! Skoal!" - - - - -CHAPTER IX. - -HOW ASTRID FARED FORTH. - -"Thanks, friends!" smiled Olaf, and Sigurd thought that never in all -his life had he seen so handsome and kingly a man. "Who are you, -young sir? And who are these men? Truly, I have seldom beheld so -fine a set of warriors, wounded though they are!" - -"I am Sigurd Buisson of Bornholm, King, and with me is Astrid of -Vendland, niece of Gunhild of Denmark. This is Ulf Ringsson, captain -of our ship, and as for my men, they are the last of the Jomsvikings." - -"What!" Olaf's eyes opened in amazement, and he threw down his -weapons. "Tell me your tale, quickly! I heard of Svein's accession -feast, but nothing of what followed. Has Sigvald, then, won Norway?" - -Sigurd told of the battle at Hiorunga Bay, and Olaf's face darkened. -As he concluded, the Norsemen of Olaf returned and all took up the -march for Dublin, Sigurd's men mingling with the others. - -While they walked along Olaf told them of how he had fled to Russia -when his father was murdered, how he had become a viking, wandering -the ocean, and how he had been baptized. Then he had come to Ireland -and won the kingdom of Dublin, ruling it together with his -brother-in-law, Olaf Kvaran. - -"We saw your ship from the castle," he explained, "so I came out to -aid any who might escape. Now, what do you intend doing?" - -"As to that," returned Sigurd, "I care little; but the Lady Astrid -here must be returned home." - -"Then will you be my man?" inquired Olaf. - -"That will I!" Sigurd turned to his men and called, "Listen, -Jomsvikings! What say you to taking service with King Olaf?" - -"Aye!" the shout went up, with clashing of arms, and Olaf smiled. -"That pleases me well, Sigurd, for a few Jomsborg men are worth a -hundred others. As to Astrid, she must take her chance; it is too -late in the season for ships now, and I fear she must remain with us -till spring. However, that can wait; there is the city." - -As they left a valley, Dublin lay before them, and the Jomsborg men -cried out in surprise, for the town was very beautiful, and defended -with strong walls and towers such as they had seldom seen. Soon they -were riding through the streets, and the men were quartered in the -palace, where Olaf also assigned rooms to Ulf, Sigurd and Astrid. - -Olaf sent fresh and new garments to all, and soon they rejoined him -in the great hall for the midday meal. Here Olaf introduced them to -Queen Gyda, his brother-in-law, and one or two of his chief men, and -soon they were all chatting away merrily, forgetful of their past -troubles. - -After the meal Sigurd led his Jomsborg men into the hall, up to the -high seat of Olaf. Kneeling, Sigurd placed his hands between those -of the King, and swore to obey him and to be his man. One by one the -rest followed his example, and when the ceremony was over Olaf -presented each man with a shield, ornamented with a large red cross; -but to Sigurd he gave a magnificent golden helmet, on top of which -was wrought a dragon in the same metal, its wings outstretched and -sweeping far back. - -"I won this helm in Russia," smiled the King, "so see that the dragon -bears his face ever toward my foes!" - -Sigurd was overjoyed with the gift, which was a helm worthy a king, -and thanked Olaf most sincerely. The next day he was given a command -in the court-men, or bodyguard, and took up his new duties. - -A week later the first snow fell, but as Astrid had given up all hope -of reaching home before spring, she did not mind greatly. Indeed, -Olaf's court was a pleasant one, and both Sigurd and Astrid enjoyed -themselves immensely. - -Queen Gyda became very fond of Astrid, who was a favorite with all -because of her sunny disposition and gay heart. Sigurd's wound soon -healed, and by Yuletide both had adjusted themselves to their new -surroundings. - -Sigurd grew much attached to King Olaf. Olaf was high-tempered, but -just, and in warlike exercises no one could equal him. Often he -would go down to the harbor, bid his men row out a warship, and then -while the oars were out walk along them. Not content with this, he -would sometimes juggle knives or balls, keeping his balance perfectly. - -He took great interest in "Fairhair," for Sigurd's nickname could not -be left behind, and himself added to the store of sword-tricks the -boy had learned in the school at Jomsborg. - -Yuletide passed, and a few weeks later a ship drove into the bay, to -the astonishment of everyone, for the ships of that day did not often -venture on voyages in winter. The new arrivals were from Norway, and -were traders. - -It happened that Ulf had not heard of the ship, and as he sat at meat -that evening he leaped to his feet suddenly. - -"What is that man who just passed the door?" he exclaimed. The King -darted a swift, keen look at the captain, and replied: - -"That is Thorir Klakke, who arrived to-day from Norway with his -brother Ketil, bearing news and goods for trading." - -"Then beware of him, Olaf," remarked Ulf, "for I have often seen him -in deep converse with Jarl Hakon. He is here for no good, I think." - -Shortly after this Thorir and his brother entered. Both men were -short, dark, and well dressed; but their eyes roved about constantly -beneath their low brows. Ketil's face in particular was powerful, -yet sullen. - -Thorir started slightly at sight of Sigurd, but Olaf greeted him -kindly, and he sat down silently, falling into low converse with his -brother. For several days nothing occurred, save that Thorir had -frequent audiences with Olaf; but at every meal Sigurd noted Ketil's -gaze fixed on himself or Astrid, although it dropped before that of -Sigurd. This puzzled him, for he could not see why Ketil should be -interested, and it also angered him, for he saw plainly that Astrid -did not like it. - -A week or two after the arrival of the Norsemen, Olaf and Sigurd were -talking together, while Astrid and the Queen were busy with their -sewing. Suddenly the King exclaimed, abruptly: - -"Sigurd, how would you like to visit Norway next summer?" - -The boy started, meeting the King's eye eagerly. "Nothing better, my -lord!" - -Olaf smiled. "Well, Thorir urges me to take the realm of Norway from -Hakon, as is my right. He says that the bonders are not satisfied -with the Jarl's rule and that it would be an easy task to overthrow -him. What think you?" - -"Well," responded Sigurd, "if Jarl Hakon could overthrow the might of -Jomsborg, methinks it would go hard with others who attempt his -kingdom." - -Here Astrid, who had been listening earnestly, broke in: "Perhaps, -King Olaf, Hakon might have sent this man to bring you into his -power!" - -Olaf stared at Astrid for a moment, then his blue eyes lit up with a -fierce light, and his fist came down on the table. "As I am a -Christian man, that is it! Beware, Thorir Klakke! If I go to -Norway, it will not be as your master expects!" - -"Hakon has sixteen Jarls under him," remarked the Queen, "and some of -them may not be such great friends of his by next fall. If each -commands one of the districts of the kingdom, you may find an opening -in that way, Olaf." - -The King nodded. "In any case, I will take a strong force. And when -I do rule Norway, I swear by this sword that I will root out paganism -from the land, and bring the country under the Cross of the white -Christ! The Hammer of Thor shall vanish from the land!" - -For a moment the King's handsome face was stern, and filled with a -high resolve; then it softened again, as he rose and bid Sigurd -good-night. - -A few days later the boy felt the bearing of Ketil becoming -intolerable, and he resolved to warn the man to gaze at Astrid less -insolently. It was his watch upon the walls that night, and as he -was passing through the narrow and dark streets, three men sprang out -on him, from a doorway. Although taken by surprise, Sigurd put his -back to a wall, and drew his sword. - -His light shield cracked and split under the furious blows, although -the men could only attack Sigurd singly, for a doorway on either side -of him afforded some protection. Knowing that his men were not far, -Sigurd shouted the old Jomsborg call, and at this the three -assailants redoubled their efforts. - -Sigurd caught an axe blow on his shield, which sheared it from his -arm; but his sword fell upon the other's shoulder, and with a -muttered curse the axe fell. Springing out, Sigurd clove the helm of -the second man with one quick stroke, but he received at the same -time a tremendous blow from the sword of the third man. The boy -staggered, and fell over the body of the man he had killed; and a -loud shout came from the corner, with torches streaming in the lane, -which put the assassins to flight. - -The men gave a shout of anger as they saw Sigurd lying in the street, -but the men had escaped, and Biorn raised Sigurd tenderly. The -latter, thanks to the gift of Olaf, was unhurt, but a dent in the -side of the helmet bore witness to the blow's power. - -Biorn turned over the body of the slain man, and the men gave a cry. -"He is one of the crew of Thorir Klakke! To the King!" - -"Stop!" shouted Sigurd as the vikings were rushing off. "Let this -wait till morning; they cannot escape, and the King dislikes to be -disturbed from his sleep." - -They yielded, although unwillingly, and Sigurd took up his guard -again. This was to be an eventful night, however, for two hours -after midnight one of the harbor guards ran up to him, and cried: - -"Sigurd, Thorir Klakke's ship is leaving, and will not answer our -signals; come quickly!" - -Calling to Biorn, Sigurd ran down to the harbor, and in the dim light -could see the trading vessel, which had not been drawn up on shore, -slowly making her way toward the harbor entrance, for the port was -too wide to freeze far from shore. - -Without wasting time in hailing, Sigurd sprang into a light skiff, -moored at the edge of the ice, set a dozen men at the oars, and in -five minutes was close to the ship. - -"Way enough, men," he said, then lifted his voice: "What business -have you leaving Dublin thus? Come back and give an accounting!" - -At this the oars flashed out the faster, and a mocking voice -responded: "What, indeed, young cockerel? Go back to Jomsborg and--" - -"Help, Sigurd! Help!" broke in a cry, "they have--" - -Silence fell again, but something flashed into the water beside -Sigurd's boat, and as Biorn picked it up, the boy exclaimed: - -"That was Astrid's voice! Alongside, men!" - -Only a mocking laugh answered, as the square sail rose and the ship -filled away. "No use," said Biorn. "Better return; see, I have -picked this up." He held out something to Sigurd. - -Now Sigurd and Astrid both knew the secret of Runic writing, which -only the priests and high chieftains among the Northmen were familiar -with; and looking down at the object, Sigurd saw it was a bit of -wood, with something scratched on it. The light was too dim to see -further. - -"Back to the landing!" cried Sigurd, a terrible fear in his heart. -"Hasten!" - -As they drew ashore he leaped out, and held the piece of wood up to -the light of a torch. - - - - -CHAPTER X. - -FAREWELL TO DUBLIN. - -Biorn and the vikings crowded around, as he deciphered the scratches, -for they were unable to read Runic, which was more like shorthand -than anything else. A cry of dismay burst from Sigurd. - -"Listen, men! 'Ketil bears me to England! Rescue, Sigurd!' Come, -men, to the palace!" - -"To the palace! To the palace!" They echoed his words, and the -terrible Jomsborg battle-yell startled the sleeping town, and pealed -up to the castle. - -"Bring Thorir Klakke, but harm him not," commanded Sigurd, "while I -arouse the king." - -Olaf, however, was already up, wakened by the tumult. Sword in hand, -he entered the great hall just as Sigurd burst in at the other end. - -"What means this uproar?" roared Olaf, his eyes blazing with anger. - -"Justice and vengeance, King!" panted Sigurd, as he handed Olaf the -bit of wood. Sheathing his weapon with a frown, Olaf took the -object, and by the light of the torches read the message. - -"What means it?" - -"Astrid of Vendland is kidnaped, Olaf, and I was set upon by three -men in the streets. One I killed, and he was a man of Thorir -Klakke's--stay, here is Thorir now." - -Biorn and two vikings entered the hall behind Sigurd, leading the -terrified Thorir. Olaf, grasping the whole situation, strode up and -thundered in the merchant's ear: - -"What means this night's work? Where is your brother?" - -Thorir stammered out, "Indeed, my lord, I know not. Is he not in his -rooms?" Then, growing bolder, "Am I accountable for Ketil's doings, -Olaf? What mean you?" - -Olaf looked into the man's eyes a moment, and before that terrible -gaze Thorir squirmed helplessly, but did not weaken. "Begone to your -rooms!" said the King, contemptuously, and turned abruptly to Sigurd. - -"Now tell me the tale in full." - -Sigurd told him of the attack, of the flight of the ship, and of -Astrid's cry, in a few words. "I sent men to her rooms," he -concluded. "Here they come now." - -Close on his words the men entered, with them Queen Gyda and some of -her ladies. Queen Gyda, who had learned the cause of the tumult from -the vikings, told how a messenger had summoned Astrid an hour before, -saying that Sigurd was hurt in a brawl, and how the girl had run out -hastily. - -"Come with me, quickly," ordered the King, and Sigurd followed him to -the ramparts of the castle. The dawn was just breaking, and far out -at sea they saw a speck of white. - -"With Thorir I will deal later, for we have no proof against him as -yet," said the King, "but that man yonder has dishonored me, and -shall die. Fairhair, take what men you will from my courtmen, and -the 'Crane,' the fastest longship in the harbor. Ketil has taken his -brother's ship, so you should soon come up with him. The 'Crane' is -in the water, and is well provisioned; so hasten--be off within the -hour." - -"Thanks, Olaf!" replied Sigurd. "I was about to ask this very thing -of you. I will take my own men and thirty of yours. Thanks, for all -your kindness, and above all for your friendship, Olaf!" - -The King smiled sadly. "I have few friends, Sigurd, and methinks you -are the most faithful of them, though the newest. No, go with God, -and forget him not, for it is still the season of storms." - -As Sigurd turned away, the King stopped him with a sudden impulse. - -"Stay! Give me your hands." Wondering, Sigurd put his hands between -Olaf's. "Now swear again your oath to me, Jarl Sigurd!" - -The boy, overcome by this unexpected title and honor, stumbled -through the oath, and rose with tears in his eyes. - -"I need no oath to be faithful, King Olaf! When you have won Norway, -the title of friend is all I want." - -Quick tears sprang to Olaf's eyes also, and unbuckling his -sword-belt, he threw it over Sigurd's shoulders, saying, "I have no -earldoms yet, but here is my Jarl-gift, my friend. Farewell!" - -Sigurd wrung the King's hand, then turned and ran down the stairway -to the courtyard. Hastily assembling his men, and choosing thirty -from Olaf's followers, he sent them down to the "Crane" with Biorn, -and followed them himself a few minutes later, after bidding Ulf -farewell. The captain would have accompanied him, but Olaf was -sending him on a mission to an Irish king in the interior. - -The "Crane," as Olaf had said, was well stocked with all things -needful for a voyage; so, weighing anchor, the sail was run up and -the voyage begun. As they left the harbor, Sigurd told his men of -his advancement, and it was greeted with a shout of satisfaction; for -the Jomsvikings were proud of their young leader, and the other men -had heard many tales of his bravery. Indeed, even though the title -carried no lands, it was the ambition of every chief of good birth to -be made Jarl, or Earl, for the Jarls were second only to the King. - -The oars were run out, for the wind was light, and under all speed -the "Crane" ran southward. Ketil's ship was out of sight, but his -goal was known, and Sigurd was confident that he would overtake the -other ship before night. - -"Why, think you, is he heading for England instead of for Norway?" -Sigurd asked old Biorn. - -The latter paused a moment. "Well, Jarl Sigurd, it is in my mind -that Ketil is a cunning man. If he took Astrid to Norway, he would -make nothing; but by taking her to England, much. King Ethelred -would pay high for such a hostage from King Svein of Denmark." - -"Oh, I see! Then she will not be harmed?" - -"Assuredly not, Jarl, at least till she reaches England, which I -trust will never be. Ethelred is as treacherous as Hakon himself, -and if she once falls into his clutches it would be a bad business." - -They did not come up with Ketil's ship so soon as Sigurd expected, -for not till mid-afternoon did the helmsman give a shout, and Sigurd, -running to the forecastle, saw a white speck far ahead. - -"Lower the sail," he ordered, "and get out all the oars," for until -then only half the oars had been going, to save the men's strength. -"We cannot come up with them to-day," he explained, "so it were best -to let Ketil think himself safe." - -So the sail was lowered and the "Crane" proceeded under her oars till -nightfall, when the sail was hoisted again and the oars taken in. -The wind freshened toward midnight, when Sigurd relinquished the -watch to Biorn, and at dawn he was aroused by the old viking. - -"Come, Jarl! A squall from the west has broken on us, and it is -daybreak." - -Sigurd followed him to the deck. There he found the sail -close-reefed, and the "Crane" running before a squall of wind and -driving snow. There was nothing to be done, however, save to await -the sunrise. - -As full day broke, but dark and gloomy, with flurries of snow, a -shout went up, for not half a mile distant lay Ketil's ship, also -running before the wind. - -"Shake out the reefs, men! We may as well take chances, and make -sure of her." - -Biorn stopped him, however, and pointing ahead, showed Sigurd a dull -gray line. "England, Jarl, or Wales, rather! It would be useless to -try to board Ketil in this heavy sea; the ships would be smashed to -kindling-wood." - -Sigurd reluctantly acknowledged that the old viking was right, so he -contented himself with following the other ship, while with every -hour the Welsh coast grew plainer ahead of them. The sky cleared -off, but the sea was still running too high for any attempt at -boarding. - -"I know where we are, Jarl," called out the helmsman. "Do you -remember that great headland, Biorn?" - -"That I do," exclaimed the viking. "See how the coast falls away -there, Sigurd? That is Wales, where live my own people, and we are -entering a great firth which goes far up into the country, and on the -right is the Saxon kingdom of Wessex. I recall it well. Six years -ago we sailed up and plundered a town they call Bristol. It must be -that Ketil means to land along the Saxon coast." - -Sigurd gazed with interest on the lofty cliffs, but soon they turned -the last headland, and Ketil pointed his ship due east. Sigurd saw -that they were indeed in a great firth; the "Crane" easily held her -own with the fleeing ship, but did not approach closer. - -"If they succeed in getting ashore, whither would they take the Lady -Astrid, think you?" inquired Sigurd. - -"To King Ethelred, doubtless," answered Biorn, "at London, in the -east. However, they cannot escape us now." - -"Arm yourselves, men!" ordered Sigurd, a little later, "the sea is -falling fast, and we will run aboard." - -Ketil, however, saw this also, and evidently resolved to take no -chances, for he turned in toward the coast, plying his oars -desperately. The two ships, a quarter of a mile apart, drew into the -coast and ran along the low shores. - -Suddenly Biorn gave a cry of fury. "He will escape us yet!" Ketil's -ship, just beyond a headland, was turned in toward the shore. The -helmsman turned the "Crane" and the sail was run down as the other -ship disappeared. Under all her oars, the "Crane" darted ahead, and -there before them lay the ship of Ketil, while the crew were leaping -out. A band of armed men from the town above ran down and met Ketil. - -Sigurd did not wait to see the meeting, but as the "Crane" scraped on -the sand and ice he leaped overboard, followed by Biorn, and waded -ashore. Amid Ketil's party Sigurd had seen the flutter of a dress, -and he knew there was little use searching the other ship, so he -dashed up the hill. Suddenly, however, a flight of arrows fell among -Sigurd's men, and the shout rose of "Death to the sea-wolves!" - -Sigurd, with Biorn and another man, was far ahead of the rest, -running at top speed. As the sudden attack was made, a number of -Saxons sprang out from ambush and surrounded the three. - - - - -CHAPTER XI. - -AT ETHELRED'S COURT. - -Sigurd flung his hand up and sheathed his sword. The Saxons paused, -and one of their number stepped forward. - -"You will get little plunder here, vikings, and many hard knocks," he -called, "so you had best put to sea again." - -"We are no vikings or sea-wolves," answered Sigurd. "I am Jarl -Sigurd Buisson, one of King Olaf's men from Dublin, and am in pursuit -of these men who fled up to the town. Two days since they abducted a -noble lady from Olaf's own castle, whom I seek to rescue." - -The Saxon leader gave an exclamation of astonishment, and at this -moment Sigurd's men ran up and joined him. The Saxon bows were -raised, but the leader checked them. - -"You look over-young to be a Jarl," he declared, "but if your story -is true we have indeed done ill. The leader of those men said he was -pursued by sea-robbers, and that he was on his way to King Ethelred; -so, although he was a Northman, we gave him safe conduct. What proof -have you of your tale?" - -Sigurd, who was in despair at this unexpected check, knew that it was -necessary to win the Saxon over. "Does my ship look like a viking -dragon?" he said calmly. "Were we vikings, we would not be abroad -this time of year. See, I wear the Cross, and my men are from Olaf's -courtmen, as you may see from their shields and weapons. We are -Christians all, and no followers of Thor." - -At this the Saxon stepped up and shook his hand heartily. "Your -pardon, Jarl, but I am warden of the coast, and must do my utmost to -defend it from sea-rovers. I am Jarl Edmund, and now I recall that -in the other party was a woman, or rather girl." - -"She is a noble lady of Denmark," said Sigurd, not thinking it wise -to tell Astrid's real position. "Now, cannot we follow these men to -the town?" - -Jarl Edmund turned. "Of course, but they told us they were on the -King's business, and I sent a man with them to get them horses at -once. I am indeed sorry for this, Jarl." - -"You but did your duty," replied Sigurd, "and there is no help for -it." He looked at Biorn: "What is your counsel, old friend?" - -"Ketil will push forward to London," replied Biorn, "so I think you -had best follow him with the Jomsborg men, and try to catch him. I -will take the others and the 'Crane,' and proceed by sea to London." - -"Good!" Sigurd turned to Edmund again. "I suppose we can procure -horses in the town yonder?" - -"Yes," replied the Saxon, eager to repair his mistake, "I will myself -go with you." - -Sigurd picked out his old Jomsborg men, and saying farewell to Biorn, -made all haste to reach the town. As they entered, Edmund dispatched -several men, one of whom returned with the news that Ketil's party -had left ten minutes before. At this Edmund made a gesture of dismay. - -"I fear you will not come up with them, Jarl Sigurd, for they took -the best horses to be found. However, we will see what we can do." - -In half an hour Sigurd and his men were riding east, Edmund having -furnished them with a guide. They pushed on for many days, but found -that Ketil kept well ahead, commandeering the best horses as he went, -on the plea of the King's business. At Malmesbury and Wantage, -Sigurd and his men were surprised at the size of the cities and the -splendid civilization they found there, which was far ahead of any -that the north could boast of. Wessex and Sussex had not been -ravaged by the Danes for many years, and the country amazed them by -its beauty and fertility. - -"If these Saxons had kings like ours," remarked Sigurd to his men, -"King Svein would have a hard time indeed before he could take the -throne of England." - -At Reading they found that Ketil was only half a day ahead of them so -they pushed on to London with all speed, reaching it in the evening. -Next morning Sigurd took his way to the palace. - -Here he gave his name and title to the chamberlain, and was shown -into the great hall, around which ran a buzz of astonishment as he -appeared. Sigurd had filled out amazingly in the last few months, -and was large for his age; he wore his golden helm, a blue cloth -kirtle and waist, and the great sword that Olaf had given him, its -hilt wound with gold and the scabbard thick with carved ivory. As he -walked up the hall, he removed his helm and let his long golden hair -stream over his shoulders. - -The chamberlain led him to the high-seat, and Sigurd knelt a moment -before King Ethelred, then rose. The king was a pale, crafty-looking -man, and as Sigurd looked around his heart sank for an instant, for -among the courtiers he beheld the mocking face of Ketil. - -After the chamberlain announced his name and title, the King arose. -"Greeting, Jarl Sigurd! The men of King Olaf are ever welcome at our -court, and we look forward to another visit from himself. Well I -remember Olaf, who spent a year or two with us, and I would fain see -him again. You look young to hold a Jarlship under so great a man!" - -Sigurd answered fittingly, then said, "My lord King, I ask your aid. -Among your men I see a certain Norseman, Ketil Gormson, who not long -since abducted a lady from the castle of King Olaf. I have followed -him closely, and since he is here, the Lady Astrid is not far away." - -King Ethelred looked surprised. "Why, what is this? The man Ketil -is a peaceful trader, and arrived here only yesterday. He has told -me nothing of any lady!" - -"Nevertheless," replied Sigurd firmly, "she is with him, and King -Olaf sent me to rescue her. I must crave your help, King Ethelred." - -The king ordered Ketil to stand forth, which he did, a sly smile upon -his face. Ethelred asked him what he knew of Sigurd's tale. - -"Nothing, my lord; I have no woman with me, and have but just arrived -by slow stages from the west coast where I was trading." - -Ethelred looked at Sigurd, and then the latter knew that he was being -made a mock of. No doubt the king had Astrid hid away, intending to -hold her for a hostage. - -"You see, Jarl Sigurd," said the king softly, "you must have been -mistaken in this man, who is a kind-hearted fellow indeed. Anything -that I can do to aid you will be done at once. Bring your men to the -palace, and you shall be given quarters here." - -At these words, and Ketil's mocking smile, Sigurd lost his temper. -Taking a step forward, he cried angrily: "There is no mistake, King -Ethelred, and well you know it! Think not that you will escape the -heavy hand of Olaf by smooth words, when he hears of this. As for -you, Ketil," Sigurd turned on the man, who shrank back at his blazing -eyes, "take heed to yourself! If I meet you outside the palace I -will slay you like the dog you are!" - -[Illustration: "_As for you, Ketil, take heed to yourself!_"] - -"You forget yourself, Jarl Sigurd," spoke out the king, sternly. "I -have promised you assistance in this matter, so bring your men to the -palace at once, and we will have search made for the lady." - -Sigurd rejoined his men with dismay in his heart. He knew only too -well that the King's command meant that he would be watched closely, -and he saw no way of rescuing Astrid. When he told the men the -result of his visit to court, they were as angry as he; but there was -no help for it, and in the afternoon they took up their quarters in -the palace. - -Ketil took good care to keep out of Sigurd's way. The Jomsvikings -wandered freely about the city, staring wonderingly in the shops, and -Sigurd bade them keep a sharp lookout for Astrid. The days passed -away, and Ethelred tried to soothe his visitors by a pretended search -of the city, and by soft words, but at last Sigurd determined to take -matters into his own hands. It was now the middle of February, and -Sigurd was impatient to return to King Olaf. - -Calling his men together after the evening meal, he said, "Men, if we -are to find Lady Astrid we must do it ourselves. I believe she is -held here in the palace, in the woman's wing; do you therefore hang -about that side, pretending to look in the shops. I myself will do -the same, and mayhap the Lady Astrid will either see us, or we will -light on some clue." - -Sigurd was treated with great honor, but when he went abroad he knew -that he was spied upon closely. The next day he visited the shops -near the women's quarters of the palace, and as he sauntered along -one of his men strolled up. - -"Come with me, Jarl," he whispered. Sigurd accompanied him, talking -and laughing, and the man said, "Look at the third window from the -end." - -Sigurd did so, and his heart gave a leap of joy. There, hanging from -a corner of the window, was a scrap of blue and gold cloth that he -knew had been taken from Astrid's scarf. As he looked up, a face -appeared, but at a quick sign of warning from him, it vanished. - -"Hurrah!" he cried, when he had regained his room, "we have found -her, sure enough! And now to rescue her." - -That same evening he heard a wild shout go up from his men, in the -next room, and a moment later Biorn strode into his room. Sigurd -greeted him with unbounded joy, then seeing Biorn's face half covered -with bandages, cried: - -"What is this? Wounded, Biorn?" - -The old viking smiled. "We met a Danish ship four days ago, Jarl, -and she stopped to talk with us." - -"Up to your old tricks, sea-wolf!" laughed Sigurd. "What did you -talk about?" - -"The price of swords, mainly," answered Skarde. "The Danes finally -decided that ours were better, so we gave them Ketil's old trading -ship and brought in the Dane with us; she is brand new, and as fast -as the 'Crane.' It was hard work, though, for I had only thirty men, -and they were double that. We lost ten killed, and half of us are -wounded; but that is no matter. Now for your story." - -Sigurd quickly outlined the position of himself and Astrid. When he -concluded, Biorn was silent for some time. - -"It is no light matter, Sigurd, to brave Ethelred; but I think we had -best carry off the Lady Astrid. Once aboard the 'Crane,' we would be -safe. But how to do the business?" - -"By craft only, Biorn. Astrid saw me to-day, and knows we are here. -How to get a message to her?" - -"That is easy enough. Do you write it, and I will shoot an arrow -into her window to-night." - -"Good! I never thought of that." Sigurd procured a bit of -parchment, and in a few minutes the message was ready. "I told her -that to-morrow night we would wait beneath her window. She must -contrive to let herself down, and if necessary we will fight our way -down to the 'Crane.' Is she below the bridge or above it?" - -"Below. I will go down to-morrow and bid the men be ready to receive -us. We must get some fresh water on board, too." - -An hour later Biorn returned. "The arrow flew straight, Jarl. I -waited a few minutes and saw a light cross her shutter thrice." - -Sigurd nodded. "Then she understands. Get the 'Crane' ready -to-morrow, and return by nightfall. Better have a boat or two at the -water-stairs, just at the end of this street." - -"Trust me, Jarl," said the old viking, and returned to the ship. - - - - -CHAPTER XII. - -THE FLIGHT FROM LONDON. - -The return of Biorn and the finding of Astrid happened so close -together that Sigurd determined to take advantage of his opportunity. -He saw the King twice a day, at meals, and on each occasion Ethelred -seated him near the high-seat and conversed affably with him; but -Sigurd felt that the iron hand was but concealed within a silken -glove, and that the King would soon find means to rid himself of this -troublesome Northman. - -The day after Biorn's arrival, at the noonday meal, Ethelred called -Sigurd to his side as usual. - -"How is the search progressing, Jarl? Have you any news yet?" - -Sigurd assumed a gloomy air. "I only wish I had some, King Ethelred. -My ship arrived last night, and I cannot long delay my return to King -Olaf, I fear." - -The King seemed unmistakably relieved, and Sigurd judged that his -visit to the shops the day before had not escaped the spies. Ketil -he had not seen since that first day, but as he always saw some of -his men whenever he left the palace, he believed the Norseman was -keeping close watch on him. - -That evening Biorn entered his room shortly after dark with a coil of -thin but strong rope and a light grapnel. - -"Is the 'Crane' in shape?" asked Sigurd eagerly. "We had best wait -an hour or two to let the streets get deserted." - -"Yes, all is ready, and two large boats are waiting at the stairs. -We are only three streets from the river, so the escape is open." - -"I'm not so sure about that," replied Sigurd uneasily. "If Ketil -discovers those boats there, and has been following you, as is -likely, we may have trouble yet. However, time enough for that when -it comes." - -An hour later there were few people in the streets, so Sigurd roused -his men and set out. - -"We had better not keep together," he said. "Three of you, with -Biorn, come with me; the others wait at the corner here. We will not -be long." - -So the four quickly made their way to the corner of the palace where -Astrid's window was located. A high wall enclosed the palace, with a -strip of garden inside; the palace itself had but two stories, Astrid -being on the upper. - -As they reached the wall, Biorn flung up the grapnel, which held, and -Sigurd went up the rope, hand over hand. Changing the rope to the -inside, he slid down, and stood beneath the window. - -All was dark above, but when he threw up a stone at the shutter, it -opened and something tumbled out. Catching it, Sigurd saw it was a -rope made of shreds of curtains; he held it firm, and a minute later -Astrid slid down and stood by his side. - -Sigurd greeted her with a silent handclasp, and led her to the wall. -Climbing up, he drew Astrid to the top, and next minute both stood in -the street. Old Biorn greeted Astrid heartily, and threw a dark -cloak over her dress; and without delay they started for the river. - -When they met the dozen men left by Sigurd, he sent them forward with -Biorn to get the boats ready, following with Astrid. Ten minutes -later they descended the stairs and pushed off, Astrid and Sigurd -standing in the prow of the first boat. - -"Hurrah! You are free at last, Astrid!" cried Sigurd, in a low tone. -At the same instant the girl pulled him sharply backward, and a spear -whizzed under his arm. A yell arose, and a dark mass in front of -them resolved itself into a large boat full of men. - -Sigurd threw all concealment aside. "Pull, men, pull!" he shouted. -One of the men sank back with a spear through him, and with that the -other boat crashed into Sigurd's. - -Standing in the prow, Sigurd cut with his sword at the foremost man, -while Biorn endeavored to ward off the other craft. Then Ketil's -mocking laugh sounded in Sigurd's ears, and as his blow fell -harmlessly on the other's shield, a boat-hook caught his byrnie and -all but jerked him overboard. - -"You have tough bark, friend Sigurd," cried Ketil, as the boy -staggered. Sigurd tried in vain to free himself from the hook, as -Ketil pulled, so he cried: - -"Take Astrid on board and set sail, Biorn!" - -Instead of resisting the boat-hook, Sigurd gave a leap forward into -the prow of Ketil's boat. As he did so, Biorn pulled away, with a -cry of dismay from Astrid, and left Sigurd amid his foes. - -When the boy sprang on board, Ketil was pushed back, and he -staggered. Sigurd cut him down with a single blow, disengaged the -hook from his steel shirt, and looked around. He had forgotten the -second boat, and this was right alongside. Striking down a second -man, Sigurd leaped back among his own followers. - -"To the 'Crane,' men! Follow Biorn!" - -The men needed no urging, and they soon caught up with the first -boat. Looking back, Sigurd saw that they were not pursued, for the -others were demoralized at the loss of their leader. - -"All safe, Sigurd?" cried Biorn, as they came up. - -"All safe," the boy replied, "and I think I have paid Ketil for his -villainy. At any rate he won't bother us for some time. Row fast, -men, there is no use trying to hide now." - -Shouts rose on the air behind them, and they saw torches darting to -and fro. Soon they passed below London Bridge, and in a few minutes -were aboard the "Crane," the men on board sending up a hearty cheer. - -Sigurd led Astrid to the cabin, while Biorn took charge of the ship, -whose oars were already out. "Now, Astrid, tell me your story," said -Sigurd, as they sat down. - -"Well, about midnight that night, Ketil came to my room with a note -in Runic saying that you were wounded and to come at once. I thought -it strange that you should send him, but went willingly enough. - -"As soon as we were outside the palace his men seized me and carried -me on the ship. There I was freed, but locked in the cabin. I -scratched a few words on a piece of wood, for I heard Ketil say they -were going to England, and then heard you come up alongside. I threw -the wood out of the window, and called, but Ketil ran in and threw a -cloak over my head." - -"After that I was treated well enough. After we landed, Ketil made -me promise not to escape if he left me free; and when we got to -London King Ethelred was very nice to me, giving me women to wait on -me, and many gifts." - -"The villain!" cried Sigurd angrily, and he told Astrid all the king -had said. - -"I was kept in my room," continued Astrid, "but I had nothing to -complain of. Then one day I saw you in the shops across the way, and -you know the rest. I tore up some curtains to make a rope with, and -here I am." - -Sigurd laughed. "Well, shall we stay here, or go out on deck?" - -"Out on deck, by all means. But why do your men call you Jarl?" - -Sigurd told her of his last interview with Olaf, and Astrid said, -casting down her eyes: "Well, I suppose after this you will hold me -so far below you that--" - -"Nonsense," broke in Sigurd, laughing, "get on deck and stop this -foolery!" - -Astrid gayly ran out on deck, and Sigurd followed. They were -speeding swiftly down the Thames, which is seldom frozen in winter, -and all sound of pursuit was lost. As there was nothing to be seen -in the faint starlight, Astrid went to bed, Sigurd giving the cabin -up to her, while he took charge of the ship, Biorn relieving him -after a few hours. - -At sunrise they were well at sea, and as there were plenty of furs on -board, the men were warmly clad. Suddenly Sigurd, looking back, -cried out: - -"Look there, Biorn! What ship is that?" - -The old viking gave a grim laugh, and then Sigurd recollected the -ship which Biorn had taken on his way to London. - -"She had only fifteen men in her, Jarl, for I could spare no more -from the 'Crane'; but yesterday I picked up a score of Norsemen in -London, and as they were willing to take service with Olaf, they are -now on board. She may come in handy." - -"Yes, indeed," agreed Sigurd, "and she is a handsome ship, too. -Where did you get the men, Biorn?" - -"Oh!" replied the other, carelessly, "they were prisoners of -Ethelred's, so I invited them to take a cruise. They were not -closely watched, so there they are!" - -"What have you done!" broke out Sigurd, in dismay. "Don't you know -that this will bring all the Saxon forces down on us?" - -Biorn shrugged his shoulders. "There were only two of Ethelred's -longships lying in the water, Jarl, and seeing that they lay -unwatched, some of the men rowed over last night and all but hewed -away their masts." - -Sigurd seized the old viking's hand. "Pardon, Biorn, I might have -known you better. That explains why we were not followed; now what -shall we do?" - -"Well, it is madness to put to sea in this weather, but there is no -help for it. I would suggest that we either go north to Mercia or -Northumberland and winter there, or else strike over to Flanders and -go overland to Denmark. We would be safe enough in the north of -England, for there are many vikings there and Ethelred's power is -weak, to say the least." - -"Then let us head for there, gather a few more men if possible, and -strike for Denmark or else Flanders." - -This was decided on finally, for Sigurd wished to take the captured -ship with him, but his men were too few to manage both vessels in -case of danger. So they coasted along the shore of East Anglia, then -turned north, past the Wash, and came to the Humber River. They met -with no storms on the way, though the weather was cold enough. - -Just before reaching the Humber, the "Crane" stopped at a small river -for fresh water. There were no habitations in sight, so Sigurd and -Astrid went ashore while the casks were being filled. - -"It is good to be on land again, Sigurd!" cried Astrid, after racing -and beating him to the top of a small hill. - -"I've been at sea so long that I don't notice it much," laughed -Sigurd spreading his fur cloak in the snow for Astrid to sit on. - -As they rested, looking over the broad expanse of snow, dotted with -trees and forests that spread inland, they heard the ringing call of -a war-horn from the ships. - -"Come on, Astrid!" cried Sigurd, starting up, "something must be -wrong at the ships!" - - - - -CHAPTER XIII. - -ALFRED OF MERCIA. - -They dashed down the hill, and in a few minutes were through the -trees and on the river bank. They found Biorn drawing up his men. - -"Why, what's the matter, Biorn?" - -"I am not sure, Jarl, but look up the ice yonder." - -He pointed up the frozen bed of the little river, and Sigurd saw a -large party of armed men, pulling a sledge, running toward them. -Sigurd examined them for a minute. - -"I don't think they mean to attack us, Biorn, or they would not have -that sledge. They look like Saxons, so best be ready." - -By this time more men had arrived from the ships, and as the Saxons -approached, Sigurd saw that there were some fifty men in the party. -Finding the Northmen waiting, they stopped running, and one, better -dressed than the rest, in a bearskin mantle and helmet, hastened on. - -As he came near, Astrid said, "Why, Sigurd, he isn't any older than -you are! And you were afraid of him!" - -Sigurd made no reply save a smile, for, indeed, the Saxon was only a -youth, but a noble-looking one. Nearly as tall as Sigurd, he was not -so broad, but his face was frank, and attracted the young Jarl at -once. - -"Are you Danes or Norsemen?" called the stranger. - -"Norsemen," answered Sigurd, "and you are Saxons, I take it." - -"Right you are," laughed the boy, with a glance over his shoulder. -"Are you plundering the country?" - -"Nay," answered Sigurd. "We are Christians. Bid your men stand -back, for our arrows lie loosely on the strings." - -The boy laughed again, as if it were a good joke, and turning, waved -to his men, who halted. - -"Let me explain," he said. "I am Alfred, son of Jarl Alfric of -Mercia, and with me is Sigrid my sister. Briefly, we are flying from -the men of King Ethelred; will you assist us?" - -Sigurd, suspecting a trap, looked keenly at the boy; but his gaze was -met squarely, and Sigurd's suspicions vanished. "Where is your -sister, and your pursuers?" he asked. - -Alfred pointed to the sledge. "My sister is ill, and we have to -carry her." His face suddenly became serious. "Hasten your reply, -sir Norseman, for God's sake! The King's men are not half a mile -behind, and there are nigh three score of them, while half of mine -are wounded or sick." - -Sigurd stepped out and gripped his hand. "No time for talking, then! -Take your sister and the sick or wounded men out to my ships, and let -all your fighting men join mine. Take charge of him, Astrid, and use -the boats quickly." - -The boy called up his men, dividing them as Sigurd had ordered, and -joining the Norsemen with twenty Saxons. - -"We will give Ethelred's men a sharp lesson, Biorn. Do you post the -men as you see fit." - -A hundred yards up the river was a bend, and running toward this, -Biorn motioned the men to hide behind the dry bushes that stood along -the banks, while he ran forward to reconnoiter. A minute later he -returned at full speed. - -"Here they are," he cried. "Pass the word to wait till they come -opposite, then loose arrows and at them with axes." - -Barely had Biorn sunk out of sight when the pursuing party appeared, -three-score Saxons under two leaders. "Pick off the leaders, men," -whispered Sigurd, and as the party came between the two bands of -Norsemen, Biorn's horn sounded, and a cloud of arrows poured into the -compact body of Saxons. At the same time the vikings seized their -swords and axes and ran forward. - -The Saxons resisted bravely, but their leaders had fallen at the -first fire, and after a minute of sharp hand-to-hand fighting they -broke and fled. - -Sigurd had headed his men, engaging a tall Saxon in single combat. -The other wounded Sigurd badly in the shoulder at the first exchange -of blows; and, dropping his shield, Sigurd grasped his great sword in -both hands and rushed his foe. At the first blow the other's -shield-arm fell, numb with the shock; at the second his sword flew -from his hand and he slipped on the ice, falling heavily. - -Seeing that the enemy had broken, Sigurd paused and shouted: - -"Back, men, back! We only want to give them a lesson, not to -slaughter them!" - -His own men obeyed, but Alfred's Saxons drove on after the fugitives, -and Sigurd could hardly blame them. Then he turned to his foe; the -man lay looking up, awaiting the death stroke. - -"Get up," exclaimed Sigurd with a laugh, "I am no murderer!" - -With an amazed expression, the Saxon slowly got up, and then, seizing -Sigurd's hand in his, knelt and kissed it. "Thanks, lord," he said, -"you are the first who ever bested Wulf at the sword, and if you will -take him, he will serve you right well!" - -Sigurd smiled, but faintly; and Biorn was just in time to catch him -in his arms. The wounded shoulder was streaming with blood, and he -had suddenly turned faint. - -While Biorn held him and the other men crowded around, Wulf tore off -his woolen tunic and deftly bound up the wound, Biorn watching him -suspiciously; then, taking Sigurd's feet while Biorn tenderly held -his body, the two carried him back to the shore. - -As they approached, Astrid ran up. - -"Sigurd! Is Sigurd hurt?" - -"It is nothing," replied Biorn, "only a wound in the shoulder. He'll -be all right in ten minutes." - -Wulf, who had wounded the boy, now surprised Biorn by his tenderness. -Setting the boy with his back to an ice-hummock, he bathed his face -with snow, and Sigurd opened his eyes. - -"Keep quiet," growled Biorn, as he struggled to rise, "I will attend -to the embarking, and you can rest for a space." - -By the time the water casks were aboard Alfred and the Saxons had -returned, and the Saxon boy seemed genuinely sorry for his rescuer's -mishap. All then embarked, and Biorn divided the men between the two -ships. - -On the "Crane" he took the Jomsvikings, Olaf's courtmen, and a dozen -Saxons; the Norse prisoners and thirty Saxons went on board the other -ship. In an hour the sails were hoisted, and the ships bore away -from the land, heading east. - -Sigurd sat on the forecastle of the "Crane," Astrid and the two -Saxons near him. "Now tell me your story," said Sigurd, giving his -own name and Astrid's. - -"Our father was the Jarl of Mercia," began Alfred, "but King Ethelred -has always been jealous of his popularity, and has persecuted him -unceasingly. Three weeks since a party of armed men appeared to -seize our father, but he fled to a Danish ship on the coast, and she -took him off. My elder brother Alfgar was taken and blinded." - -Astrid and Sigurd gave a cry of horror, but Alfred smiled sadly. -"You do not know of what Ethelred is capable, my friends. In his -present condition Alfgar is unfit to become Jarl, thus being as good -as dead in the King's opinion. - -"My father had barely time to send a man to warn us at Lincoln, and -we fled from home just in time to get to the fens and escape. Some -fourscore men, all devoted servants of my father, fled with us. -Twice Ethelred's men came upon us, and we beat them off, but wounds -and sickness thinned my men, and these are all I have left. Last -week Sigrid came down with fever, and we had to fly again; but this -time, thanks to you, we are safe. We will never forget that we owe -our lives to you, Jarl Sigurd!" - -Astrid immediately took charge of the sick girl. Thanks to his -temperate life, Sigurd's wound promised to heal rapidly, and the man -Wulf proved invaluable. He had been educated in a monastery, and was -skilled in leech-craft, and seemed devoted to the boy Jarl. - -"I thought to be killed at once," he told Sigurd, who had summoned -him. "You are the best swordsman, as well as the only merciful -viking, whom I ever met. My life is yours, Jarl, if so you will have -it." The man's words were so sincere that Sigurd accepted his offer -gladly, for he was an expert swordsman as well as leech, and could -both read and write, which was no small accomplishment. - -A council was now held on the "Crane's" forecastle, to decide on what -course they should pursue. They finally came to the conclusion that -they would run south and cross to Flanders, where Alfred and Sigrid -would probably find their father. As soon as this course was fixed -on, Biorn took charge of the "Snake," as the other vessel was named, -transferring to her that evening. - -It proved well, indeed, that he did so, for during the night a gale -swept down out of the northeast, and bore them helplessly before it. -The Saxons on the "Snake," most of whom had never been to sea before, -were of little use, and even Alfred was sick, though Sigrid escaped; -but there was nothing to do save to keep the ships before the wind. -It was bitterly cold, but as the Norsemen did not mind this much, and -the girls were well wrapped up, no one suffered greatly. - -Sigurd had no fears for the two ships, for both were new and rode the -waves easily. The ships of the vikings could only sail with a fair -or a side wind, and as they would be driven far past Flanders unless -the gale broke up soon, the four discussed the situation that evening -in the "Crane's" cabin. - -"We are certainly getting all the storms we want," laughed Sigurd to -Astrid, as he came in and shook off the snow. "Shall we take the -chances and head around for the southern end of England?" - -"No!" cried Alfred. "Cannot we make for Normandy? There are many -vikings there, and it is settled by Norsemen." - -Sigurd shook his head. "Not unless the wind shifts." - -"I see," broke in Astrid, "that you are thinking about getting me -back home. I admit that I would like to see Vendland again, but why -don't you just take the simplest course, Sigurd, run before the wind, -then around England and back to King Olaf?" - -"It sounds easy," laughed Sigurd, "and that is what I would do if I -were alone. But with you and Sigrid on board I don't like to take -unnecessary risks." - -Sigrid laughed as Alfred, in the throes of seasickness, seized his -cloak and left the cabin. "Don't mind us, Jarl; head for Ireland by -all means!" - -"Well," responded Sigurd, "we'll see how things look in the morning. -I'm going to turn in now and get some sleep." - - - - -CHAPTER XIV. - -IN BRETLAND. - -The morning broke dark and gloomy, with no land in sight. Sigurd, -concluding that they had been driven below the Thames, if not below -the end of England, ordered the helmsman to steer due west, and while -he was unable to communicate with the "Snake," he saw Biorn follow -his example at once, and knew that he understood. - -The gale had now lessened to a steady wind from the northeast, -interspersed with flurries of snow, and both ships drove steadily -along under half-canvas. - -For two days they held this course, and then Sigurd held a shouted -conference with Biorn. It seemed evident that they had been carried -south of England, so the prows were turned north, and the next -morning land appeared. Alfred had found his sea-legs by this time, -while Sigrid was rapidly gaining strength and color from the salt -sea-air, which drove the marsh fever out of her. She was a very -pretty girl, indeed, with her blue eyes and long flaxen hair, and she -and Astrid were firm friends from the start. - -Wulf, who was now more a friend than a captive, was a great favorite -with all on board, even with Alfred's Saxons. On the morning that -land was sighted, he drew Sigurd aside. - -"Jarl, we must have fresh water at once. Three of the casks were -loosened by the storm and have run out; there is only a cask or two -of ale left." - -Sigurd made a wry face. "Well, that will keep us from thirst, and -the men like it well enough, though I have little taste for it; but -perhaps we can get water from some river along the coast here, or -from the 'Snake.'" - -Wulf disagreed. "All Ethelred's Jarls and Thanes will be looking for -us, you may be sure, and as soon as we are sighted the housecarls -will be poured down wherever we land." - -Sigurd thought it over, and finally signaled the "Snake." Biorn drew -alongside, but when Sigurd mentioned the shortness of water, the old -viking gave a cry of dismay. - -"Why, we thought to get some from you! Never mind, we are drawing -into the coast, and I will make a landing and find out where we are. -We cannot be very far from South Wales, and once there it will be -plain sailing, for the people there are of my own race, and I have -not forgotten the language of the Cymry." - -So they steered toward the shore, which was high and rocky. After -coasting along for two or three hours, a large bay was revealed, half -frozen over, with a hamlet nestling on the cliffs above. - -"They are fishing folk, most like," said Alfred, "but there is no -sign of a river hereabouts. We may have to melt up some of that ice!" - -Biorn's ship now drew carefully in, and broke through the thin outer -edge of ice. When the "Snake" would go no farther, Biorn leaped out -after testing the ice with oars, and a dozen men followed him to the -shore. They found the hamlet in great consternation, dreading the -forays of the pirates, but Biorn soon appeased their fears, buying a -goodly quantity of fish from them, and returned to the ships. - -The "Snake" drew alongside the "Crane." "No fresh water, Jarl," -reported Biorn. "Everything is frozen fast, and these people melt -ice for their needs. They say there is a river half a mile inland, -but we dare not risk it." - -"I would advise that if possible we bear around South Wales and reach -up for the Northern Kingdom. It will only be a day's difference, and -we won't find much help among the people on this coast. We might -take in some ice-cakes, in case the ale gives out." - -"How long does it take to reach North Wales?" asked Sigurd. - -"We ought to get there to-morrow night, or the next day at latest," -replied Biorn, and Sigurd waved assent. The ships were rowed up to -the ice and a supply of this was taken on board each ship; then the -sails were hoisted, half the oars put out, and at full speed they -passed along the coast, for Sigurd was determined not to be caught in -another tempest. - -Next morning, however, the Land's End was reached, and the prows -turned north. By nightfall the land was in sight ahead, and early -next morning they drew close into shore. - -"I know where we are," shouted Biorn to Sigurd. "Do you follow me, -Jarl, and we will speedily come to an open river, unless I am greatly -mistaken." - -Before noon, indeed, a great shout of joy went up from the men, for -there before them was a bay, with an open river flowing down. True, -the channel was narrow and dangerous for ships, for the ice nearly -met on either side; but the "Crane" followed the "Snake" closely, and -they entered the channel. Half a mile from the mouth this widened -out and turned suddenly; as the "Snake" reached the bend Sigurd heard -Biorn's war-horn, and saw his men arming themselves in haste. - -"To arms, men!" he shouted, "and be ready for whatever may befall!" -Alfred quickly donned his armor and stood by Sigurd in the prow. As -they in turn came around the bend, they saw the reason for Biorn's -preparations; there before them lay two large ships, moored for the -winter on shore, with a camp close by. From their appearance they -were Danes, and high above, on a neighboring knoll, could be seen the -roofs of a town of goodly size. - -As the "Crane" came alongside the "Snake," Sigurd saw that the -vikings on shore were also arming and assembling around their two -ships. - -"This is the town of Neath, Jarl," cried Biorn, as he leaped on board -the "Crane," "and it was here that I was born. What ships these are -I know not; shall we draw in and hail them?" - -"That would be best," replied Sigurd. "Doubtless they are some -vikings who are wintering here, but it is strange, indeed, that they -are allowed to remain so near a town, unless they came on a peaceful -errand." - -Sigurd ordered the men to row as close to shore as they could. The -ship stopped two or three hundred yards from it, for it was -impossible to break through the ice, and Sigurd blew a loud blast on -a peace-horn. In answer came one from the camp, and a dozen men left -the two ships and started over the ice toward the "Crane." - -As these came near, Astrid uttered a little cry and caught Sigurd's -arm. "Oh, Fairhair, look at that big man in front! That is Halfdan, -the brother of Queen Gunhild, and my own uncle!" - -Sigurd looked closely at the man, remembered him well, for he had -seen him often while the Jornsborg men were at King Svein's court. -Halfdan stopped just beyond spear-cast of the "Crane." - -"Who are you, and do you come in peace or war?" he called. - -"Good-morning!" laughed Sigurd, "don't you know your friends, Jarl?" - -The other started, looked keenly at the ship, and ran forward. -"Surely, it is Sigurd Fairhair!" he cried, as he came near. "And by -the eye of Odin! Am I dreaming or is this Astrid?" - -"Astrid it is, uncle!" laughed the girl, jumping down on the ice and -throwing her arms around his neck. The Jarl struggled to disengage -himself, and cried in mock dismay: - -"Help; help, are you trying to make me captive? Let loose! Respect -my dignity!" - -Sigurd followed Astrid to the ice, and clasped Halfdan's hand. "Be -careful, uncle," laughed Astrid, "Sigurd is your equal in dignity -now!" - -Sigurd nodded at the surprised look of the Dane. "Yes, I am one of -Olaf Tryggveson's men now, Jarl, and he made me a Jarl lately, -although I am altogether too young for such an honor." - -"Nonsense, nonsense!" replied Halfdan, his merry eyes gleaming with -happiness, "you are the handsomest Jarl I ever saw in my life, upon -my word! But come up to the camp." - -"Wait," said Sigurd, turning to his ships. "Alfred, do you and -Sigrid join us. Wulf, you and Biorn take charge of the ships and lay -them up on shore, there beside the others. We are with friends." - -As Alfred and Sigrid climbed down to the ice, the young Jarl -presented them to Halfdan, who greeted them heartily. - -"I have heard of your father's misfortune," he exclaimed, "and I was -sorry, indeed, for I fought against him three or four years ago, and -he was a noble foeman. However, he is safe in Flanders now, and is -like to return before long." - -"Why, what do you mean?" cried Alfred, in surprise. - -"Come along to the camp and I'll tell you." Halfdan led the way to -the shore. "It's too cold to be standing out here talking." - -As they entered the camp, the news spread that a party of Jomsvikings -were among the arrivals, and a loud blast went up from the horns, -while the Danes met them with shouts of joy, for the men of Jomsborg -were prime favorites with King Svein's men. Sigurd found several -whom he knew, while Astrid was met with fresh cheers. As they -entered the large hut of Halfdan, the Jarl drove the men off. - -"Get out of here!" he cried. "Go down and help stow the ships up on -land beside ours. We have much to talk over here, and would be left -in peace." - -With a last cheer, the men vanished, and Halfdan closed the door. - -"Here is food and water, friends, if you are hungry." - -"We have plenty of food, but a drink of water would not be amiss," -answered Sigurd. "And now, how come you here, in Wales?" - -"First make yourselves comfortable." Halfdan piled furs along the -wall, for Astrid and Sigrid, while he and the two boys sat on the -long wooden bench. "Well, of course you remember the oath that Svein -made that night? He wasn't in such a hurry as you Jomsvikings were, -but he has been making big preparations. He sent me here right after -the news of Hiorunga Bay arrived, for he had counted on your men -making a descent on Ethelred from the west as well as from -Northumbria, where he himself will land in the spring or summer. - -"I arrived here a month or two ago, and have arranged matters with -Idwal ap Meirig, the King of North Wales. What barbarous names these -Welsh people have!" - -"Probably they think ours just as bad," laughed Sigrid, "for they -hate everything Saxon; and as for your Norse names, I am sure they -used to sound harsh, even to us!" - -"Well, in any case, King Idwal is up in the town yonder, has agreed -to join us, and we see him nearly every day. Now, tell me something -about yourself, Sigurd." - -It was late when Sigurd finished his tale, so Halfdan, who had given -orders meanwhile, showed the two girls to a hut that had been hastily -fitted up for them, and shared his own with the boys for the night. - - - - -CHAPTER XV. - -IN WINTER QUARTERS. - -Next morning Halfdan's men joined forces with the new arrivals, and -got the two ships up on the shore, dismantling and unloading them, -while parties of men hastened out to the surrounding woods, and -returned with great quantities of firewood and timber, with which -fresh huts were built. - -This was finished by evening, for Halfdan had a hundred and fifty -men, and many hands made light labor. For several days the Norsemen -rested quietly, for they had many wounded, and some of the Saxons -were still down with fever. Sigrid, however, was now almost well, -and the jovial roughness of Halfdan amused her and brought the roses -back to her cheeks. - -Sigurd and Alfred wished to visit the town above, and if possible to -take up their quarters there, but Halfdan discouraged them from doing -so. - -"King Idwal watches us sharp enough, for he has suspicions of every -Northman within a hundred miles. One cannot blame him, either; the -vikings have ravaged poor Bretland terribly, destroying monasteries -and towns, and burning and plundering. Your own man Biorn is a -sample; he was carried off in his youth. - -"As for visiting the town, it is not worth while. There is nothing -there save a great castle and a cluster of dirty little houses, and -in any case Idwal has forbidden our men to enter the town. Once a -week the country folk come down here with their market stuff, and -Idwal sends us ale by the cask. Never fear, he will be down pretty -soon to see for himself who these new vikings are." - -For two weeks they remained in camp, seeing nothing of the Welsh -king, but all were greatly interested in the people, who brought -fresh meat and food into camp once a week. Indeed, the vikings' camp -at these times assumed the appearance of a fair, for most of the men -made small objects which the country people took in exchange, and -many merchants set up permanent booths inside the camp. The Welsh -people were smaller by far than the Norsemen or Danes, and their -bright, quick eyes and black straight hair contrasted strangely with -the Northmen and Saxons, most of whom were fair. - -Sigurd and Alfred had at first feared that the Saxons and Danes, -hereditary enemies, would not mingle well; but their fears proved to -be unfounded. Halfdan discovered from the country people that in the -forests to the west, only a few miles distant, wolves were a terrible -scourge; so the men set to work and made skis for themselves, and -even Sigrid learned to use the "snow-skates," as the Saxons called -the long wooden runners. In the second week of their stay the four -young people and Halfdan took a score of men, leaving the camp in -charge of Biorn, and for three days went off on a wolf-hunt in the -forest. - -On their return Biorn told them that word had arrived in their -absence from King Idwal, who intended to visit them on the following -day, with all his court. Great preparations were made for his -reception. Pine boughs were brought in from the forest, with which -the huts were decorated gayly, and Halfdan's large hut was hung with -tapestries and cloths, which Sigurd found in the cargo of the vessel -which Biorn had captured. - -All the men rubbed up their armor and weapons, and when in the -morning the Welsh were seen winding down the hill, the force was -drawn up in three divisions, the Danes, Norsemen and Saxons grouping -themselves together under the standards of Halfdan, Sigurd and -Alfred. Presently the Welsh arrived in the valley leading to the -camp, and their coming was greeted by a loud burst from the horns of -the vikings. - -[Illustration: "_They were greeted by a loud burst from the horns of -the vikings._"] - -Leading the way came a troop of archers, behind whom, mounted on -small shaggy ponies, rode the King and his court. Idwal was a larger -man than most of his followers, with keen black eyes and firm -features, shaved in the Danish fashion, with two long mustaches. As -he came up Halfdan advanced and greeted him. - -"Welcome, my lord King! It gives us pleasure to return the -hospitality of your castle!" - -Idwal smiled. "Truly, Jarl, I am glad that these men of yours are -not minded to foray my borders! We would have a hard time of it to -repel such a force as this. I heard that you had been joined by a -fresh band of vikings, so came down to assure myself that we were in -no danger." - -At this Halfdan motioned Sigurd and his friends to advance and -presented them to the King. The latter frowned as Alfred came -forward, and swept his eye over the band of Saxons. - -"It is many years since a Saxon has dared seek hospitality from the -Cymry, my lad," he remarked. Then Alfred told his story, and the -king's face cleared. - -"Well, to be frank, I have small love for Saxons, but since you are -enemies of Ethelred, that is another matter. Tell me, in case your -father returned home and I joined with King Svein, would you be for -or against me?" - -He gazed keenly at Alfred, but the lad met the look squarely, though -with a smile. "As to that, my lord King, I can only say that I would -fight for my own land against the invader, whoever he was; yet if my -father thinks it right to join King Svein, as well he may, I will be -at his side." - -Halfdan broke in with a laugh. "Don't be afraid, my lord, this Saxon -will not have to be feared for some time to come! I dare say that if -you make a foray against Ethelred this spring, he would stand as -stoutly at your side as any of your nobles. But come into the camp, -my lord." - -The vikings opened a path between their ranks, and Idwal led his men -through them. In an open space amid the huts, Halfdan had cleared -away the snow and stretched a large sail over a number of long -tables, while on either side blazed a dozen great fires. - -"By my faith," cried King Idwal, "this is a right royal reception, -Jarl! An open air banquet is far more to my liking than one inside -these huts, and these fires would warm an army!" - -So saying, the king tossed aside his fur cloak, and Sigurd saw that -he wore a light suit of armor beneath it. In the king's train were -some twoscore nobles, and a bishop, to whom Halfdan accorded the -place of honor. Among the Welsh, bishops and priests were honored -even above the king, and they found Bishop Dafydd a learned, kindly, -and intensely religious man, who was at once interested in Astrid and -Wulf, with both of whom he conversed at great length. - -It was well, indeed, that Halfdan had been hunting for three days -previously, for his stock of venison was heavily drawn upon. Great -fish were brought in, newly taken from the river below, and to the -delight of the Welshmen a huge boar's head, in the Saxon style, was -placed before the king. The vikings spared no pains to make the -feast a notable one, and to Sigurd's satisfaction the presence of -Bishop Dafydd and his men prevented it from becoming a wild carouse, -as the Norsemen were only too apt to make it. - -Before the King left that evening there was an exchange of gifts, as -was customary. Biorn and Jarl Halfdan, who were skillful smiths, had -the week before made a beautiful byrnie, of woven gold rings, and -this was presented to the king, who was delighted with it. - -He presented Halfdan with a great boar-hound, and to Sigurd he gave a -cloak, edged with fur, the scarlet cloth embroidered in silver -thread. As he had been informed of the presence of the two girls, he -had thoughtfully brought for them new outfits of garments suited to -their rank. - -Idwal returned to his castle that evening, and the bond between him -and the vikings was firmly cemented. He assured Jarl Halfdan that as -soon as King Svein landed in the east he would pour a flood of men -over the West Saxon earldoms, and Halfdan had no doubt that the -Danish king would fulfill the oath he had sworn at his accession -feast. - -After this the camp settled down for the remainder of the winter. -Every week hunting parties, on skis, brought in fresh meat from the -surrounding forests, while their arms were repaired and added to by -the smiths. The chiefs of the Northmen were all trained armorers, -and his work at the forge added greatly to Sigurd's strength and -widened his shoulders immensely. - -The two girls had a most enjoyable time, for every man in the camp -worshiped them. They joined the hunting parties, and many a wolf -fell before Astrid's bow, while Sigrid, though less warlike, took -part with equal zest. - -The time passed away rapidly, and in March the snows melted and the -four ships were run out and overhauled. They were freshly pitched -and calked, the masts were stepped, and at last they lay at anchor, -fully ready for the sea. - -King Idwal paid the camp a second visit, after which the chiefs -returned to the castle with him for a few days. He sent down -provisions of all kinds for the ships, and at the beginning of April, -Sigurd took leave of Halfdan. - -They gathered in the Jarl's hut on the evening before sailing. - -"Now, Jarl," said Sigurd, "I suppose you will take Astrid home with -you?" - -"That depends," replied Halfdan, quizzically, "upon whether she wants -to go or not! She seems to like wandering about the world, with a -knight-errant to rescue her and guard her from harm!" - -Astrid blushed, and cried, "That's not fair, uncle! I'm going home -with you--but listen! Why can't you come with us to King Olaf, and -go home by the north? It is just as short that way, and far less -dangerous!" - -The big Jarl leaped to his feet. "Hurrah! I never even thought of -that; I thought to go home around the south of England, but in truth -this way is as short, and I would fain see this King Olaf, whom you -praise so highly." - -It had been arranged that Halfdan was not to sail till the next week, -so he at once dashed out and called his chiefs together. Telling -them of the new plan, the men went to work, by torchlight, and -finished loading his two ships, and by morning all was ready. - -With a fair wind they reached out into the bay, and three mornings -later, after coasting along the Irish shore, they came in sight of -the towers of Dublin. - - - - -CHAPTER XVI. - -AN AMBUSCADE. - -Sigurd was received with unbounded joy by King Olaf, for he had been -given up for lost in the storm that swept the coast just before his -departure. Halfdan stayed in Dublin for a week, then decided to -return home without further delay. - -Sigurd parted with Astrid sorrowfully, for they had become very dear -to each other in their wanderings, and although Alfred and Sigrid -remained with him, he knew that he would miss her greatly. - -"Never mind," he said, as they walked down to the ships, "we will -land in Norway this summer or fall, and be sure that I will turn up -at the Danish court, or in Vendland, not long after." - -"I'll be glad to see Vagn once more, when I get home," said Astrid. -"It will seem almost as good as seeing you." Halfdan had told them -of Vagn's safe arrival home, so that Jarl Eirik had evidently been -true to his word. - -Sigurd and Alfred, in the "Crane," accompanied Halfdan's ships for a -few miles; then, with a last farewell to Astrid, the "Crane" was -turned about, and sought Dublin again. - -Sigurd's duties were light at the court. Olaf's Irish kingdom was -not divided in districts, ruled by Jarls, as was Norway; so that -Sigurd had little to do beyond commanding the courtmen. Alfred had -not done homage to King Olaf, for he resolved to remain true to his -own land; nevertheless, the King gave him a command, and Alfred bore -himself well indeed. - -With the beginning of summer Olaf took all his warships out of the -water, scraped the bottoms, and gave them a thorough overhauling. -Thorir Klakke was still in Dublin, and Sigurd found that he was -urging the King to sail as soon as might be for Norway, saying that -the bonders would flock to him on his arrival, so that he need not -take so large a force. King Olaf, who thoroughly understood his -treachery, did not undeceive him; but to Sigurd he said, one night -after Thorir had left the hall: - -"Jarl, if ever a man deserved hanging, there is one. While you were -absent in England, two half-brothers of mine were driven from Norway -by Jarl Hakon, and came to me here. Thorir tried to bribe them, and -fortunately they let him think that they fell in with his plans, -which he disclosed fully. - -"Jarl Hakon, in truth, sent him here. Thorir will try to slay me on -the voyage," the King smiled grimly, "but if he fails, he is to get -me on shore at a certain point where Hakon will keep men in waiting -day and night. These men are to fall on me and kill me." - -Sigurd gave a cry of anger, and the priest, Thangbrand, growled out, -"Let me attend to him, Olaf! I'll warrant he does not trouble you -any more!" - -Olaf laughed heartily. "Thangbrand, you are more fitted for a viking -than for a priest! If I ever win Norway, I will send you to Iceland -to convert that island to Christ." - -The priest's face lit up. "Thanks, my King! It is a shame that so -fair an island as that should have no church of Christ in all its -length! It may be that I will meet resistance there, but methinks I -can hold my own." - -Sigurd laughed at this characteristic speech. Thangbrand was a -strange mixture of priest and warrior. Driven from home for his -quarrelsome disposition, he had joined himself to Olaf; but in -reality the man was deeply religious, and he was, indeed, the ideal -man to carry the Cross to heathen Iceland. In those days the Cross -and sword went together, and the old gods of Norway knew many martyrs -to their faith before Christianity was established in the land, in -later years. Right or wrong, this was the spirit of the age, for men -overlooked the fact that Christ's gospel was one of peace, and in -their enthusiasm and religious fervor they spread it with fire and -sword. - -There was much irregular fighting around Dublin, for the Irish kings -were ever striving to drive the Norsemen from their land. They -fought bravely, but their men were ill-armed compared with the -vikings, and Olaf had no trouble in preserving order for many miles -around the city. His brother-in-law, Olaf Kvaran, was away on a trip -to Iceland at this time. - -"How would you like, Jarl," said Olaf to Sigurd one evening, "to -visit King Brian Boroimhe? I am minded to make peace with him, for -when I go to Norway I want to leave Dublin in security, and my -brother is not to be relied on. A firm peace with King Brian for at -least a year would be an excellent thing." - -"I would be glad, indeed," replied Sigurd, "for I have heard so much -about the interior of Ireland that I would fain see it." - -"Well, I will have letters written in the Irish tongue," said the -King, "and do you take what men you will, together with an -interpreter. Be ready to start next Monday, and I think you will -find the King at Kells, a large place some thirty miles to the west. -However, I will provide a reliable guide." - -Thangbrand, the priest, hearing of the embassy, eagerly sought leave -to accompany Sigurd, which Olaf willingly granted. So, on the -following Monday, Sigurd, the priest, and a score of men left Dublin. -Their weapons were all in peace-bands, and an Irish captive was taken -as guide and interpreter, having promised to lead them to Kells in -exchange for his liberty. - -Sigurd laughed when Thangbrand joined the party. The huge priest -wore a byrnie under his gown, a light steel cap on his head, and at -his saddle-bow was shield and sword. - -"No one knows what may happen," he replied stoutly, to the boy's peal -of laughter, "we may be waylaid by these Irish thieves, or this guide -may lead us astray, and it is best to be prepared for anything." - -Kells was only a good day's march away, so they set forward briskly. -After reaching the bounds of Olaf's territory the road lay through -woods and swamps for a dozen miles; but toward evening they emerged -on an open plain, partly cultivated, and saw in the distance the -spires and towers of a large city. Several times they had been -stopped by bands of Irish, but their guide served them faithfully. - -Sigurd was amazed at sight of Kells. "Why, this is wonderful!" he -said. "I had no idea that there was such civilization so near to -Dublin!" - -Thangbrand smiled. "Kells has seldom been ravaged by vikings, for -many years; it is a strong place, with a great monastery in the town. -I have been here once before, and found that the land is beautiful -enough in times of peace, but in war-time it would be well-nigh -impossible to reach the city." - -Sigurd saw that this was so, as they approached, for on either side -of the road were defenses, and several stone castles came in sight. -Just at sunset they entered the gates of the town, and their guide -spurred ahead to find quarters for the men. - -As they passed through the streets they met with sour looks and loud -curses from the Irish, who hated the Northmen bitterly, with only too -much reason. The vikings had ravaged the fairest vales of Erin, had -destroyed her monasteries and splendid civilization, and but for the -strong hand of King Brian would have overrun the country utterly. -That night they took their quarters in a large inn, and the next -morning visited the court. - -The King's palace was far beyond anything Sigurd had ever seen, even -in London. It was built of stone, and the great hall within was a -blaze of arms and tapestries. The nobles who thronged the hall were -clad much as were the Northmen, but their golden bracelets and -cloak-pins were richly wrought, and the precious metal seemed -abundant. - -Sigurd led his men to the high-seat, and bowed low to King Brian, the -famous chieftain. The latter was a powerful, stern-faced man of some -sixty years, and he opened and read the letters of Olaf with a frown, -afterwards handing them to a monk who stood at his side. - -"Sir Jarl," he said, without rising, fixing his gray eyes on Sigurd, -"I will have an answer written at once. For the present you and your -men will be quartered in my palace here. King Olaf is a brave and -worthy man, and I am glad to conclude a year's truce with him; were -other Northmen like him, Erin would be a happier land." - -The monk translated the King's words, and bowing low, Sigurd retired. -Thangbrand at once visited the monastery, taking Sigurd with him; and -although the good monks were somewhat surprised at the warlike -appearance of the priest, they entertained their visitors well, and -showed them over the buildings. - -Next morning Sigurd had another audience with King Brian, who handed -him a parchment for King Olaf, and presented him with a heavy golden -arm-ring; after which the Norsemen left the city at once on their -return journey. - -They rode along at a good pace, and as they came near the boundaries -of Olaf's territory, Sigurd and Thangbrand rode somewhat ahead of the -party; for Thangbrand, who was an adept at horsemanship, of which the -young Jarl knew little, was showing Sigurd how to make his steed -curvet and prance, and thus they insensibly drew ahead of the rest. - -They turned a bend in the road, which wound along beneath thick -trees; and as they did so a number of men sprang to their horses' -heads, and others sprang at Sigurd and Thangbrand, striving to pull -them from their saddles. At the same instant, before they could -grasp their weapons, men dropped on them from the branches overhead, -and a minute later the two Norsemen, bound hand and foot, were being -hurried away through the forest depths. - - - - -CHAPTER XVII. - -KETIL TURNS UP. - -Far behind them sounded a few faint shouts and horns, as the men -reached the spot where the two leaders had been ambushed; then these -died away into silence. Sigurd saw that they were carried by a band -of two dozen Irish, who were hastening north through the forest. He -started to speak to the priest, who was borne at his side, but one of -the men struck him roughly on the mouth, with a sharp command in -Irish, and he ceased. - -At nightfall the band halted beside a stream, and Sigurd judged they -had traveled several miles from the scene of their capture. A -blazing fire was built, over which the men cooked their meal, the two -captives being flung down beneath a large tree. - -"What fools we were to leave the guide!" growled Thangbrand into his -thick black beard. "I wish they would give us somewhat to eat." - -His wish was gratified immediately, for the leader of the band -approached, cut the ropes that bound their hands, and gave them bread -and meat, and a horn of water from the stream. After this they were -bound again. - -"They seem to be expecting someone," exclaimed Sigurd, "did you note -that the leader had sent men out in all directions?" - -This had indeed been done as soon as they arrived, and an hour later -there was a shout, and into the firelight came a second body of men. -As they saw them, Sigurd gave a cry of amazement, for at their head -was Ketil Gormson, whom he had left in London the winter before! - -The new arrivals were also Irish, Ketil being the only foreigner. -The leader of the first party greeted him, and Ketil put into his -hand a bag that clinked pleasantly. Then he stepped forward to -Sigurd's side. - -"So I have you at last, my lord Jarl!" he cried, an evil light in his -dark eyes. "It is a far cry from London to Ireland, but I have -watched and waited patiently." - -"It is a pity that I didn't strike harder that night!" replied -Sigurd. "What is your object in this attack?" - -Ketil laughed shortly. "You go with me to Jarl Hakon, my fine -fellow, and as for this follower of the white Christ, I think I will -turn him over to these good friends of mine in the morning." - -Sigurd turned pale, for he knew that any Norsemen who fell into the -hands of the Irish obtained short shrift. Thangbrand, however, -roared out: - -"Loose my hands, you traitor, and face me with drawn blade!" - -"So," sneered Ketil, "I thought that priests of your God were meek -and humble men, willing to die for their faith!" - -Thangbrand flushed under the reproof, and fell silent. Ketil turned -away, set a guard over the captives, and in a few minutes the band -lay sleeping in their cloaks beneath the trees. - -The Norsemen's weapons had not been taken from them, but as they were -bound firmly they were of no use. Sigurd, however, saw that the -peace-bands had been torn from his sword in the hasty flight through -the forest. - -An hour after this he felt Thangbrand's hands touch his. The two -captives lay side by side, and their guard was sitting a few feet -away, nodding sleepily. Turning by inches, Sigurd looked at the -priest, and saw him motion toward the unbound sword. - -Sigurd, very slowly and cautiously, rolled over on his face, bringing -the weapon within reach of Thangbrand, who at the same time turned -his back. Thus his hands, after a little vain searching, met the -hilt of the weapon and slowly drew it forth. An instant later their -guard straightened up and strolled over to them. - -Sigurd lay on his face, and with a quick movement Thangbrand had -thrust the drawn blade beneath him. The guard, thinking that both -were asleep, turned away, humming an air, and Sigurd caught a faint -rasping noise as the sword blade cut through the priest's bonds. - -Soon the guard returned, and stooped over Sigurd, who lay nearer him, -to assure himself that his bonds were right. As he did so, -Thangbrand drew him down to the earth, his hands about the man's -throat. - -The struggle was brief and noiseless. In a few seconds the man -relaxed, and the priest quickly bound and gagged him; then he cut -Sigurd's bonds, whispering: - -"If my hands were not so stiff I would have done better." - -Indeed, Sigurd found that his hands and feet were too stiff to move, -for he had been tightly bound. They both sat for a moment rubbing -their limbs, then arose. - -"Which way, Jarl?" - -"West, Thangbrand. Once we strike men belonging to King Brian we -will be all right, for his bracelet here will be known, and you are a -priest, too." - -Without a word more they stepped away, each picking up a light shield -from beside the sleeping men as they went. The forest was dark, but -as the moon was just rising Sigurd knew that their way would soon be -light enough to travel fast. - -In half an hour they were well away from the camp, and both broke -into a swift trot, threading their way among the trees, and as far as -they were able heading west. The trees were roughly barked on the -north, and this guided them somewhat, for both men were accustomed, -at home in Norway, to finding their way through the forest by such -signs. - -"Hold up, lad," panted Thangbrand, after an hour's running. - -Sigurd slackened his pace, for the ground was too uneven and rough to -keep it up longer, and for a time they walked swiftly onward. - -"Pray heaven that we strike no bog or morass," said Thangbrand, "for -if we do we are lost." - -"I wonder if we will be pursued?" - -"If we are, I do not propose to fall into their hands alive," -answered the priest, stoutly. "They are evidently some wandering -band, who have been hired by that villain Ketil. I'd like to get him -within reach of my sword!" - -They kept onward till dawn, walking and running by turns. As the -gray light broke through the trees, they found that the forest was -thinning out somewhat, and Thangbrand flung himself down for a brief -rest. - -"I think we must be getting near the cultivated fields in that broad -plain we crossed yesterday," conjectured Sigurd. "If we can once get -to Brian he will protect us, for I have heard that no one could be -more jealous of his word than he." - -Ten minutes later they continued their way. The sun was just rising -now, and as they stood on the top of a small hill, vainly endeavoring -to see some signs of habitation, a faint yell arose from the forest -behind them. - -"Come on, Thangbrand," exclaimed Sigurd, breaking into a run. "It is -a matter of speed now." - -For half an hour they kept up a brisk trot, but could hear the yells -rising from time to time behind them, each louder than the last. -Finally Thangbrand stopped short. - -"Go on, Fairhair. I am clean winded, and your life is worth more -than mine to Olaf. Do you go on, while I hold them here as long as -may be." - -"One of the Jomsborg oaths," replied Sigurd, quietly, "is to never -desert a comrade--" - -"Out upon your Jomsborg oaths!" roared Thangbrand. "Get you gone, -and lose no time!" - -"Listen!" cried Sigurd quickly. "Isn't that a horn?" - -Far off toward the west they heard the faint notes of a war-horn, -while from behind them a loud shout arose, as their pursuers came in -sight. - -"Hasten, Fairhair," cried the priest, unsheathing his sword. "Go -yonder and bring help while I hold them here!" - -Sigurd smiled and unsheathed his own weapon, as he looked around. - -"Cease this nonsense," he said, though not without a thrill at -thought of the generosity of the big man. "Let us stand beneath this -big oak, where we can swing our swords without being struck in the -back." - -They took position on either side of a large oak tree, and five -minutes later the first of their pursuers appeared. He halted at -seeing them, and sent up a yell; as his comrades came up, they spread -out, enclosing the tree in a circle. - -To do him justice, Ketil was brave enough. When he appeared, he led -a dozen men straight at the tree, and in a second the two were -fighting furiously. The Irish crowded around, striking with their -long knives, but speedily recoiled before the terrible sweep of -Thangbrand's huge sword, and the more scientific, but no less deadly, -blows of the young Jarl. As they retired, their chief yelled an -order, and the arrows began to whizz past. - -The first Sigurd caught with his shield, the second he cut in two as -it flew. A shout of amazement went up from the Irish as Thangbrand -did the same, for, unacquainted as they were with the exercises and -training of the Norsemen, this skill seemed little less than magical. -Again and again the two men repeated the trick, but it was impossible -to ward off more than one or two shafts at a time, and soon both -Thangbrand and Sigurd were wounded. Suddenly Ketil sprang at Sigurd -with a shout of impatience. - -The Irish circled around, watching the combat with eager eyes, -forgetful of all else, while Thangbrand guarded Sigurd's back. -Thrice Ketil's steel met that of Sigurd, then seeing an opening, the -latter struck; but his feet slipped on the dew-wet grass, and he fell -headfirst. - -Thangbrand was instantly bestriding his body, facing Ketil. At this -the Irish came in behind him, watching eagerly for a chance to use -their long knives, while the priest crossed swords with Ketil. -Suddenly the latter threw up his arms as something flew past -Thangbrand, and fell with a spear through his body as a yell of -terror went up from his band. - -Looking about as he raised Sigurd to his feet, Thangbrand saw King -Brian Boroimhe behind him, sword in hand, while his men pursued the -fleeing band in all directions, cutting them down without mercy. - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII. - -A MISSION FOR THE KING. - -The King addressed Thangbrand in Latin, which the priest understood -fairly well. - -"Just in time, my friends! The guide whom I sent with you returned -late last night with word of your mishap, and early this morning I -sent men in all directions, joining myself in the search, for I was -greatly angered that my safe-conduct had been broken in this wise." - -"We owe you our lives, my lord," responded Thangbrand gratefully. -"These men were in the pay of a traitor, whom your spear slew before -I had a chance at him, unfortunately." - -The old king smiled, not unkindly. "Strange words for a man of God, -sir priest! But I see that your blade has done good service to Jarl -Sigurd, and perhaps in these times a priest must be man of the world -as well." King Brian sighed heavily as he looked around, then said, -"Ask the Jarl if he has my letters safe." - -When Thangbrand translated, Sigurd held up the letters, their seals -unbroken; and now the King's men returned, and the party went to -Kells at once. Here, as Sigurd was in haste to get back to Dublin, -the King gave him an escort of fifty men, and they set out without -delay. - -Upon reaching the territory of Olaf, Sigurd dismissed the Irish and -pushed forward; but on coming within sight of the city he gave an -exclamation of dismay. Instead of the King's standard, there floated -from the castle a huge black banner! - -Wondering greatly, they galloped up to the city and entered. To -their amazement, the shops were all closed, and the whole city wore -an air of mourning. Sigurd, without stopping to ask questions, left -Thangbrand and hurried to the great hall. - -It was empty, save for Olaf, who sat in the high-seat, his head bowed -in his hands. Sigurd advanced and held out the letters. - -"Here, my lord, is the reply of King Brian Boroimhe. Why is the -black standard on the castle, and why are all the shops shut?" - -Olaf raised his head and gazed at Sigurd with heavy eyes. - -"Welcome back, Jarl, in an evil hour. Queen Gyda died last night." - -As Sigurd stared at the King, the latter rose slowly, descended from -the high-seat, and taking Sigurd's arm in his, exclaimed: - -"Sigurd, come and talk to me. I am lonely, and the most wretched of -all men." - -They walked up and down the hall, and Olaf told Sigurd how the night -before the Queen had been seized with a fatal illness. Good Bishop -Sigurd, the English prelate who had come to Ireland with Olaf, had -done his best, for he was a skillful leech, but to no avail. - -"Why should this evil come upon me now?" cried the King, bitterly. -Sigurd said little, allowing the King's pent-up grief to find -utterance, then he said, softly: - -"It is the will of God, Olaf, and perhaps he has done it for the -best. May it not be that he means you to give your whole life to the -spreading of his Word in heathen Norway, and has sent you a touch of -adversity to try you?" - -"Mayhap," responded the King, "but it is hard. He has given me good -fortune, and I must bear the bad when it is his will; it may be true -that he wishes me to devote myself, heart and soul, to bearing his -gospel to my countrymen." - -The blow was a terrible one to Olaf, and it was indeed many a month -ere he recovered a portion of his former light-hearted spirits. Two -days later the Queen was buried, and after the period of mourning -Olaf threw himself into the work of preparing the expedition with -feverish energy. - -This was no light task, indeed. Olaf had a dozen warships in the -harbor, but it was impossible to take so large a force, as men had to -be left to defend Dublin. Olaf had decided to give up his Irish -land, in case of succeeding in Norway, to his brother-in-law, Olaf -Kvaran, but he could not leave him without men. - -At last, after many consultations with Sigurd and his other chiefs, -the King decided to take only the five largest ships, which would -hold about seventy-five men each. Thorir Klakke had no inkling that -Olaf knew of his treachery, and he advised the King to make a sudden -descent on Norway and to take Jarl Hakon unawares at Thrandheim, -before men could be gathered. Thorir, in giving this advice, thought -that either he would be able to kill Olaf by treachery on the voyage, -or else that the men of Hakon, posted at Agdaness in Norway, would -remove Olaf before the plan could be accomplished. - -The five ships were fitted up in the best of shape. The dragon heads -were taken from their prows, and in the place of these great crosses -were set up, for Olaf knew that only by the favor of God would he be -able to win his father's kingdom. They were laden with all the -wealth that Olaf had gathered in his travels through Russia, -Constantinople, and England, and at length the expedition was ready -to start. - -It was a bright morning in August that the King went on board his -ships, followed by all his men. Before doing so, he called Alfred -and Sigrid to him, and asked them what they intended to do. Alfred -hesitated, for although he wished to accompany Olaf, he did not -forget that his father was in Flanders, and he did not like to -separate from his sister. Finally, Olaf said, with a smile: - -"You both had best come with me. I have a plan which I think will -work out to your satisfaction; I will tell you later just what it is. -Put all your Saxons on board the 'Snake,' Alfred--the ship that old -Biorn captured in England, and sail with us. Sigurd will command the -'Crane,' and when we get to the Orkneys I will tell you what I have -in mind." - -So, wondering what the King meant, the "Snake" was added to the -fleet, to Sigurd's great joy. He had feared that Alfred and his -sister would be left behind, and it was with no small satisfaction -that he helped fit out the "Snake." - -When the men were all embarked, Bishop Sigurd, standing in the prow -of King Olaf's ship, offered up a solemn prayer asking the aid and -the blessing of God for their enterprise. As he concluded, a great -"Amen!" rolled over the sea from ships to shore, the anchors were -weighed, and the journey was begun amid a blare of war-horns and the -clash of arms. - -The Pentland Firth was not passable, according to reports brought to -Olaf, so he bore up for the Orkneys, as had been his wish from the -first. These islands had long been settled by Norsemen, and Jarl -Sigurd Lodvarson ruled them: but the Jarl and his people were all -heathen, for no missionaries or Christian men had been allowed to -settle in the islands. It was Olaf's firm intention to spread the -Word of God wherever he went, and as the Orkneys were in his path, he -decided to visit Jarl Sigurd. - -This was a dangerous proceeding, for the Jarl was powerful, and might -have settled the fate of the expedition there and then; but matters -came out luckily for Olaf. His six ships came to anchor in Asmundar -Bay, in Rognwald Island, and in the bay they found a single ship -lying at anchor. - -Olaf, seeing that the ship was a fine one, and very beautifully -furnished, dispatched Sigurd Fairhair to bring her commander on board -his own ship, hoping to get news of Norway. To his surprise, it -happened that this commander was no other than Jarl Sigurd Lodvarson -himself! - -Olaf greeted him with a smile. "Truly, it seems that we have an -abundance of Sigurds here! Yourself, my own Jarl Sigurd Fairhair, -good Bishop Sigurd, of England, and possibly a score of my men, all -named alike." - -The Jarl, not knowing where King Olaf was bound with his fleet, was -somewhat fearful for his safety, and when Olaf urged him to be -baptized, he refused, saying the faith of his fathers was good enough -for him. Then King Olaf arose, holding in one hand a sword, in the -other a cross. - -"Jarl, you hold, as Jarl of the Orkneys, part of my inheritance, for -I claim all the lands as mine which the Kings of Norway have -possessed. As it has come to pass, by the will of God, that you are -in my power, there are two courses open to you. The one, that you -accept the true faith, and allow yourself to be baptized, with all -your subjects. You may expect to hold under me the Jarldom which you -now possess, and what is of more importance, you may hope to reign -for ever in a nobler kingdom than this. - -"The other course, a very wretched one, is that you die; and after -your death I will pass over the islands and bring the folk to believe -in the true God. Now choose, Jarl, which course you will take." - -The Jarl hesitated; then he slowly stretched out his hand and took -the cross from that of Olaf. This action was greeted with glad -shouts from the crews, and without delay Bishop Sigurd baptized Jarl -Sigurd. - -Then he swore oaths of fidelity to King Olaf, and placed in the -King's hands his son, Hundi, who was also baptized, and who -accompanied Olaf to Norway as a hostage. - -Next day Olaf came on board the "Crane." - -"Sigurd," he said, "are you willing to undertake another mission for -me? You seem to scrape through somehow, no matter what happens, and -as this one is of some importance I can think of no one better fitted -to undertake it." - -Sigurd smiled. "If I have scraped through some tight places, Olaf, I -don't ascribe it to my own conduct! I have been fortunate in finding -friends, and for the rest, God has protected me. Now tell me what -this mission is." - - - - -CHAPTER XIX. - -AT KING SVEIN'S COURT. - -Astrid and Halfdan had a safe and quiet voyage home to Denmark, but -when they arrived there they found that many changes had taken place -during the winter. The pale, quiet, religious Queen Gunhild had -died, and as she alone had restrained King Svein from his wild and -warlike impulses, the King was gathering great forces for his descent -on England. - -Astrid took up her abode in the castle as formerly, but the life was -a lonely one. Her parents had died when she was a child, and only -her Uncle Halfdan was near her. She disliked King Svein, who, -although he always treated her well and kindly, was a moody and -irritable man, with no thought for anything save his selfish -ambitions. Soon after Astrid's return he placed in her care his two -sons, Harald and Canute, and she took great interest in the education -and care of the two lonely boys, little thinking that in after days -the younger was to prove a great and worthy king of England, thanks -to her early teachings. - -So the summer passed, while men assembled and were sent on to the -Danish settlements in the north of England to wait the arrival of -Svein in the fall. Jarl Halfdan was sent in command of one of these -detachments, and after his departure Astrid felt her loneliness more -than ever. - -One day King Svein sent for her. Wondering at the summons, Astrid -proceeded to the hall, where she found the king surrounded by his -chiefs. - -"Lady Astrid," he said abruptly, "prepare your belongings for a -journey. Your hand has been asked in marriage by the son of King -Vladimir of Russia, and needless to say, I have accepted the offer, -for besides being a great honor, this will bring to my army a number -of ships from Russia." - -Astrid was overwhelmed, but answered the King bravely. "You have no -right to dispose of my hand, King Svein, in this fashion! It is -unjust to me, for I am not your vassal. My lands lie in Vendland, -and if necessary I shall appeal to King Burislaf for protection -against this outrage!" - -The King's face darkened. "You will do as I order!" he exclaimed -angrily. "King Burislaf also will do whatever I order him, and this -is a thing unheard of, that a girl should decide her own marriage!" - -A murmur of assent went up from the chiefs, and Astrid gazed -hopelessly around the circle of fierce faces, finding no hope in -them. How she longed for her good uncle to stand at her side! But -as the King said, a girl in those days could rarely indeed marry whom -she liked; her parents or guardian settled that without consulting -her, and Astrid felt that she was helpless. "This is a noble -marriage," continued the King, more calmly, "so let me hear no more -of these protests. You will leave here in two weeks for Gardarike, -Vladimir's capital, with a fitting escort." - -With that the girl was dismissed to her apartments. Young Canute, -hearing of the matter, tried to comfort her, but the boy was of -course as helpless as she. So, although Astrid resolved that the -marriage should never take place, even though she had to fly from -home, the packing of her effects proceeded. - -A week later, as she was sitting sewing in the garden, she heard a -great noise from the harbor, shouts and war-horns mingling with the -clash of arms. She sent Canute to see what it was about, and -presently the boy came running back, his eyes bright and his cheeks -flushed with excitement. - -"Oh, Astrid!" he cried, "we have visitors! Two great ships just -sailed into the harbor, from far over the sea--the strangest ships! -They didn't have any dragon in the bow, but instead was a big gilded -cross! All the men on board had shields with red crosses on them, -and I saw them as they landed--great warriors, all of of them!" - -Astrid's cheek paled suddenly. What ships could these be, sailing -under the Cross, unless--? Canute continued hastily: "And, Astrid, -you ought to see the chiefs! There is one old viking, so fierce and -brave-looking, and a beautiful girl with bright yellow hair, and a -boy who must be her brother; but greatest of all was a young man with -hair like sunlight, streaming over his shoulders, and a great golden -helmet--" - -Astrid did not wait to hear the rest. Dropping her work, she ran to -her rooms, her heart beating wildly. Swiftly calling her women, she -attired herself, and descended to the hall, which was empty. She -hastened out, and leaving the castle, went down to the harbor. - -There all the townfolk and the men from the castle were crowded about -the market place, and as they made way for her respectfully, Astrid -saw King Svein talking to a number of people, whom she could not see -for the crowd. As she made her way through the press, a well-known -voice fell on her ear; and then, with flushed cheek, she found -herself face to face with Sigurd Fairhair! - -[Illustration: _She found herself face to face with Sigurd Fairhair._] - -He gave a cry of delight as he saw her, and gripped her hands until -they hurt. - -"Astrid!" - -"Why, Sigurd!" she replied, noting how he had grown, "what a big man -you have become already! Oh, how glad I am to see you--and how I -need you, too!" she added in a lower tone. - -Sigurd gave her a quick, anxious look, then turned. "Here, Alfred, -Sigrid!" he shouted, and the next minute the two girls were in each -other's arms, while the crowd looked on, amazed. Sigurd told King -Svein something of their tale, then the king ordered all to follow -him to the castle. - -"We can talk in peace there," he said. "Do you come up at once. My -men will attend to your ships, so bring your warriors ashore and let -them be entertained at the barracks." - -Sigurd left this to Biorn, and the four young people followed Svein -to the castle, where they seated themselves in the hall, below the -high-seat. - -"Now, how do you come to be here, of all places?" asked King Svein, -who remembered Sigurd well. In return Sigurd told him about the -rescue of Alfred and Sigrid. Svein nodded. - -"I know the story. Jarl Alfwic is even now with my army in England. -Go on." - -"King Olaf," continued Sigurd, "sent Alfred and his sister to you -asking that you take them with you to their father; or, if you could -not do this, to see that they received a pilot to take them safely to -Flanders. However, since you are going to England before long -yourself, that is settled." - -"Right glad will I be," replied the King, "to have the son of Jarl -Alfwic with me. They will be safely delivered to the Jarl, have no -fear." - -"As to myself," said Sigurd, "that is another matter. King Olaf has -sailed for Norway to take the kingdom from Jarl Hakon, and--" - -He was interrupted by a cry of amazement from the Danes. - -"What say you?" shouted Svein, leaping up, "King Olaf has sailed for -Norway? Skoal! Skoal!" The chiefs roundabout echoed the cheer. - -"He sent me to you, King Svein, to ask that if possible you will send -him ships and men; or, if you cannot do this, that at least you will -not aid Jarl Hakon and Jarl Eirik." - -"As to the first request, I cannot do that," replied Svein, "for I -need every man I can raise. Be sure, however, that Olaf need fear no -attack from me; I will be joyful, indeed, when the traitor Hakon is -driven from Norway!" - -"That will be good news for Olaf," rejoined Sigurd, "for an attack in -the rear would be fatal. He has but five ships, of which mine is -one, and his success will depend entirely on his being able to -surprise Hakon." - -Sigurd then told of how Olaf had Christianized the Orkneys, and how -he had dispatched him immediately on this journey. Olaf was to -remain three weeks in the islands, baptizing the people, and had -arranged to meet Sigurd at Moster, an island on the west coast of -Norway, for which Olaf would direct his course. - -Sigurd had no opportunity to speak with Astrid till the evening, and -he was puzzled by her words of that morning. Not till Alfred, Sigrid -and he went to her apartments in the evening did he receive an -explanation. Then Astrid told them about Svein's plans for her -marriage. - -"It is a shame!" exclaimed Sigrid. "Why, in England a girl must -yield obedience to her father's wishes, but she is not forced into -marrying in this way!" - -Sigurd was silent, his brows knitted. "I am in a bad position," he -said at last. "Of course, the simplest way out of it would be for -you to come on board the 'Crane,' and for us to join King Olaf; but I -am on a mission here that I must not neglect. I cannot anger Svein -against Olaf, as such an action would do; not that I care for my own -sake, but it might mean ruin to my King." - -Alfred agreed with him. "Yes, you must consider your duty to Olaf; -and yet there are two sides to it--" - -"No," broke in Sigurd, "there are not. At any cost must Svein's -finger be kept out of Olaf's pie, for Svein is liable to abandon his -English trip and turn all his forces against Norway in a sudden fit -of rage. That would be fatal to Olaf at present." - -"I think I have a plan," remarked Sigrid after a moment. "As long as -you do not appear in Astrid's escape, it will be all right, won't it?" - -Sigurd nodded. - -"Well then, give Wulf a few men and that cutter that is on the -'Snake,' let them take Astrid on board, and wait for you at some -place along the coast. You must leave to-morrow or next day to -rejoin Olaf, so you can pick them up as you go, and King Svein will -think Astrid has fled of her own will." - -"Good!" cried Sigurd. "What say you to the plan, Astrid?" - -"I think it is a good one, too," replied the girl, her dark eyes -sparkling, "but all my things are packed up, and I don't want to meet -King Olaf looking like this!" - -She blushed as a peal of laughter went up from the rest. - -"Never mind, Astrid," laughed Sigrid, "I will put a chest aboard the -'Crane' to-night; my things will fit you pretty well, and King Olaf -gave me a whole shipload of dresses." - -"Better put it in the cutter," said Alfred, "for when Svein finds his -ward gone, he will search our ships first thing." - -So it was arranged, that the next night Wulf, who had firmly attached -himself to the young Jarl, should wait at the dock for Astrid, who -insisted on making her way down to the harbor alone. - - - - -CHAPTER XX. - -THE KING AND THE TOWEL. - -Next morning Wulf was instructed in his part. He had become firmly -attached to the young Jarl, and was eager for the business; he and -Biorn had proved wise advisors on many occasions. - -In the afternoon Sigurd and Alfred went hunting with King Svein, and -the party did not return till long after nightfall. When they -reached the castle they found the courtyard ablaze with torches. - -"What is this? What means this commotion?" roared the King, -dismounting hastily and striding forward. - -Ulf, the gray-headed old seneschal, met him. "The Lady Astrid of -Vendland has disappeared, my lord, and we can find no trace of her in -all the castle and town!" - -For a moment the King's rage was terrible, and he turned on Sigurd, -his face working in fury. - -"This is your doing, Jarl! You have accepted my hospitality, -traitor, and--" - -"You forget yourself, my lord," interrupted Sigurd calmly. "I have -been with you all day, and could have known nothing of this matter. -I do not blame the girl greatly, yet you can account for my actions." - -"True," replied Svein, his anger cooling under Sigurd's reply, "I beg -your pardon, Jarl, for my haste. Will you allow my men to search -your ships? It may be that the girl has fled on board one of them, -seeking shelter with the Lady Sigrid." - -"Willingly, King," answered Sigurd, Alfred joining with him. - -The King at once sent men in all directions, mounted and on foot; but -when Sigurd retired for the night nothing had been found of Astrid. - -In the morning Sigurd took leave of King Svein, who, preoccupied with -the flight of Astrid, offered no hindrance to his departure, -presenting him with many gifts, indeed, which Sigurd returned in kind. - -His departure was the occasion for a much more sincere and -affectionate farewell between himself and the young Saxons. Alfred -and Sigrid stood on the deck of the "Crane" till the last moment, and -their eyes were moist as they said good-by. - -"Be sure to visit us in England next year," were Alfred's parting -words. "We will look for you in the summer at Lincoln!" - -Sigurd promised to come if possible, and so the three friends parted. -As the "Crane" sailed from the harbor Sigurd's last view was of -Sigrid, standing on the forecastle of the "Snake" and waving her -scarf in farewell. - -"Where are we to pick up Wulf and Astrid?" Sigurd asked Biorn, after -they had left the land behind. - -"About twenty miles north, Jarl. I sent a man with him who knew of a -small river mouth where they can lie hid without danger." - -Shortly after noon Biorn, taking the helm, steered the "Crane" -carefully in to the land, skirting along the shore, and in half an -hour the cutter darted out as they passed. - -"Hurrah!" shouted Sigurd, as Astrid climbed up the side. "You have -done well, indeed, Wulf! King Svein was completely at sea as to -where his ward had gone!" - -"And now for King Olaf!" cried Astrid merrily, as Wulf carried -Sigrid's chest into the cabin and she disappeared. - -It was many days before they saw the King, however, for Moster was -far up the Norwegian coast. They made the high cliffs of Agdir -first, and sailed north along the coast; on the way they passed by -Hiorunga Bay, but did not enter, for the place recalled sad thoughts -to Sigurd's mind. - -"Have you seen Vagn?" he asked Astrid, as they watched the Herey -Islands speed by. - -"Oh, yes!" she exclaimed. "How could we have forgotten to speak of -him before! He came to see me last spring--and just think, Sigurd! -He is married!" - -Sigurd gave an exclamation of surprise, and Astrid continued. - -"Yes, he married a girl in Norway, and brought her back to Denmark. -He would have nothing to do with Jarl Sigvald on his return, calling -him a coward and a traitor, and the Jarl is remaining close in -Jomsborg. Vagn himself is in the south of Denmark, where his father -owned some castles." - -Sigurd was surprised to hear that his cousin was married, and he -firmly resolved to visit him as soon as the result of Olaf's -expedition was decided. The next morning they arrived at Moster, and -before the fishing village found the four ships of Olaf, which had -arrived a few days previously. - -Olaf welcomed Astrid back with much merriment. "You seem to come -back to your friend Oli," he laughed, "and this time Oli is not going -to let you go away so soon!" - -Sigurd told him the story of Astrid's flight, and the King commended -his Jarl for acting so wisely. "If Svein had come on us now, -Fairhair, it would have been all over with us; as it is, you did -right in getting the maid away without trouble, and I am heartily -glad that you did so." - -Olaf stopped at Moster for two days, and as he had first landed in -Norway there, he marked out a space on the ground, gave Thangbrand -plenty of money and materials, and left him there to build the first -church in the country. - -After this Olaf sailed north day and night as the wind favored him, -following the land, but keeping to the open sea, outside the islands -which were strewn thickly along the coast. When the wind was -contrary he anchored at the islands farthest out to sea, and did not -touch the mainland, for fear that Jarl Hakon would receive news of -his coming. At last, just at evening, they reached Agdaness, at the -entrance to the Firth of Thrandheim. - -After the ships were anchored and the awnings raised, King Olaf -visited the "Crane." - -"Now, Sigurd," said he, "I wish your advice. Thorir Klakke is on -board my ship, and you know how his plans were revealed to me by my -brothers, whom he attempted to bribe. Well, Jarl Hakon's men are -hidden in the forest yonder, and are doubtless awaiting us; Thorir is -to take me ashore alone, as if to arrange some plan of action, and -there I am to be killed. Now, what would you suggest doing?" - -Thinking it over, Sigurd replied, "It seems to me, Olaf, as that it -would be fitting to let the traitor fall into his own trap. Put a -score of men ashore to-night, let them hide near by, and when Hakon's -men appear let our men charge them and put them to flight, after -which Thorir should be executed." - -"That is a right good scheme." answered the King. "I do not want to -take life, God knows, yet such criminals must be punished; and the -most fitting punishment for this man is death. So be it." - -Early the next morning Sigurd, watching from the "Crane," saw Thorir -and the King go ashore alone. They walked along the shore, then -Thorir held up his glove, as if signaling. The next minute a number -of men broke from the trees, but as they did so, more men rose up -from among the bowlders on the shore and put them to flight. Two of -these latter fell on Thorir, while the King watched, and the -unfortunate man expiated his treachery with his life. - -After this, Olaf, walking down to the water, shouted to Sigurd to -come ashore, which the young Jarl did. - -"Come, Fairhair, let us walk up and see if we can find a farm, where -we can learn tidings of Jarl Hakon. If he is in Thrandheim we must -fall upon him to-day or to-morrow at latest, for these men will bear -the news of our coming." - -They walked up the hill, leaving their men behind, and presently came -to a little farmhouse, with a pasture behind it where some cows were -grazing. Walking up to the door, they saw an old woman inside, and -Olaf addressed her. - -"Good dame, may we have a drink of fresh milk? We are two travelers, -and will pay for what we take." - -"Welcome, friends!" replied the woman. "Enter and I will get some -milk and bread." - -While she was away, Olaf and Sigurd washed their hands at the well -beside the house, and entering again, the King took up a towel that -was lying on the table, and dried his hands on it. At that moment -the woman returned, and snatched the towel from his hand. - -"It is easy to see that you have not been brought up very well, and -have been taught little good," she cried angrily. "Know you not that -it is wasteful to wet all the towel at once?" - -Olaf responded, soberly, "Well, well, mayhap I shall still rise in -the world so high that I may dry my hands in the middle of the -towel!" Sigurd was bursting with laughter, and at this reply he could -hold in no longer, and the woman looked furiously at him. - -They drank their milk, and the coin that Olaf handed the woman -somewhat appeased her. "Tell me," he asked, "do you know where Jarl -Hakon is?" - -"Last night he was in hiding, my son told me." - -"In hiding! What mean you?" exclaimed the King. - -"Why, whence come you that you know not? Within the last few months -Hakon has become so cruel and tyrannical that there is no living with -him; two days ago his exactions in Gauladale caused the bonders to -rise against him, under Orm Lugg. They separated the Jarl from his -ships and drove him into the forest, no one knows where. My son told -me last night, ere he crossed the Firth to join the bonders, that -they were going to look for him at the home of Thora of Rimul, a -great lady who is a relative of the Jarls." - -"Well, well!" said the King, as they hastily returned to the ships. -"Think you not that heaven is with me, Fairhair? Here I come to -Norway at the very moment when Hakon has goaded the bonders to rise -in revolt; I find him cut off from his men and ships, driven a -fugitive into the forests, mayhap slain by this time! Come, let us -make all haste to cross the Firth and arrive at Gauladale." - -So, hastily shouting out the news to the other ships as they went on -board, the prows were turned across the Firth of Thrandheim, toward -the district of Gauladale. - - - - -CHAPTER XXI. - -THE DEATH OF HAKON. - -As they left the shelter of the bay and drew across the Firth, the -narrow entrance of which was only two or three miles in width, three -ships were seen sailing along the opposite shore. Olaf steered -directly for them, for without doubt these were ships of Hakon's; but -as the fleets neared each other, the three ships, evidently taking -Olaf's ships for foes, turned toward the shore. - -The King dashed forward, coming up with the three ships just as they -ran up on a sandbar. Their crews leaped overboard, wading and -swimming to shore, and directly in front of Olaf's ship was seen a -large, handsome man, swimming. Olaf shouted, but he paid no heed; -so, seizing the tiller, the King flung it at him. The heavy missile -struck him on the head, and he sank. - -Then Olaf's men, leaping overboard, pursued the flying men, slaying -some and capturing others. As soon as the captives were brought on -board the King interrogated them. - -It seemed that the man whom Olaf had slain with the tiller was -Erland, a son of Jarl Hakon, and that these ships were going to the -Jarl's aid. Further, the prisoners said that Jarl Hakon's forces -were utterly dispersed, that the bonders were in revolt throughout -the whole district, and that none knew where the Jarl was in hiding. - -King Olaf at once landed some of his men with orders to tell everyone -who he was, why he had come, and to bid all the bonders meet him the -next day in Gauladale. Then the five ships were steered east, going -up the Firth, and that afternoon the King was landed at Gauladale. - -He found a great meeting of the chief bonders and leaders of the -revolt against Hakon in progress, and as soon as these found who he -was, they greeted him with tears of joy, and welcomed him most -heartily. Olaf brought his chiefs, Sigurd among them, to the -assembly, and when all were seated one of the older leaders of the -peasants rose and addressed him. - -"Olaf, Jarl Eirik will demand stern payment of this attack on his -father, Hakon, when he hears of it; nevertheless, we are determined -that Jarl Hakon shall die, for his life has been altogether evil. -You, however, are of the race of our old Kings, from Harald Fairhair -to your father, Triggve, and in the name of this assembly I ask you -to become King over us, at least until an assembly of the people can -be held at Thrandheim to elect you in regular form." - -This caused the men of Olaf much joy, and the King accepted the offer -of leadership which they made him. The same evening they traveled up -the valley to Rimul, where the Lady Thora lived. It was here that -the bonders thought Jarl Hakon was in hiding, but some distance up -the valley, beside the river was found a cloak, which was recognized -as Jarl Hakon's. - -"He has perished in the river!" cried many voices, and this opinion -was strengthened by finding the body of Hakon's horse farther down, -on a sandbank. But as everyone was discussing this, an old bonder -came up to Olaf. - -"Olaf," he remarked, "you know well how cunning the Jarl is, and how -skilled he is in tricks. A man of his nature does not get carried -away by a river, however swift; can you not see that this is but a -trick to make us cease the search and disband?" - -"That is so," replied Sigurd at once. "I believe the man is right, -King." - -Others assented to this opinion also, and the small army pushed on to -Rimul. By torchlight they made a thorough search of the homestead of -Lady Thora, but without avail; so King Olaf, standing on a large -stone near the barn, cried out: - -"Men, we have searched without avail for Jarl Hakon; at this time we -can do no more. But know, that with fitting gift and payment I will -reward whoever shall slay the Jarl and bring me his head." - -With that they left the homestead, and proceeded to Ladi, where they -remained for the night. This was a very large farm and village, -belonging to the Kings of Norway, and here Olaf took up temporary -quarters. The men were next morning landed from the ships, the -bonders were levied, and word was sent throughout the whole country -that King Olaf, son of King Triggve, had arrived to take the rule -from the hands of Hakon, and that a General Assembly of the People -was to meet at once at Thrandheim. - -These things, however, were not all done in a day. The very next -afternoon, after reaching Ladi, word was brought to King Olaf that a -man was inquiring for him, having a large package. King Olaf and -Sigurd went to the door of the farmhouse, and saw an ill-favored man -wearing the collar of a thrall, or slave. - -"What do you want of me?" inquired the King. - -For answer the man opened his package and showed a human head. -Sigurd could not repress a shudder, and he turned away; the head was -that of Jarl Hakon of Norway. - -Olaf called his men at once, and the thrall told his story. He was -the tooth-thrall of Hakon, the slave, who, according to custom, had -been given the Jarl when he cut his first teeth; he had fled with -Hakon from the bonders, and the Lady Thora had made for them a sure -hiding-place in a cave beneath the pigsty, in the very yard where -Olaf had offered a reward for Hakon's head. - -"What led you to betray the Jarl?" asked Olaf, angrily. - -"Chiefly for the reward you promised, King, for we could hear your -voice distinctly. So I slew him as he slept and brought his head to -you for the promised reward." - -"Seize him, men!" cried Olaf, his eyes blazing with anger as he -pointed to the thrall. "I will keep the promise which I made, to -give you a fit reward, and it will keep those who come after us from -betraying their lords! You dog! You were the servant of a wicked -man, but he was your master and a good one to you, and you were bound -to him by oaths the most sacred. Your reward shall be a fitting one -indeed; take him out and behead him, men!" - -When this was done, King Olaf took the thrall's head, together with -that of Hakon, and sailing out to the island of Nidarholm, which was -used as a place of execution for evildoers, the two heads were placed -on the gallows. That night King Olaf gathered his leaders in the -farmhouse at Ladi. - -"My friends," he said, "Jarl Hakon is dead, and I doubt if Jarl Eirik -will dare to attack us. The General Assembly will be held soon, and -I trust that the people will take me for their king. It seems to me -that only by the aid of God was the mighty Hakon overthrown so -easily; moreover, the time is come when idolatry and heathen worship -in Norway must give way to the Holy Truth. You have come hither from -Ireland with me, and are you now willing to give your lives, if need -be, to spread the Word of God?" - -"Aye!" shouted all, and after a council it was decided that as soon -as Olaf had been chosen king the first steps should be taken to stamp -out the worship of Thor and Odin at the great temple in Thrandheim. -Sigurd remembered his adventure with Vagn in that temple, and he felt -a thrill at thought of planting the Cross in place of the great -golden statue of Thor; for the words of the King had fired all his -chiefs, and Bishop Sigurd also had spoken at length. - -They abode quietly at Ladi for two or three weeks, Astrid taking up -her quarters in the big farmhouse. There was nothing to do save to -wait till the bonders met in General Assembly, and for this reason -also King Olaf waited before tearing down the great temple to Odin at -Ladi. It would not be wise to anger the bonders before being -elected; afterwards, when he was the rightful King, it would be -different. - -Finally word arrived that the delegates to the Assembly had met from -all eight districts of Norway, so Olaf and his men traveled up to -Thrandheim, at the head of the Firth. Olaf was pretty sure of -election, for while he dwelt at Ladi most of the great men of the -country had visited him, and his handsome presence and kingly mien -had made a very favorable impression; moreover, he was well known by -reputation as one of the greatest warriors of his time. - -Arrived at Thrandheim, Olaf, Sigurd, Astrid and the others of the -King's party were given apartments in the palace of Jarl Hakon, and -two mornings later they took their way to the Assembly. Here an -immense crowd was assembled, from the whole Thrandheim district, and -as soon as the Assembly had been constituted, King Olaf stood up in -sight of all, his red-gold hair flying in the breeze, the sun -streaming from his golden armor and scarlet cloak. - -"It is known to all men here assembled that I have offered myself to -be King over you. You must expect the sternest treatment by Jarl -Eirik for the attack on his father, unless you obtain protection; on -the other hand, I have a difficult task before me in obtaining -possession of my father's realm, after being so long absent." - -Olaf gave a brief account of his life and adventures, from his -boyhood up to his discovery of Thorir Klakke's treachery, his coming -to Norway, and the death of Hakon, and concluded with: - -"I believe that there is no man in Norway who by legal right and -descent has so much right to the crown as I. But I must be made King -by you, the Assembly of the People, and if you do so I will protect -you and rule you according to the ancient laws of Norway." - -The tale of his exile and sufferings greatly moved the people, who -were already predisposed in his favor. As he sat down, half the -delegates leaped to their feet. - -"Skoal! Olaf Triggveson, skoal! We will have you to be our King, -and none other! Skoal!" - -A blare of horns mingled with shouts rent the air, and Sigurd, behind -Olaf, set his great standard flapping in the breeze. A silence fell -over the people as they saw the Cross, but only for a moment; again -the shout arose, pealing across the town and the bay and echoing back -from hill to hill behind them: - -"Skoal to King Olaf! Skoal!" - - - - -CHAPTER XXII. - -THE SACRIFICE TO THOR. - -Thus was Olaf Triggveson chosen by the General Assembly to be King -over all Norway, and the rule of the land was made over to him in -accordance with the old laws, by the officers of the people. The -bonders swore to be faithful to him, to support him while he won the -whole kingdom, and to help him to hold it; Olaf on his part promised -to observe the laws and rights of the people, and to defend it from -all invaders. - -These ceremonies occupied the better part of the day, and it was -sunset before Sigurd and Astrid, who had watched the ceremony, -returned to the hall. They saw nothing of Olaf for several days, for -he was very busy with the various leaders who flocked to his banner, -and he was raising men and sending messages to all quarters of Norway -with news of his election. - -Soon, however, news arrived that the levies were not needed, for Jarl -Eirik and his brother Svein had fled to Sweden as soon as the news of -their father's death arrived. The whole country yielded to Olaf's -rule, glad once more to have a king of the royal line of rulers, and -glad to get rid of Hakon, who to this day is known as "Hakon the Bad." - -King Olaf was eager to preach the gospel to his people, but Sigurd, -his namesake the Bishop, and the other chiefs saw that Olaf must -first make his hold on the country firmer, for they foresaw that when -the people found that Olaf was intending to overturn the old faith, -there would be tumults and revolts. The King, however, yielded only -in part to them; and refusing to dwell in Thrandheim, where the great -temple of Thor was situated, began the building of a second town, -Nidaros, a few miles distant. So the autumn and early winter passed. - -Nevertheless, the news spread that Olaf was no follower of the old -gods, and grave disturbances took place throughout the country, for -the bonders drew away from the new King when they found that he was -preaching a new faith to them. Then one day came the news that at -many of the larger temples great meetings of the bonders had taken -place, with sacrifices to the old gods, and there the bonders had -solemnly vowed that they would not allow Olaf to preach the "White -Christ" in Norway. - -Now all agreed that it was indeed time to act, unless the kingdom was -to be endangered. The heart of the country was the district around -Thrandheim, where the land was most thickly populated, and where the -capital lay; so Olaf realized that if he once established -Christianity here, it would not be long before the rest of Norway -gave in. - -With this object he called another General Assembly at Frosta, near -the capital; but as the message went forth, the bonders seized the -messengers, and substituted a war-arrow, so that all the chiefs and -great leaders assembled with a huge host, armed and ready for war. - -Olaf, who came to the Assembly with only Sigurd and a score of men, -saw that he was taken in a trap; however, on the first day of the -meeting he conciliated the Assembly, although when he mentioned -Christ several of the leaders arose and forbade him to speak on -religious subjects on that day. - -Sigurd saw that the bonders were in a bad mood, and that a spark -might inflame them; so that night, as he and King Olaf sat in their -tent, he said: - -"Olaf, I have a plan which I think will save us all from further -trouble." - -"Then, by St. Michael, let me have it!" cried Olaf, "for I am at my -wits' end for want of one!" - -So Sigurd talked long with the King that evening. The next morning, -when the Assembly opened, Olaf arose, and after a short speech said: - -"Let us preserve the compact that we made before, to strengthen and -uphold each other. To this end I will attend your great sacrifice -two weeks hence at the temple in Thrandheim, and after this we will -take counsel together concerning the faith that will be held, and we -will agree to hold to whatever faith we decide upon." - -At this the bonders gave a great shout of joy, thinking that King -Olaf was yielding, and the other matters for which the Assembly had -been called passed off without trouble. - -When Olaf returned to his new town of Nidaros a number of men from -Iceland received baptism, shortly after Yuletide. Many traders and -others who were in the new city of Nidaros, remained through the -winter at Olaf's court, and most of these were also baptized in the -end. - -For the next two weeks both Sigurd and the King were busy perfecting -Sigurd's plan. The chief opponent of Christianity among the bonders -was Ironbeard, a very powerful chief who was also priest at Moeri, a -town near Thrandheim. The winter sacrifice was to be held at the -great temple in Moeri, and if Sigurd's plan went well, all resistance -to Christianity in the district would be destroyed at one blow. - -Invitations were sent out to all the chief men of the bonders, to a -feast to be held at Nidaros three days before the winter sacrifice. -The greatest chiefs and leaders of the Thrandheim districts were -invited, and all accepted, save Ironbeard and one or two others. - -On the morning bidden, the invited chiefs streamed into town, on -foot, on horseback, and even on skis. Many came over the ice from -across the bay, and by next morning the new city was filled with men, -as each chief brought a party with him. Early in the morning Olaf -and his court attended service in the new church, all the visitors -refusing to watch the service. - -Immediately afterward Sigurd led fifty men to the harbor. There they -put on skates, and the young Jarl led them to Ladi, which was only -three miles across the ice, though more by land. - -Removing their skates, Sigurd and his men tramped up from the shore -to the temple which stood on the hill, and raising his axe, Sigurd -struck the door. In five minutes it was broken down, while the few -priests who lived near by stood watching helplessly. - -Carrying out all the images, Sigurd piled them in the show ana set -fire to them as an object lesson to the watching priests and bonders -that their gods were powerless. The temple was then stripped of its -valuables and the building itself burned. When this was done, Sigurd -and his men made a cross out of two beams of wood, and this he -planted in the snow over the ruins of the idols. - -[Illustration: _This cross he planted over the ruins of the idols._] - -Then, seeing the bonders gathering fast, he stepped out and addressed -them: - -"Friends, we are here by command of the King, and you have to-day -seen how powerless your gods are before the true God. As you know, -your chiefs are now in Nidaros; when they return they will be -Christian men, no longer heathen." - -With this Sigurd and his men, laden with the spoil of the temple, -returned to Nidaros. At the harbor mouth a man met them, for it was -noontime. - -"Hasten, Jarl! The Assembly has just been called!" he cried to -Sigurd. "King Olaf posted me here to bid you hasten to the hall." - -Sigurd hurried on to the palace, bidding his men wait in the outer -rooms till he blew his horn. Then he made his way to the hall, -entering it just as the Assembly was opened by the King. - -"Chiefs and bonders," said Olaf, looking sternly around on the two -score great leaders who sat below his high-seat, "I do not forget -that you chose me to be your King, and gave me this realm of Norway; -but some two weeks ago I called a General Assembly of the people, and -there you and others refused to hear me preach the gospel of Christ, -and only by promising to attend the winter sacrifice did I escape -injury at your hands. - -"Now you and all men know that I have in many places shamed the false -gods, burnt their images and temples, and in their stead have erected -the Cross of the true God. But I am conscious of the oath which I -swore to you at that Assembly, and therefore I propose to sacrifice -to your gods the greatest and highest sacrifice that man may offer, -namely, human life." - -A little murmur of joy ran around the hall as Olaf paused. On great -occasions the Norsemen used to offer as the most acceptable sacrifice -a number of slaves or criminals, condemned to death. At the next -words of Olaf, the joyous murmur ceased. - -"I do not believe that thralls or malefactors should be offered to -the gods; instead, they should delight in the blood of noble men, -great chiefs, powerful bonders. Since you have refused to release me -from my oath, I propose to sacrifice this sort of men, for we must do -our best to appease the gods, that they may favor us. Am I right?" - -As the King paused again, a doubtful murmur of assent rose up, and -the men, not quite sure of Olaf's meaning, fixed their eyes on the -King, who stood, handsome and erect, by his throne. - -"Therefore," he continued, "I will offer to your gods the greatest -sacrifice that Norway has ever known. You must be eager to receive -from them the reward of your service and past offerings, and for the -purpose of this offering I shall select you, Orm Lugg, you, Asbiorn -of Orness, you, Stirkar of Gimsa, you, Kar of Gryting, and I will -sacrifice you upon the high altar of Thor at Thrandeim. And after -this, I shall select six others, the highest and worthiest men of -this district from among you, and they shall be sacrificed likewise, -that the gods may send us fruitful seasons and peace." - - - - -CHAPTER XXIII. - -HOW THE CHIEFS WERE BAPTIZED. - -For a moment the chiefs stared at the King, incredulous and amazed. -Then, as they caught the meaning of his ironic speech, the four men -he had named leaped to their feet, and an angry roar went up from -all. Olaf's uplifted hand stilled the murmur. - -"Wait! You do not seem so eager for the companionship of your gods; -can it be that you doubt their power to save you? If that is really -the case, and you wish to release me from that oath of mine, I will -be right glad to have you all baptized, and believe in the mighty, -gentle and kind God whom I and my men serve." - -At these words Sigurd blew his horn, and the doors in the side of the -hall flew open. His men brought in the spoils of the Ladi temple and -laid them at Olaf's feet, while other armed men filed silently into -the room. - -"Here," exclaimed Olaf, pointing to the temple utensils and -trappings, "you see how powerless your gods are to save their -belongings! Now think it over, while my men watch the doors; I will -return in a few minutes." - -With these words he left the hall, followed by Sigurd. Outside the -door he gripped the boy's arm joyfully, and was about to speak when -an indignant voice broke on their ears: - -"What is this tale I hear, King Olaf?" - -Looking up they saw before them the old English Bishop, Sigurd, clad -in his vestments. His face was stern and cold as Olaf bowed to him. - -"Is this tale true? That you hold the Thrandheim chiefs in the great -hall, offering them their choice of baptism or death? Answer me!" - -Astounded, the King gazed at the Bishop, then after a moment his eyes -fell. - -"Why, Bishop, it is true, certainly! What mean you?" - -The old man's eyes flashed. "Think you that this is the way to -spread the gospel of Christ? Is baptism a thing to be forced on men, -or a thing which they must choose willingly? Better lose this -kingdom of yours and flee back over the ocean again than to do this -thing, Olaf Triggveson!" - -At this the boy spoke out. "Bishop, it it my fault, for I suggested -the plan; but why is it so bad? Did not the chiefs entrap Olaf a -week or two ago?" - -Bishop Sigurd turned on him. "What of that? Do as you will with the -bodies of these men, Olaf, but force not their souls! Let them come -to Christ willingly." His voice softened. "I know that you both are -only overzealous; but believe me, King and Jarl, this is not -Christianity. Christ said, 'Come unto me'; think you he would have -men driven to him with whips and swords, who died to save men?" - -Olaf bent his head, and Sigurd dropped on his knees. "Pardon, -Bishop! I had not thought of it that way; I see how wrong it was -now!" - -The Bishop put his hand on Sigurd's head. "And you, Olaf? Do you -not see that I am right? Must you be led by this boy?" - -Olaf, fixing his keen eyes on the old man, nodded slowly. "I see, -Bishop, and I will obey your unspoken thought." - -He turned slowly, and Sigurd followed him to the door of the great -hall. As they entered there was a hush, and Olaf curtly bade his men -leave the building, waiting in silence as they filed out. - -Then, ascending the high-seat, he said bitterly: - -"Chiefs, I came among you preaching the Word of God, the gospel of -peace and salvation; but my own acts have been as those of a pagan -and worse. Small wonder that you refused to accept my faith! Too -late I see that I have done ill by you; now I stand ready to repair -my faults, and to act as a true Christian. Go in peace; those of you -who wish to accept Christianity will be welcomed. If it is your wish -that a heathen King rule over you, I will return whence I came, and -will bring no fire and sword into the land." - -The chiefs gazed in amazement at the King, and Orm Lugg, one of the -greatest spoke out: - -"Is this truth, King? Are we free to go to our homes?" - -"Yes," said Olaf, a flush mounting to his brow. "I have proved -myself a poor Christian, friends, but forgive me for this time; go, -and whatever is your will I shall abide by it." - -One by one, silent, incredulous, the chiefs left the hall, and Sigurd -alone remained with the King. Then the boy, grasping Olaf's hand, -cried with tears in his eyes: - -"Olaf, we have been wrong, but how you must suffer! Will you really -go back to Ireland if the chiefs refuse to accept the gospel?" - -"Yes, my friend," and Olaf's tone was very low and soft. "The good -Bishop yonder showed me more in that minute than I can tell you. I -have been proud, Sigurd, and my pride is shattered; the Hammer of -Thor is not like Christ's Cross. I thought to use the Cross like a -weapon, like Thor uses his Hammer; but the Cross is a symbol, not of -pride and might, but of gentleness, of pity, of humility. Yes, my--" - -Suddenly the doors opened, and in came the chiefs, to the King's -amazement. Their faces were very changed now; the fierceness, the -resistance, seemed to have given way to some new emotion. - -"King Olaf," said Orm, the spokesman, "we found it as you said; the -palace is unguarded, the streets are clear. Oh, King, I have a hard -thing to say, but mayhap you will understand! Listen. - -"We bonders have in truth resisted your faith because, as you said -just now, you preached one thing to us, and you acted another thing. -We have resisted, not because we love the old gods, but because we -could not see wherein the White Christ was better." - -Orm paused, fixing his eyes on the King's. "But to-day, King Olaf, -you have shown us a new thing. We have not known you long, yet we -have found in you a strong man, a proud man, a man used to ruling the -wills of others, and for this we have rejoiced in a worthy King. -To-day, Olaf, we have found that there was one thing stronger than -these, a thing able to overcome all your strength, pride--even your -will; and because this is so, we freely accept from your hand the -Cross of Christ." - -For a moment Olaf gazed at the men around him, unable to speak. -Then, the tears flowing down his cheeks, he pressed their hands, one -by one, and said: - -"My friends, this is a victory where I had found a defeat. I cannot -tell you what it means to me, but I think that none of us will forget -this day. Jarl Sigurd and I have to-day learned a lesson from you -and from ourselves; pray God we may never have to learn it over -again!" - -Then Sigurd summoned the Bishop, telling him what had happened on the -way, and without delay the chiefs were baptized in Olaf's new church, -together with their men. That night Olaf and Sigurd sat in Astrid's -chamber, talking over the events of the day until late. - -King Olaf had given Astrid part of Jarl Hakon's forfeited estates, to -compensate her for those she possessed in Vendland, so that she might -be able to live as became her dignity; further, he constituted -himself her ward, although with the laughing declaration that he -would run the risk of forcing her to marry against her will. He had -also promised to give Sigurd an earldom, as soon as he had put the -country into some kind of order. - -"What are now your plans, my lord?" asked the girl, that same night. -Olaf shook his head. - -"Truly, Astrid, I know not. Practically all of the greater chiefs -from the Thrandheim districts were baptized to-day, and I think that -the bond established between us will never be broken. Ironbeard -alone holds out; I am strongly minded to visit him at once, during -the winter sacrifice, and try to win him over. To-morrow, Sigurd, we -will go to Thrandheim and demolish the great temple there." - -For a minute Sigurd looked at Olaf, then the latter smiled. "No, -Sigurd, I have learned my lesson. There will be no bloodshed, either -there or at the winter sacrifice, if I can help it. But the greatest -chiefs have been baptized; now it is essential that Ironbeard be -either forced to accept my rule or leave the country." - -So, without the least opposition, Olaf and Sigurd burned the old -temple of the war-god the very next day. Many of the chiefs so -recently baptized showed their sincerity by joining Olaf or sending -men to his aid; and the idols were taken out before all the people, -and burned. Sigurd longed for Vagn to be there, as he remembered -their adventure with Jarl Hakon; but his cousin was far away to the -south. - -The work was finished by midday, and the party returned to Nidaros. -The sudden conversion of their greatest chiefs seemed to have -demoralized the bonders, for no longer were threats heard against -Olaf, but instead, many of them came to Nidaros and were baptized by -the good Bishop. - -The day after the destruction of the Thrandheim temple, Olaf prepared -to go to Moeri, where the winter sacrifice was held. He took all his -men, sailing up Thrandheim Firth with his largest ships, and came to -Moeri the day of the sacrifice. - -The King sent Sigurd ashore, demanding that the people first hold an -Assembly. Fairhair found a great multitude assembled from all the -countryside, with Ironbeard and his men all present. They at once -agreed to Olaf's demand, so the King landed with his men, and the -Assembly was constituted on the plain before the temple. - -When the noise and talking of the opening had subsided, Olaf arose in -his seat and told the bonders what had taken place in his hall at -Nidaros, told them how he had found his mistake, and would no longer -try to force a religion on them that they did not want. - -Sigurd could see a change sweep over the faces of the bonders before -him, and they glanced at each other and began whispering. At this, -however, Ironbeard leaped to his feet--an immense man, wearing the -robes of a priest of Thor, and with an iron-gray beard that swept -over his chest. He lifted his hand and began to speak, slowly and -with great dignity. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIV. - -OLAF'S ATONEMENT. - -"King Olaf," rang out the priest's deep voice, "we are unwilling that -you should violate our religion. The wish of us all is that you -should offer sacrifice as other kings before you have done, and even -as Jarl Hakon did. When King Hakon, foster son of King Athelstan of -England, wished to proclaim the White Christ, he found the bonders -too strong for him, and he yielded to the old faith. The only proper -plan for you is to do likewise, for our minds have not changed since -that Assembly wherein you promised to visit this temple at this time." - -Ironbeard sat down, and his speech was loudly applauded by the -bonders who sat around, and by the great crowd without. Olaf flushed -at the chief's proud demands, but controlling his temper, he rose. - -"My friends, I promised to visit your temple, and I shall do so now, -before the sacrifices. The Assembly is closed." - -With this he motioned to Sigurd, and, followed by his men, who had -laid aside their arms, he walked to the door of the temple. Olaf -held in his hand a gold-mounted staff of heavy wood, and as they -entered he said to Sigurd: - -"Jarl, do just as I do, and act quickly." - -Inside they saw many images around the temple, and occupying the -place of honor was a large idol, heavily adorned with gold and -silver. The temple was now full of Olaf's men, while Ironbeard and -the bonders stood in the doorway, watching him. - -Without another word the King walked up to the large idol, and -raising his heavy staff, struck it. The idol toppled over, fell to -the stone floor, and broke in two parts. At the same instant Sigurd -and his men rushed at the other images and swept them from their -pedestals. - -A loud cry of horror arose from the bonders, and Ironbeard, seizing a -spear, poised it, in the act of hurling it at the King. As he did -so, one of Olaf's men, who was outside, pierced him with an arrow, -and he fell at the temple threshold. - -The bonders drew back, in terror, and the King turned angrily. - -"Who fired that arrow?" he shouted. The man who had done so stepped -to the door. - -"It was I, King Olaf, and I did it to save your life. Ironbeard had -poised a spear at you--see, it is even now in his hand!" - -Olaf looked at the fallen leader, and saw that the man spoke truly. -"Order the Assembly called," he said to Sigurd. "Bid them have no -fear." - -When the people had taken their places again, Olaf came out of the -temple and addressed them from the steps: - -"Friends and bonders, I did not come here to shed blood, and I am -bitterly grieved that Ironbeard drew his fate on himself. As I told -you a little time ago, I will compel no man to leave his faith; I -have discovered the wickedness of that course. But a few days ago -your other chiefs, some of whom stand at my side, accepted from my -hands the Cross of Christ, and now I offer it to you also. - -"You have seen how your gods have fallen and broken. Where is their -power, think you? The true God has protected me, has brought me to -this kingdom and given it into my hand without a struggle, and -whether you will it or not, his faith will prevail in Norway before -many more years have passed." - -The King paused, and one of the bonders arose to reply. - -"Oh, King, your words to-day have fallen pleasantly on our ears, and -we easily perceive that you have truth and justice in your heart. We -see, too, that the gods are dead, and that they have no power before -the Cross of the White Christ. But, King Olaf, the slaying of -Ironbeard was an evil deed, whether you intended it or not, and -before we say more on this subject we would like to know whether you -will punish his murderer." - -The bonder sat down amid a faint murmur of applause, and the Assembly -fixed their eyes on Olaf. For a moment the King sat in silence, and -it was evident that he was struggling with himself; then his face -cleared. - -"My people, I will not punish the man, for he saved my life. Wait! -I am not through. Are there any relatives of Ironbeard present?" - -Two men stood up. "We are distant relatives of his, oh, King, but he -has left no others to mourn him save a single daughter." - -King Olaf took off his helm. "My people, this is a lawful Assembly, -able to give judgment and to punish criminals, with power to inflict -penalty for offenses. I appoint you two bonders judges, and I take -upon my own head the blood of Ironbeard. Whatever you shall think -right, I will agree to, in compensation for his death. Whether you -demand my life, or my exile, or a scat in money, these will I give, -and you shall fear no punishment from my men." - -At these words a silence fell on the host, and Sigurd gazed at Olaf -in love and admiration. Truly, old Bishop Sigurd had not spoken in -vain! A murmur of appreciation of Olaf's generous offer passed from -mouth to mouth, and presently the two relatives of Ironbeard, after -conferring together, stood up. - -"King Olaf, by these words of yours you have indeed shamed us, who -came to this Assembly with arms, and with war in our hearts. It is a -new departure in Norway, that her Kings should offer themselves under -the laws like common men; and yet it seems not unfair to us that you -should do so. The laws declare that for the shedding of blood the -relatives of the dead man may claim the life of the slayer, or they -may claim a scat in lands or goods. Now, King Olaf, Ironbeard has -left no family save a daughter, who has no lack of wealth and is of -good family. We, therefore, her relatives, lay this judgment upon -you: that you make her your lawful wife and bestow upon her lands -befitting her position as Queen." - -The King's men uttered a growl of protest, even Sigurd looking -somewhat blank, for the King had thought of marrying one of the -daughters of the Swedish King, to make an alliance between the two -nations. Olaf, however, checked the murmur with a gesture, and -replied to the bonders: - -"My friends, this is a lawful judgment, and I accept it with good -will. I will expect you two men to look to it that the maid is sent -to Nidaros before Eastertide, at which time I shall marry her and -make her the Queen of this land. It is the least I can do, methinks, -after my men have killed her father and left her alone in the world. -Should this plan not meet with her consent, I will expect you to -appoint other penalty, which I will fulfill most faithfully, and this -I swear on the Cross." - -Olaf sat down amid a shout of approval and joy from the bonders, and -a dozen men rose at once to speak. Making one of their number -spokesman, he addressed the King. - -"My lord, when I left home it was my firm intention to resist your -faith to the last drop of my blood; but now I am proud to take -baptism from your hands, and to swear anew my allegiance to you." - -Olaf started up in surprise, and one by one the other bonders rose -and declared their intention to be baptized. Then Olaf sent for -Bishop Sigurd, whom he had left at the ships, fearing that Ironbeard -might attack him, and turned to the bonders. - -"My people, nothing that you could do would give me more pleasure -than this thing. It is the dearest wish of my heart that this land -of Norway should become Christian, and once you and the other leaders -of Thrandheim and the districts around have received baptism, we will -meet with little opposition from the rest of the land. In pledge of -your earnestness I ask that you complete the destruction of this your -temple to the old gods, and on its site I will erect at my own -expense a church to the true God." - -Shouting and clashing their arms, the bonders sprang up without an -instant's hesitation. They ran to the temple, carried out the broken -images, and piled them in the snow, while others stripped the temple -of its furnishings and set fire to it. As the pile of idols broke -into flame, old Bishop Sigurd arrived from the ships. - -He had been told the whole story on the way up the hill, and he -gripped Olaf's hand silently but heartily as the King met him. At -once the work of baptism was begun, Sigurd and the rest of the King's -men taking part in the service, and standing as godfathers to the new -converts. - -When this was finished the afternoon was nearly spent, and after -arranging with the leaders of the people for the building of a -church, for the burial of Ironbeard, and for the sending of his -daughter Gudrun to Nidaros at Easter, Olaf's men embarked, and the -King sailed back down the Firth to Nidaros. - -A few days before this the Firth had opened, for although it was -still winter, the weather had warmed somewhat, and a channel had been -made from above Moeri to the open sea. When the fleet came to the -harbor that night, they found the town alight with torches, and lying -in the harbor were several newly arrived ships, or rather cutters, -for they were small. - -"I wonder what this means?" said the King, as they drew into the -anchorage. "I had no tidings of visitors, when we left the city -yesterday, and it is strange that the town is all alight!" - -So before the ships had come to anchor, Olaf and Sigurd leaped into a -small boat and were rowed ashore. Their ships had been seen -entering, for great fires were lit on either side of the harbor, -making everything plain to the sight, and a crowd of men met them as -they landed. - -"What is all this excitement about?" demanded the King, looking -around in wonder. - -A confused talking answered him. "Here, one at a time!" shouted -Olaf, and one of the men stepped to his side. - -"We have been driven from home, my lord King, and we come from the -north. There two chiefs, Raud the Strong and Thori Hart, have -revolted against the White Christ, have gathered a fleet, and are -sailing against you. They are preparing to restore the temples of -Thor and Odin and to burn the churches you have built; we, who are -Christians, have barely escaped with our lives, fleeing in our small -boats. The heathen will enter the Firth in a few days, unless you -meet them first!" - - - - -CHAPTER XXV. - -THE WRESTLING MATCH. - -Olaf at once went to the great hall, and there the fugitives came -before him and told their story. The two Northern chieftains had -taken advantage of the unexampled spell of warm weather to raise a -fleet and sail down the coast, thinking to come upon the King just as -he had come upon Jarl Hakon. - -Olaf quickly consulted with Sigurd, the Bishop, and his other -leaders, and their opinion was that not a minute was to be lost. If -the King embarked that night and sailed out of the Firth, he would -reach the entrance by morning, and could wait for the heathen fleet -there. - -The King agreed to this plan, and at once sent word to his men to -return on board the ships. The Thrandheim chiefs now proved their -loyalty by refusing to return to their homes. - -"No, King," said they, "you have dealt with us fairly and honorably, -and we are sensible of it. We and our men will be of use if it comes -to a battle, and the enemy may lose heart when they see us, for -evidently they count on our forces joining them. So set up our -standards on your ships, and we will gladly accompany you." - -At this decision the King was overjoyed, for with these men were -several hundred warriors in all, who had gathered at the Moeri -Assembly. So a few hours later Olaf and Sigurd left Nidaros again, -with a dozen ships, while more would follow as soon as they had been -taken off their winter dry-docks. - -The ships rowed down the Firth all night, while Olaf and Sigurd -rested. The day had been a terribly hard one on both, and they were -glad to get what sleep they could before meeting the advancing foes. - -The week of warm weather seemed a wonderful thing to all the men, and -not a few ascribed it to the favor of heaven upon Olaf. It was only -barely past Yuletide, and although no one expected the warm weather -to last, few of the oldest men could remember a winter when -Thrandheim Firth had remained open, or had opened before April. - -By morning they were outside the cape of Agdaness, where the traitor -Thorkel had been executed. The King ordered the ships to be hove to -here, in order to wait for the six other ships which were following -from Nidaros. All day long they waited, seeing nothing of the -rebels. Two or three small ships, bearing more fugitives, came down -the coast, and gave Olaf the news that Raud and Thori were only -fifteen miles to the north, that they had landed at Theksdale, and -were summoning men to join them from all the country. - -That afternoon the reinforcements came up from Nidaros, and the King -held a council on his ship the "Crane." - -"First," he said, "I am resolved that if it can possibly be avoided -there shall be no bloodshed in this matter. Now let me have your -council on how we shall act to gain these rebels over, if that can be -done." - -Sigurd spoke first. "It may be that you did not note it, King Olaf, -but old Biorn, my forecastle man, is strongly of the opinion that -to-night a heavy frost will set in. This warm weather has not been -natural at all; even this afternoon the sun has been growing somewhat -colder. - -"Now, if a frost returns to-night, it will be no light one, and Biorn -says that the Firth will again be closed to us. In this case, it -seems to me that any ships lying along the shore would be frozen -fast, especially if they were in such a narrow bay as that at -Theksdale. I think that Raud and Thori will give little heed to -their ships, drawing them on shore carelessly, or perhaps anchoring -them near by; and if this is the case, and we come upon them -suddenly, they will probably be so disheartened at the loss of their -ships, and at being left so far from home without means of retreat, -that they will give in." - -A cry of delight broke from the King and the others. "That is the -very solution of it!" exclaimed Olaf. "But--it depends on whether or -not a frost sets in. In any case we will leave the land, so as not -to be frozen in ourselves." - -The chiefs separated to their respective vessels, and all sailed out -two or three miles to sea, where they lay tossing quietly. At sunset -Bishop Sigurd, who was aboard the "Crane," conducted a solemn -service, during which he offered a solemn prayer that God would favor -their enterprise; as the men on all the ships joined in the -responses, it seemed to Sigurd Fairhair that never had he witnessed a -more impressive sight than this. Eighteen ships, all crowded with -men, a large portion of whom had only a few days before been -worshipers of idols, lay grouped together in the sunset glow, while -from them arose a devout and heart-felt prayer to the White Christ. - -No sooner had the sun set and darkness fallen upon the ocean, than -the night turned bitterly cold. Many of the men, not expecting this, -had left off their furs and cloaks, so that the others divided theirs -among all. In some of the ships were bales of merchandise, and at -the King's order these were opened by torchlight and all the men -without cloaks were furnished with them. - -By midnight it was evident that the intense cold would close the -Firth, and as Sigurd had foreseen, would also hold the enemy -helpless. Amid a shout of rejoicing from all the men, the prows were -turned north, and the ships rowed swiftly toward Theksdale, for there -was not a breath of wind, and every minute the cold seemed to -increase. - -With sunrise the pilots announced that they were not far from their -goal, and an hour later they rounded the islands outside Theksdale -Bay. There, however, they were stopped by a ragged line of ice, -nearly a foot thick, which had formed during the night. - -In all haste, for as yet they had not come around the headland into -the bay itself, the crews disembarked without mishap, and gained the -shore, leaving men on board the ships to keep them safe. They made -their way, under guidance of men who knew the coast, across the -headland; and there before them lay the army of revolt, their fleet -fast-bound in fetters of ice along the shore! - -"Come," exclaimed Olaf to his nearest leaders, "we must lose no time, -for, see, they are cutting the ships out of the ice!" - -So, leading the way, he dashed over the rocks of the shore, and as -the first shouts of alarm went up from the heathen army, Olaf and -part of his men stood between them and their ships, while over the -brow of the hill poured the remainder of his forces. - -[Illustration: _Olaf and his men stood between them and their ships._] - -The rebel camp seethed and boiled with men, but seeing that Olaf made -no move to attack them, their haste quieted somewhat, and in a few -minutes two well-appareled chiefs left the tents and with a dozen men -approached the King. - -"Have we safe conduct, King Olaf?" shouted one. - -"Have no fear," replied Olaf, "come in peace." - -As they approached, men who knew them whispered to the King that -these were Raud the Strong and Thori Hart. Both were of lofty -stature and magnificently built, with strong, vigorous features. -They stopped a dozen paces from the King. - -"From your appearance you are Olaf Triggveson," said one. "I am Raud -the Strong, and this is Thori Hart. Have you come in peace or in -war, oh, King?" - -A smile ran around Olaf's men, and he himself laughed outright. - -"That is a strange question, Raud, when you have attacked my people -and declared your intention of driving me from the land!" - -The other two flushed, and Raud's face darkened. "You have caught -me," he cried angrily, "by fault of the Ice King, where my men can -ill defend themselves, and I see that you have many more warriors -than I looked for; yet you will not find me the last to cross swords -with you, Olaf!" - -"Hold, Raud," answered Olaf, "I mean not to attack you. Now see, I -have your ships yonder, I have a much larger force than you, and yet -if you will not yield willingly to me you shall depart in peace to -your homes, on condition simply that you abandon the revolt against -my rule." - -"Why," cried Thori Hart in wonder, "we thought that you made choice -of the Cross or the sword to your subjects! Mean you that we will -not be forced to baptism?" - -Olaf smiled sadly. "You will not, Thori. All the chiefs in the -Thrandheim districts have been baptized, but willingly, as those with -me here can testify. Now, what is your decision?" - -The two whispered together for a minute, until finally Raud spoke up, -advancing toward the King. - -"You have fairly overcome us, King Olaf, and we thank you for our -lives. Still, I am not ready to accept your faith. I am a great -priest of Thor in the north, and you seem to be the champion of the -White Christ, so I propose that you and I pray to our gods, and after -that we indulge in a wrestling match. The winner, he who first -throws the other to earth, shall bestow his faith on all the men of -the loser. This Thori and I agree to, if you will also." - -Olaf, without hesitation, replied, "I will accept the trial, here and -now, trusting to the mercy of Almighty God that he will nerve my arm -against your power and that of your false gods! - -"But one condition I would make, Raud; that is, that whoever loses -this contest shall forfeit his life with it." - -The viking joyfully agreed, and then returned to his camp. The men -of King Olaf had all arrived, and as word of the challenge passed -through the army, more than one covert smile was seen, for already -men said that Olaf was the strongest man in all the land. - -It was so bitterly cold that a great fire was built, and on one side -of the space, scraped clear of snow, marked out for the match, -grouped Olaf's men; on the other side the heathen followers of Raud -stood, full of confidence in their leader, for he was very strong, -whence his name, and skilled in wrestling. - -Stepping into the open space between the two armies, Olaf and Raud -threw off their helmets and armor, and took hold of each other. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVI. - -THE CROSS AND THE HAMMER. - -Sigurd's heart sank as he saw the mighty muscles and powerful limbs -of the pagan; but he glanced at Olaf, and while the latter's muscles -were not so big, he knew that there was terrible strength in them. - -At first the opponents tried out each other carefully; then, -gradually warming up, Raud made terrific attempts to throw Olaf, but -the latter resisted every endeavor, seemingly without effort. Now -was seen the difference in the two men's lives, for while Raud -speedily lost his wind, became flushed and tired, King Olaf looked as -fresh as when he began the conflict, owing to his temperate life. - -As the viking weakened, Olaf suddenly seized him by the thigh in an -unguarded moment, and with a movement of his hands flung the man over -his head. Amid a shout from his men, and a groan of dismay from -those of Raud, the latter struck the ground, Olaf leaping to his side. - -As the fallen man struggled up, the King seized his hand and aided -him. "You have won fairly, Olaf," gasped Raud, looking with -wondering eyes on his antagonist, "and my life is yours." - -"Nay," said the King, kindly, handing the viking his garments, "I -seek no man's blood, Raud. All I ask is that you serve me -faithfully, and you shall have the same lands that you held from -Hakon." - -Messengers were at once despatched overland to Nidaros, to tell of -the outcome of the conflict; then, after Raud, Thori and his men had -been baptized, for they accepted the condition willingly, Olaf -embarked his men again and they returned south. - -The Firth was of course closed again, so the ships were drawn ashore -for the winter, and the chiefs of the bonders left the King for their -homes, while he pushed on across the snow-clad hills with his own -men. At Ladi they crossed the ice to Nidaros, and were received with -much joy. - -At Eastertide the marriage of King Olaf and Gudrun, the daughter of -Ironbeard, was solemnized by Bishop Sigurd; and at the same time -Sigurd Fairhair and Astrid were married. The wedding was a surprise -to no one, as the whole court knew the story of their adventures, and -had long since agreed that sooner or later the two would be wedded. - -Easter of this year came late in April, and the Firth had been open -for some time. As the procession left the church and wended through -the streets of Nidaros to the great hall, a wonderful ship was seen -entering the harbor. The prow ended in a dragon's head, the stern in -the coils and tail of a dragon; both prow and stern were gilded, -shining bravely in the morning sun. The hoisted sail represented a -dragon's wings, and the glistening oar blades the beast's legs. - -A cry of amazement went up from all, but the King turned, with a -smile at Sigurd. - -"This ship I have had built in secret, and it is my wedding gift to -my faithful Jarl, Sigurd Fairhair. It is not fitting that a Jarl of -mine should be landless, so I also bestow on him the earldom of the -Agdirs, and command that he take his wedding journey thither in this -his new ship!" - -* * * * * * - -Four years later King Olaf Triggveson, with a few of his ships, was -entrapped by the treacherous Jarl Sigvald among the islands of Svold -Sound, while the main part of his fleet was out at sea. - -Here had gathered his enemies--the King of Sweden, King Svein, of -Denmark, who had turned against Olaf, and the heathen men of Norway, -who had chosen rather to leave the land than to accept the Cross. -One by one the King's ships were taken, although he made such a -defense as Norway had never seen, and at one time it seemed as though -he would win, even against such odds. Then Jarl Eirik, the son of -Jarl Hakon, tore the dragon-prows from his ships, and rowed to the -attack under the sign of the Cross. - -As the last of King Olaf's men fell on his forecastle, the King threw -aside his shield and sprang overboard. He was famous as a swimmer -through all the lands of the north, and now he dived deeply, swimming -under the keels of his enemies' ships, so that it seemed to them that -he had drowned. - -Coming up outside the ring of vessels, the King swam swiftly to a -fishing boat that lay in by the islands, and was pulled aboard by -Sigurd and his wife Astrid, who had come too late to warn Olaf of the -plot to betray him. That night, with his wounds bound, the King sat -in the stern of the boat, which sailed swiftly south. - -Sigurd urged Olaf to go north, offering to take him to his fleet, -which could return and meet the invaders, but the King refused. - -"No, my friends, I cannot do this. Toward the end of the fight Jarl -Eirik hoisted the Cross, and I believe he made a vow that he and his -men would renounce the old gods forever if he conquered me. -Therefore, it seems to me that by the will of God, Norway has become -Christian at last, and also I am not without fear that God has been -displeased with my rule." - -"Then shall we go to England with you? You have many great friends -there, and King Ethelred, who is almost driven from his kingdom by -the Danes, would gladly give you a share of his realm," said Astrid. -Again the King shook his head. - -"No," he replied, "let me be as dead to the realm of Norway, for I -will never trouble it again. I will go to Rome, and after that to -Jerusalem. There the Crusaders rule the Holy Land, and I will join -them and devote the rest of my life to serving against the Moslem. I -believe that God used me as an instrument for giving his Word to -Norway, and now that this is accomplished, it were best to give peace -to this troubled realm." - -Seeing that it was useless to urge Olaf further, Sigurd sadly gave -up, and two days later they arrived in his earldom of Agdir. Here -the King remained for two weeks, then, fearing that his presence -would bring trouble on his old friends, decided that he would at once -start on his pilgrimage. - -"Make your peace with the conquerors, Sigurd," he said. "They will -be glad to retain you in your possessions here." - -With this he selected a score of men and a small ship of Sigurd's, -and departed from Norway forever. As he and Sigurd and Astrid stood -together on the forecastle, just as the anchor was raised, the King -said sadly: - -"My friends, it is for the best, believe me, and now peace will come -to the land. The faith of Christ has been established, and although -men may return at times to the old gods, I think that it will not be -for long. Now take this sword of mine, even as you took one long ago -in Ireland, and wear it in memory of me; I will never use a weapon -again, save in defense of the Holy Land." - -Embracing the King with tears, Sigurd and Astrid left the ship; and -an hour later it was a white speck far on the horizon. - -"Come, Astrid," said Sigurd, "we will never see Olaf again; yet he -will always be remembered as the first King of Norway to overthrow -the Hammer of Thor, and to plant in its stead the Cross of Christ!" - - - -THE END. - - - - - - - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CROSS AND THE HAMMER *** - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that: - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/67528-0.zip b/old/67528-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e7b0bfc..0000000 --- a/old/67528-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67528-h.zip b/old/67528-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8e872d4..0000000 --- a/old/67528-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67528-h/67528-h.htm b/old/67528-h/67528-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 2916584..0000000 --- a/old/67528-h/67528-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,11325 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"> - -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en"> - -<head> - -<link rel="icon" href="images/img-cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover" /> - -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" /> - -<title> -The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Cross and the Hammer, -by Henry Bedford-Jones -</title> - -<style type="text/css"> -body { color: black; - background: white; - margin-right: 10%; - margin-left: 10%; - font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; - text-align: justify } - -p {text-indent: 4% } - -p.noindent {text-indent: 0% } - -p.t1 {text-indent: 0% ; - font-size: 200%; - text-align: center } - -p.t2 {text-indent: 0% ; - font-size: 150%; - text-align: center } - -p.t2b {text-indent: 0% ; - font-size: 150%; - font-weight: bold; - text-align: center } - -p.t3 {text-indent: 0% ; - font-size: 100%; - text-align: center } - -p.t3b {text-indent: 0% ; - font-size: 100%; - font-weight: bold; - text-align: center } - -p.t4 {text-indent: 0% ; - font-size: 80%; - text-align: center } - -p.t4b {text-indent: 0% ; - font-size: 80%; - font-weight: bold; - text-align: center } - -p.t5 {text-indent: 0% ; - font-size: 60%; - text-align: center } - -h1 { text-align: center } -h2 { text-align: center } -h3 { text-align: center } -h4 { text-align: center } -h5 { text-align: center } - -p.poem {text-indent: 0%; - margin-left: 10%; } - -p.thought {text-indent: 0% ; - letter-spacing: 4em ; - text-align: center } - -p.letter {text-indent: 0%; - margin-left: 10% ; - margin-right: 10% } - -p.footnote {text-indent: 0% ; - font-size: 80%; - margin-left: 10% ; - margin-right: 10% } - -.smcap { font-variant: small-caps } - -p.transnote {text-indent: 0% ; - margin-left: 10% ; - margin-right: 10% } - -p.quote {text-indent: 4% ; - margin-left: 0% ; - margin-right: 0% } - -p.finis { font-size: larger ; - text-align: center ; - text-indent: 0% ; - margin-left: 0% ; - margin-right: 0% } - -p.capcenter { margin-left: 0; - margin-right: 0 ; - margin-bottom: .5% ; - margin-top: 0; - font-weight: bold; - float: none ; - clear: both ; - text-indent: 0%; - text-align: center } - -img.imgcenter { margin-left: auto; - margin-bottom: 0; - margin-top: 1%; - margin-right: auto; } - -</style> - -</head> - -<body> -<p style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Cross and the Hammer, by Henry Bedford-Jones</p> -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online -at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you -are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the -country where you are located before using this eBook. -</div> - -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: The Cross and the Hammer</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:0; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:1em;'>A Tale of the Days of the Vikings</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Henry Bedford-Jones</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: February 28, 2022 [eBook #67528]</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</p> - <p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; text-align:left'>Produced by: Al Haines</p> -<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CROSS AND THE HAMMER ***</div> - -<h1> -<br /><br /> - THE CROSS AND<br /> - THE HAMMER<br /> -</h1> - -<p class="t3b"> - <i>A Tale of the Days of the Vikings</i><br /> -</p> - -<p><br /></p> - -<p class="t2"> - <i>By H. BEDFORD-JONES</i><br /> -</p> - -<p><br /><br /></p> - -<p class="t2"> - PUBLISHED BY<br /> - DAVID C. COOK PUBLISHING Co.<br /> - ELGIN, ILLINOIS<br /> -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p class="t4"> - COPYRIGHT, 1912.<br /> - BY DAVID C. COOK PUBLISHING Co.,<br /> - ELGIN, ILLINOIS.<br /> -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p class="t3b"> - CONTENTS.<br /> -</p> - -<p class="noindent"> - I. <a href="#chap01">How the Vow Was Made</a><br /> - II. <a href="#chap02">The Shooting Match</a><br /> - III. <a href="#chap03">Jarl Hakon of Norway</a><br /> - IV. <a href="#chap04">The Rescue in the Bay</a><br /> - V. <a href="#chap05">The Escape from Thrandheim</a><br /> - VI. <a href="#chap06">Hiorunga Bay</a><br /> - VII. <a href="#chap07">How Vagn Kept His Vow</a><br /> - VIII. <a href="#chap08">"Skoal to King Olaf!"</a><br /> - IX. <a href="#chap09">How Astrid Fared Forth</a><br /> - X. <a href="#chap10">Farewell to Dublin</a><br /> - XI. <a href="#chap11">At Ethelred's Court</a><br /> - XII. <a href="#chap12">The Flight From London</a><br /> - XIII. <a href="#chap13">Alfred of Mercia</a><br /> - XIV. <a href="#chap14">In Bretland</a><br /> - XV. <a href="#chap15">In Winter Quarters</a><br /> - XVI. <a href="#chap16">An Ambuscade</a><br /> - XVII. <a href="#chap17">Ketil Turns Up</a><br /> - XVIII. <a href="#chap18">A Mission for the King</a><br /> - XIX. <a href="#chap19">At King Svein's Court</a><br /> - XX. <a href="#chap20">The King and the Towel</a><br /> - XXI. <a href="#chap21">The Death of Hakon</a><br /> - XXII. <a href="#chap22">The Sacrifice To Thor</a><br /> - XXIII. <a href="#chap23">How the Chiefs Were Baptized</a><br /> - XXIV. <a href="#chap24">Olaf's Atonement</a><br /> - XXV. <a href="#chap25">The Wrestling Match</a><br /> - XXVI. <a href="#chap26">The Cross and the Hammer</a><br /> -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap00b"></a></p> - -<h3> -FOREWORD. -</h3> - -<p> -This is a story about the very real -people and events; if ever you chance -to read the old Sagas of Norway -you will come upon most of the characters -of this tale. The viking age was not Christian, -it was full of the clash of arms and of -unknightly deeds, yet its story is vitally -interesting. -</p> - -<p> -The Hammer of Thor, the War-god of -northern Europe, did not yield to the Cross -of Christ without a struggle, and the story -of Norway's conversion is intensely -dramatic. King Hakon the Good, a foster-son -of the English King Athelstan, was forced -to recant his faith in order to hold his -throne; King Olaf Triggveson lost his -kingdom, or rather gave it up, at Svolde -Sound, because he refused to do the like; -and King Olaf the Thick, who followed -him, fell beneath the heathen weapons of -his subjects, becoming the patron saint of -Norway. -</p> - -<p> -It was the first King Olaf who broke the -power of the old gods and who introduced -Christianity into his realm. Short as was -his reign, he was the greatest king Norway -ever had. He built the first church in the -land, and sent the first missionaries to -Iceland; during his reign Thangbrand, the -priest, won that island to the true faith. -</p> - -<p> -Many of the incidents narrated are -taken direct from the Sagas, and although -King Olaf is said to have died at Svolde, -the story of his escape is well authenticated; -I give his own words in refusing to -win back his kingdom. He went to Rome -and the Holy Land and held rule there -under the Crusader Kings of Jerusalem, -dying fifty years later. King Edward the -Confessor used to have the story of his life -chanted to his court once every year, upon -his death being reported in England during -that king's reign. -</p> - -<p class="noindent"> -H. BEDFORD-JONES. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap00c"></a></p> - -<h3> -NOTES. -</h3> - -<p> -"<i>bonders.</i>"—This word is used in the -Sagas to represent the free farmers of -Norway, who held their lands from the -king, or owned them; they were subject -only to the orders of the king or his Jarls, -and are equivalent to our own "farmers," -except that they had special rights and -privileges. -</p> - -<p> -"<i>scat.</i>"—A fine or any other penalty -which might be imposed on an offender by -an assembly of the people. The scat was -usually a fine of money, lands, or goods. -</p> - -<p> -"<i>skoal.</i>"—This plain word corresponds -to our own "Hurrah!" It means both long -life, good health, and joy, and is still used -in Norway in that sense. -</p> - -<p> -I have avoided the use of many words -which are usually retained in the translations -of the old Sagas. Nearly all the facts -about which the story of Sigurd Fairhair is -woven are historical, and are taken from -the Heimskringla, and the Saga of King -Olaf by the Abbot Berg Sokkason. Both -histories were compiled from the accounts -of eye-witnesses of the events contained -therein, to a great extent, and especially -was this true with the life of Olaf -Triggveson.—<i>The Author</i>. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap01"></a></p> - -<p class="t2"> -The Cross and the Hammer -</p> - -<p class="t3b"> -<i>A Tale of the Days of the Vikings</i> -</p> - -<p class="t3"> -<i>By H. BEDFORD-JONES</i> -</p> - -<p><br /><br /></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER I. -<br /><br /> -HOW THE VOW WAS MADE. -</h3> - -<p> -The great hall of the Danish kings at -Leira was filled to overflowing on this -autumn evening of the year 994, for -King Harald Gormson had fallen in battle -some weeks before, and his son Svein -Twyskiegge, of Forkbeard, was celebrating -his accession feast in the hall of his fathers. -</p> - -<p> -Around the town lay a whole city of -tents and brush huts, for besides the Danish -lords present, sixty ships had come from -Jomsborg, bearing the noblest of the famous -Viking brotherhood, under their chiefs Jarl -Sigvald and Bui the Thick. Visitors and -Danes were clad in their bravest array, and -both town and camp presented a scene of -the gayest festivity. -</p> - -<p> -Within, the hall was hung with ancient -arms and trophies of the chase, the floor -was strewn with a thick layer of fresh -rushes, and the long tables were heaped -high with dishes. At one end of the hall -sat King Svein, with his chiefs and the -Jomsborg nobles, while above them towered -the high-seat or throne of the king; along -the hall were ranged the vikings and men -of Denmark, with Queen Gunhild and her -ladies sitting at the far end. -</p> - -<p> -Servants flitted in and out, bearing food -and horns of ale, while in the center of the -hall, between the tables and before the seat -of the king, sat two skalds, singing to the -music of their harps the great deeds of -King Harald and of his son, the new king. -Presently, as the hunger of the throng was -somewhat appeased, all began to wonder -what vow the king would make, for it was -the custom that at the heirship feast the -new king should make a vow to do some -great and noble deed. -</p> - -<p> -Seated near Queen Gunhild as guests of -honor were two boys, one fair and -ruddy-cheeked, the other darker and with very -quick, bold eyes. The latter, Vagn Akison, -was a nephew of Bui, the Jomsborg chief, -and grandson of Palnatoki, the founder of -the viking brotherhood; although he was -only seventeen, he and his cousin Sigurd -were already well known for the prowess. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd Fairhair, who was a year younger -than Vagn, was in high spirits to-night, for -a little before King Svein had given him a -very fine sword, and he was proud of it. -</p> - -<p> -Glancing over at him with a smile, -Queen Gunhild said, "Sigurd, have you -shown Astrid your new sword?" -</p> - -<p> -"Of course he has," replied Astrid, her -niece, who sat beside Sigurd, and her dark -eyes gleamed with fun. "He is going to -try its edge on the big pine tree near the -harbor to-morrow!" -</p> - -<p> -At this sally a laugh went up, and Vagn -cried, "Be careful not to bring down the -tree into the harbor, Sigurd! It would be -a pity to sink all our best ships!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd reddened, and retorted, "Well, I -never aroused the whole camp just because -a pig was wandering around in the bushes!" -</p> - -<p> -This turned the laugh on his cousin, who -had wakened the camp the night before, -mistaking a pig for a spy, and even the -Queen joined heartily in the merriment. -</p> - -<p> -Suddenly a silence fell on the tables, for -King Svein had arisen and was holding in -both hands a great silver bowl. Amid a -dead hush he drained it, handed it to an -attendant, and stepped to the high-seat. -Grasping an arm of this, the king turned. -</p> - -<p> -"Here, as I ascend the throne of my -father Harald, I vow that with the help of -God I will lead my fleet to the land of -England, and ere three winters have passed I -will chase King Ethelred from the land and -sit in his throne!" -</p> - -<p class="capcenter"> -<a id="img-009"></a> -<img class="imgcenter" src="images/img-009.jpg" alt=""I will lead my fleet to the land of England."" /> -<br /> -"<i>I will lead my fleet to the land of England.</i>" -</p> - -<p> -As King Svein took his seat a low -murmur of astonishment ran around the hall, -followed by a tremendous shout of "Skoal! -Skoal!" for this was a great vow to be -fulfilled. -</p> - -<p> -"See how pale the Queen is," whispered -Astrid to Sigurd. "The vow must have -surprised her also." -</p> - -<p> -Indeed, Queen Gunhild had turned white, -for the King's vow meant that a great war -would be undertaken, and how it would end -no man could tell. Before Sigurd could -reply, Jarl Sigvald arose and called for -silence. -</p> - -<p> -"Men of Denmark and Jomsborg," he -said slowly, in his deep voice, the light -glinting on his dark, strong face and black -eyes, "I also would make a vow, and no -light one. As you all know, Jarl Hakon, -a heathen man and doubly a traitor, rules -Norway while the rightful king, Tryggvee's -son, is a wanderer or mayhap dead. This -then is my vow: that I go to Norway ere -three winters pass, take the rule from the -hands of Jarl Hakon, and drive him from -the land." -</p> - -<p> -Sigvald sat down, amid a dead hush of -amazement; but it was broken by a shout -from young Vagn Akison. -</p> - -<p> -"Skoal, Jarl Sigvald, skoal!" -</p> - -<p> -Then what a cheer went up! Ere it subsided, -Sigvald's brother, Thorkel the Tall, -leaped to his feet and swore to follow the -Jarl; Bui the Thick joined him, and amid -fresh cheers, Vagn, from the other end of -the hall, cried: -</p> - -<p> -"I, too! And ere I return I will slay -Thorkel Leira, the villain who betrayed my -father to his death!" -</p> - -<p> -"Skoal!" shouted Sigurd, excitedly, -"I'm with you, Vagn!" -</p> - -<p> -As the tumult subsided, the Queen looked -at Vagn and Sigurd sadly. "You are rash -boys, you two! Do you realize what blood -and tears these oaths will cost?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd answered her respectfully. -"Noble Gunhild, that may well be; yet Jarl -Hakon is an evil man and a pagan, as is -Thorkel. At any rate, I won't have to try -my new sword on the tree, now!" His -keen gray eyes twinkled. -</p> - -<p> -The Queen made no reply, however, and -sat watching King Svein; but Astrid -whispered: -</p> - -<p> -"I think that was splendid! I wish I -could go, too!" -</p> - -<p> -Vagn laughed. "You'd be a fine one! -Why, the first war-horn would send you -down below trembling!" -</p> - -<p> -"It wouldn't either!" retorted the girl -indignantly. "I can shoot better than you -or Sigurd, either of you!" -</p> - -<p> -"Good! I challenge you to a match -to-morrow," cried Sigurd. "We'll go over to -the shore beyond the harbor, where no one -will interrupt, and if you best either of us -I'll give you my trained falcon from -France!" -</p> - -<p> -"Then look out," laughed Astrid, "because -I'm going to win the bird to-morrow -morning!" -</p> - -<p> -With this she arose and followed the -Queen, who was leaving. The two boys, -not wishing to join in the carouse that most -of the vikings would keep up for the better -part of the night, also left the hall and -proceeded to their own tent. -</p> - -<p> -"What think you of these vows, -Sigurd?" asked Vagn, as they went along. -</p> - -<p> -"Well, now that we have cooled down, -it looks rather different," replied Sigurd, -thoughtfully. "It is one thing for King -Svein to conquer England, with the -resources of a realm at his command, and -another for Sigvald to conquer Norway with -only the brother of Jomsborg behind him." -</p> - -<p> -"But remember, Fairhair, we are Christians, -while Hakon is a pagan and a traitor; -that will make some difference, surely! -My own vow was no hasty thing; I must -avenge my father's death or else be -disgraced forever." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd nodded thoughtfully, for he well -knew that the fierce vikings would yield -small obedience to a man who appeared -unable to avenge the betrayal of his father. -As they turned in at their tent, a man -ran up, and Vagn recognized one of Bui's -men in the moonlight. -</p> - -<p> -"Hello, Egil, what is it?" -</p> - -<p> -"You and Sigurd are wanted at council -in Jarl Sigvald's big tent," panted the man. -</p> - -<p> -Without delay, the boys followed him to -the large tent of the Jarl. Here they found -all the Jomsborg leaders assembled, and -took their places beside Bui of Bornholm, -who was speaking as they entered. -</p> - -<p> -"It was a rash vow, Sigvald, but we -cannot back out, and it may well be that -we shall win great honor in the effort, win -or lose. Our vikings are the best warriors -in the world to-day, and we will at least -give a hard battle to Hakon and his son -Eirik." -</p> - -<p> -A murmur of assent ran around the -tent, and Sigvald arose. -</p> - -<p> -"Brothers, I was over-hasty in the vow, -but it cannot be helped. This is my -counsel; that since the attempt must be made, -we make it without delay, send for the rest -of our men, and strike at Norway's capital -without delay. What think you?" -</p> - -<p> -Vagn stepped forward. "I will answer -for my father's ships and men. Let us -strike before Hakon can meet us; we have -the pick of our men here, with most of -our ships. We can leave here at the end of -the week, wait at Limafiord for the rest of -our men, then sweep up to Thrandheim." -</p> - -<p> -"Good for you, Vagn!" cried his uncle. -"Men say that I am somewhat stout, but -my friends never complain of my weight in -battle!" Everyone laughed, for although -Bui deserved his nickname, he was one of -the greatest warriors of the day. "I'll let -Sigurd here go with you, if you want him," -he continued, and the boy's heart leaped -with joy, for this was indeed just what he -did want. -</p> - -<p> -Jarl Sigvald smiled. "Then is it agreed -that we go from here to Limafiord on the -fourth day?" -</p> - -<p> -"Yes!" The answer was accompanied -by a clash of weapons, as the chiefs struck -sword and spear on shield, and the council -was over, although most of the leaders -remained to talk over details and despatch -a messenger to Jomsborg at once. -</p> - -<p> -The boys returned to their tent, however, -and as they dropped off to sleep the shouts -of "Skoal! Skoal!" drifted faintly to them -from the town, and they knew that the -vikings and the Danes were still making -vows, some of which they would bitterly -repent in the morning. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap02"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER II. -<br /><br /> -THE SHOOTING-MATCH. -</h3> - -<p> -Early next morning the boys were -afoot, and after a hasty breakfast -beside a camp fire they took their bows -and quivers and started for town. -</p> - -<p> -Astrid lived with Queen Gunhild at the -Kings' Hall, and thither they directed their -steps. Early as it was, the place was -thronged with servants, who were laying -fresh rushes in the hall and putting the -place in order for the day. Seeing a house-carl -pass, with his clipped hair and golden -collar, Sigurd called him and sent him to -ask if the Lady Astrid was ready. -</p> - -<p> -Five minutes later Astrid herself -appeared, bearing bow and quiver, and joined -them with a cheery, "Good-morning, my -vikings! Has your rash resolution cooled -off yet?" -</p> - -<p> -"Small chance of that," replied Vagn, -his half-grave, half-humorous eyes lighting -up in a quick smile. -</p> - -<p> -"My falcon is ready to change owners," -added Sigurd, "but then there is no chance -for that to-day, of course." -</p> - -<p> -"Oh, indeed!" Astrid's dark eyes -flashed gayly. "That remains to be seen, -my lord of Jomsborg and Bornholm!" -</p> - -<p> -Talking and laughing, they started off, -leaving the town behind and cutting across -the fields to the harbor. There, as they -came to the brow of the hill, they paused. -Far below lay the great fleet, the sixty -Jomsborg ships and those of the assembled -Danish lords, their shield-rims glittering in -the morning sun, their dragon-prows and -high carved sterns gilded or painted in -bright array. -</p> - -<p> -Astrid caught her breath in admiration. -"Oh, how wonderful it is to be a viking! -I wish I were a boy!" -</p> - -<p> -The other two laughed. "It is not so -very wonderful," smiled Sigurd. "I think -it is hard work. Every morning the drilling -and practice in arms, the weapons to be -rubbed up—and the rowing! Whew, my -back hurts even to think of those low, -heavy oars!" -</p> - -<p> -"There's our ship, with the gilded -prow," pointed Vagn, to a large long-ship -apart from the rest. "Sigurd talks a lot -about work, but he is equal to any man in -the fleet with sword and shield, save his -father, or the Jarl—" -</p> - -<p> -"Or yourself," broke in his cousin quickly. -"However, let's get on; I'm anxious to -decide the fate of my falcon." -</p> - -<p> -They left the road, and after walking -two or three miles, came out on a lonely -stretch of shore, wild and rocky. Vagn had -brought an old wooden shield with him, and -he set this up as target on a large rock a -hundred feet distant. -</p> - -<p> -"Do you shoot first," ordered Astrid. -"I'll go next, then Vagn." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd nodded, and selected an arrow. -Stringing his bow, he laid the shaft and -pulled the string to his ear. Twang! The -arrow was buried deep in the shield, just -above the center boss of iron. -</p> - -<p> -"Good enough!" cried Vagn, running -forward, but Astrid only smiled and raised -her bow. The string twanged, and an -answering echo came back as the arrow -glanced off and the shield fell backward. -</p> - -<p> -"Hurrah!" cried Vagn, picking it up. -"Full on the iron boss! But you can't do -it again!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd ran forward to see also, and as -they examined the shield, a sudden cry -startled them. Turning, they saw Astrid -struggling with three men, while more -appeared coming from behind a corner of -the cliff. -</p> - -<p> -"Norsemen and spies!" exclaimed -Sigurd, and without an instant's hesitation -he picked up Astrid's arrow and ran -forward, fitting it to his bow. -</p> - -<p> -"Your sword!" called Vagn, tearing the -peace-bands from his own weapon as he -ran. A shout answered him, and the -Norseman ran forward to meet Sigurd. A -spear whizzed by his head, and he loosed -the bow. -</p> - -<p> -The foremast viking fell with a clash, -and as the others paused Sigurd tore the -peace-bands from his sword. Next -instant he was surrounded, struggling, -striking, and he realized that more and -more men had appeared from behind the -cliff. -</p> - -<p> -Now a blade gleamed beside him, and -Vagn's voice sounded in his ear. One man -was down—two; but others filled their -places, and a heavy axe was poised over -Sigurd. As it fell the boy darted in -beneath the blow, and his sword fell on the -viking's shoulder; but at that instant -something crashed on his light steel cap, and he -knew no more. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd awoke with a dull pain in his -head, to find his arms tightly bound and the -midday sun beating down on him. Raising -his head, Fairhair saw that he lay on -the forecastle of a small ship, with Vagn -beside him, wounded in the shoulder and -unconscious. -</p> - -<p> -He saw nothing of Astrid, and a burning -thirst consumed him; with a great effort he -rose to a sitting position and looked -around. They were out at sea, and the land -lay far behind them; in the stern and waist -of the ship were fifteen or twenty Norsemen. -</p> - -<p> -"That was a stiff crack I gave you, lad, -but the steel cap saved your skull," sounded -a voice, and Sigurd twisted around. Behind -him stood a dark man with an unpleasant -face and straw-colored hair; evidently -he was the leader, for he had just come out -of the cabin. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd tried to speak, but his tongue was -dry, and the man laughed. "Here, Thord," -he called, "bring a horn of water." -</p> - -<p> -One of the men in the waist took a horn -and filled it from the cask beside the mast, -handing it up to the leader, who put it to -the boy's lips. Sigurd drank greedily, and -then the other threw a few drops over -Vagn, who opened his eyes. -</p> - -<p> -He struggled to rise, with a sharp cry. -</p> - -<p> -"Thorkel Leira! I—" The effort was -too much for him, and he fell back again. -Their captor smiled sneeringly. -</p> - -<p> -"He is in a bad way to fulfill his vow, -eh?" This was the man whom Vagn had -sworn to kill, the betrayer of his father! -As he realized this, Sigurd's head cleared. -</p> - -<p> -"Why have you attacked us? Who are -you?" he asked indignantly. -</p> - -<p> -Thorkel laughed again. "Vagn, there, -seemed to know my face! You two and the -girl, whom I take to be Gunhild's niece, -will make a nice gift to Jarl Hakon! Great -boasts, great boasts!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd flushed. As he looked at the -viking, his heart gave a sudden leap, for, -framed in the cabin doorway behind, he -saw the face of Astrid, her finger on her -lips. Making no sign, he answered the -leader calmly. -</p> - -<p> -"In that case, leave us alone till we get -to Thrandheim." As he said this, Sigurd -lay down again, turning his back on -Thorkel. The latter sneered, and stepped to -the edge of the forecastle, above the ship's -waist. Sigurd opened his eyes, and saw -Astrid making signs, and holding in her -hand his sword. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd comprehended the plan instantly. -He silently drew his feet up and gathered -his muscles; Thorkel was giving orders, a -few paces away, and paid no heed to him. -The boy slowly rose to one knee; he saw -Astrid run toward him, and at the same -instant he threw himself headfirst at Thorkel, -striking him fairly in the waist. -</p> - -<p> -The viking fell forward with a cry, and -lay motionless on the deck beneath. Sigurd -would have followed him over the low rail, -but for a hand that gripped his bound arms -and stayed him; then he felt the bonds cut -and a sword pushed into his hand. -</p> - -<p> -"Hold the ladder," panted the girl, -"while I arouse Vagn." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd sprang to the top of the narrow -ladder that led up from the deck below just -as the surprised men seized their weapons. -An arrow tore through his hair; another -followed, but Sigurd parried it with his -blade, and another after it. This was an -old viking exercise, and the boy felt no -fear; but with a cry of dismay Astrid ran -to the cabin, quickly returning with a -shield. -</p> - -<p> -"Here, this will help you!" Sigurd -grasped it just in time to ward off a spear, -and now the first man was on the ladder. -He held a shield above his head, but -Sigurd swung his sword and brought it -down with all his might. The keen weapon -sheared through the tough bull's hide, and -the man fell back among his comrades. -</p> - -<p> -Thord, who had brought the water, now -made a dash, coming up the ladder three -steps at a time, and wielding an axe. As -he reached the top Sigurd drove his sword, -but too late; the axe descended on his -shield and bore him to his knees. Again -the weapon whirled above him, and Thord -staggered backward with a hoarse cry, -clearing the ladder in his fall. -</p> - -<p> -Springing up, Sigurd saw Astrid behind -him, bow in hand, and Vagn, pale but -determined, stepped to his side. Those -below drew back, and the boys saw them -reviving Thorkel, who was stunned by his -fall. Sigurd leaned on his sword. -</p> - -<p> -"Look here, Vagn, we can't keep this -up all day; one or two good showers of -arrows will finish us." -</p> - -<p> -Vagn pointed to the cabin. "We can -hold that against them all, and Astrid says -that food and water are inside." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd laughed. "You look like a Valkyrie, -Astrid! I owe you thanks for my -life, too—but what is Thorkel up to?" -</p> - -<p> -"Back—back to the cabin!" cried -Astrid. "They are climbing around the -bow to take us from behind!" -</p> - -<p> -A glance showed them half a dozen men -climbing through the bow under the dragon's -head up to the forecastle. It was useless -to try to hold the whole fore-deck, so -the two boys and Astrid ran to the cabin, -shut the heavy door, and bolted it securely. -There was no window, and only one or -two high loop-holes gave fresh air to those -within. -</p> - -<p> -"What chance have we of rescue?" -asked Astrid, sitting down on a pile of -furs. -</p> - -<p> -"Little enough," replied Vagn, moodily, -while Sigurd threw himself down beside -her. "No one knows where we went, and -we won't be missed till noon. It must be -about three hours past that now." -</p> - -<p> -The Norsemen, realizing the futility of -trying to break in, made no sign; and the -afternoon slowly wore away. The ship -was bearing north under full sail, and all -three captives realized that it was only a -matter of time before they would have to -give up. -</p> - -<p> -Evidently the Norsemen had been spying -on the Danes. Vagn had been struck -down by a glancing blow, and all three -had been taken to the ship, which left the -land at once. Astrid had been left -unbound, and had taken advantage of the -opportunity as soon as Sigurd became conscious. -</p> - -<p> -Toward evening a rap sounded on the -door, and the voice of Thorkel called to -them: -</p> - -<p> -"Vagn Akison! Can you hear me?" -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap03"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER III. -<br /><br /> -JARL HAKON OF NORWAY. -</h3> - -<p> -"Well enough," replied Vagn, -"what is it?" -</p> - -<p> -"I suppose you see that you -cannot hold out for ever; but it would be -needless trouble for my men to batter in -the door. To-morrow we will meet Jarl -Hakon, and if you give yourselves up in -peace I will not bind you." -</p> - -<p> -"What shall we do?" whispered Vagn. -"It is true that we cannot hold out here." -</p> - -<p> -"Do!" exclaimed Astrid. "Would you -trust your father's betrayer? Wait till we -meet Hakon, that will be time enough to -give up!" -</p> - -<p> -Vagn raised his voice. "We wish -nought to do with traitors, Thorkel. Let -Jarl Hakon speak with us; till then we will -bide." -</p> - -<p> -Thorkel made no answer, and they heard -him move away. The three captives ate -some of the food, drank a little stale water, -and with nightfall the boys took watch and -watch, leaving the single couch to Astrid. -</p> - -<p> -Toward morning, however, the latter -awoke and insisted on doing her share of -the watching; so Sigurd, dead tired, yielded -up his watch and dropped off to sleep. The -boys were now suffering from their -wounds, but they had refused to let Astrid -bind them up, as this was strictly against -the laws of the Jomsvikings. -</p> - -<p> -These fierce men were trained with the -greatest strictness, indeed, and death was -the penalty for the slightest infraction of -their laws. Wounds might not be bound -up, and no pain might be complained of; -for suffering was only part of the long -training that made the Jomsborg brotherhood -the most terrible fighters in the world. -</p> - -<p> -Both boys were wakened by a jar that -shook the ship, and they found the sun -well up. "What was that shock?" they -cried, in alarm. -</p> - -<p> -"Another ship," replied Astrid. "I can -see nothing, but I heard the sound of oars -and voices." -</p> - -<p> -Springing to the loopholes, they found -that they could see nothing; but the sound -of excited talking came to them, and in a -few moments steps advanced quickly to -the door. -</p> - -<p> -"Ho, Vagn Akison! Astrid of Vendland! Open!" -</p> - -<p> -Astrid seized Vagn's arm. "It is Jarl -Hakon! I know his voice well!" -</p> - -<p> -Without hesitation, Sigurd, sheathing -his sword, threw open the door. There in -the sunlight stood a man of lofty stature, -magnificently armed and with beard and -hair as sunny as that of Sigurd; but his -face was gloomy, and his eyes quick and -shifty. -</p> - -<p> -"Do you yield to me?" he asked quietly. -</p> - -<p> -Astrid laughed. "So you war against -girls, Jarl? Well, I suppose I must -surrender!" -</p> - -<p> -The Jarl smiled, and laid his hand on -her hair. "Keep the bow, child; you have -done nobly and well. Come to my own -ship." -</p> - -<p> -As they followed him down the ladder -and over the side, Sigurd saw that Hakon's -hair was streaked with gray, and that he -walked stiffly as from old wounds. Beside -Thorkel's ship lay another, a splendid -warship, and as they climbed over the -bulwarks the two ships were cast apart. -Hakon led the way to his cabin, and said, -kindly: -</p> - -<p> -"Sit you down and fear not. Thorkel -has told me the tale of the vows, especially -that of yours, Vagn Akison. By the -hammer of Thor, your comrades will have -tough work if they think to take Norway -from me!" He smiled grimly. -</p> - -<p> -"Jarl," exclaimed Astrid, "was it by -your orders that we have been attacked? -Remember that Svein is my uncle!" -</p> - -<p> -Hakon nodded. "I am sorry, indeed, -that you were taken; you will be returned -unharmed later, with whatever scat Svein -thinks just. But who are you, Fairhair?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd laughed. "That is truly what -men call me, Jarl; my name is Sigurd -Buisson." -</p> - -<p> -Hakon whistled in surprise. "So! Then -I have two good hostages! All the better; -I will take you up to Thrandheim with me, -but have no fear, for you will be well -treated—at least for the present." -</p> - -<p> -With this Hakon left the cabin, giving it -up to them, and the voyage began. The -boys were indeed treated well, their -weapons were left them, and had it not been -for the surrounding circumstances they -would have enjoyed themselves immensely. -</p> - -<p> -That night they made the southern end -of Norway, for the ship was pushed on -with all speed, both of sail and oars. Jarl -Hakon was racing for his kingdom now, -and no effort was spared to reach Thrandheim, -Norway's capital, as soon as might be. -</p> - -<p> -Next morning they landed at Howes, -and Hakon sent speedy messengers north -over the mountains to his son Jarl Eirik, -who was in Raumarike; and splitting up -war arrows, dispatched them to all the -chiefs near by as a token to gather men at -once. Then, with fresh rowers, the ship -hastened on as never ship had hastened -before, for the realm of Norway was at stake. -</p> - -<p> -The following evening they stopped -at Raumsdale to send out the war-arrow -and get new rowers; but they pushed on -quickly, and on the third day sped up the -Thrandheim Firth and reached the city just -after sunset. -</p> - -<p> -An immense crowd greeted them, for -the news had sped fast, and they landed amid -a great shouting and clash of arms. Jarl -Hakon kept the boys with him, and sent -Astrid to the King's Hall, where she -would be given waiting-women and cared -for as became her rank. Then, without -going thither himself, he turned aside, -followed by all the multitude, and -proceeded to the great temple of Thor, the -War-god. -</p> - -<p> -Jarl Hakon was a pagan, believing firmly -in the old gods of Norway, as indeed -most of his subjects did. The Thrandheim -temple was the greatest in the land, and -Jarl Hakon, as ruler of the country, was -the high-priest. -</p> - -<p> -As they passed beneath the great stone -doorway Sigurd Fairhair shivered, and -Vagn whispered to him, "Firm, Sigurd, -hold firm!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd pressed his hand in reply. As -they saw whither they were going, the -boys had resolved not to take part in the -worship of the heathen gods, for both were -Christians. The temple was high and -gloomy, and the torches lit it very poorly; -but around the sides they could see statues -of Odin the one-eyed, Freya the beautiful, -and the other gods. At the end, opposite -the doorway, stood a high altar before the -golden statue of Thor, and Hakon slowly -ascended the steps. -</p> - -<p> -As he did so, the vikings, bonders, and -townfolk fell on their knees, and beyond -the altar Sigurd noticed the priests bringing -in a white bull for sacrifice. Looking -around, he saw that he and Vagn were the -only ones standing; others saw it, too, and -an angry mutter ran through the vast -building, like the low gathering of a storm. -</p> - -<p> -The two boys paled, but stood firm and -erect, as Jarl Hakon uttered a short prayer -to the war god. When his voice ceased, -the mutter behind him swelled into a roar, -with fierce shouts of "Kneel!" "Kneel!" -"Death to the Christians!" -</p> - -<p> -Hakon turned and raised his hand, the -roar dying away at once. When he saw -the cause of the tumult his face darkened. -</p> - -<p> -"To your knees, to your knees! Would -you insult Thor in his own temple?" -</p> - -<p> -"We kneel to none save the white -Christ," spoke out Sigurd boldly, though -his heart beat fast. -</p> - -<p> -Hakon's hand flew to his sword, and the -crowd surged forward; then the Jarl's hand -dropped, and he motioned to one of his -men. -</p> - -<p> -"Harald, take these two to the King's -Hall and see that no harm comes to them, -on your life. Go!" -</p> - -<p> -Without a word the boys followed the -man as he led the way out, their heads -high and their hands on their swords. -The Norsemen made way for them with -muttered threats, but gaining the open air, -their guide led them through the dark -streets, and in a few minutes stopped at -the Hall. -</p> - -<p> -They were led to a room, and the door -was bolted. At the rasp of the bolt Vagn -broke silence. -</p> - -<p> -"Whew! That was a close shave for -us, old man! I was scared stiff when you -answered Hakon!" -</p> - -<p> -"So was I," admitted Sigurd, smiling. -"But we are too valuable as hostages, so -it didn't take much bravery. See here, -are we going to stay with Hakon?" -</p> - -<p> -"Not if we can help it," laughed Vagn. -"I suppose we'll be watched closely, -though, and then we must look out for -Astrid." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd nodded. "Well, we'll see her in -the morning. She is not in danger for -the present, anyway." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd was mistaken, however, for they -did not see Astrid for a week. They were -closely confined to their room, and only on -the sixth day following were they allowed -to leave it. Their warder was the same -who had led them from the temple the first -night. As he came in on the sixth morning, -he left the door open, and said: -</p> - -<p> -"You are free of the town, but do not -leave it. Jarl Hakon has gone, so you had -best be watchful, as I am responsible for -you." -</p> - -<p> -"Where has Hakon gone? Is the Lady -Astrid here?" asked Vagn. -</p> - -<p> -"I know nothing of any Lady Astrid, -but Jarl Hakon has gone south to More -to raise men, and will return to meet Jarl -Eirik, mayhap." -</p> - -<p> -The two boys did not wait to learn more, -but hastened out to the great hall, and -there they found a woman who directed -them to Astrid's room. Making their way -thither, Astrid came to the door with a -cry of joy. -</p> - -<p> -"Oh, I thought you were dead! I saw -Jarl Hakon once, but he was terribly busy -and would tell me nothing. Where have -you been?" -</p> - -<p> -Vagn outlined their adventure at the -temple, and told of their subsequent -imprisonment in a few words. -</p> - -<p> -"I never would have dared do that!" -exclaimed Astrid as he finished. "To -brave all those men that way! But come -over here to this window and speak low; -there are women in the next room." -</p> - -<p> -Making sure that the door was fast, -Sigurd and Vagn joined her at the window. -</p> - -<p> -"Last night I heard two men talking out -in the hall, and I listened. Jarl Eirik has -gathered a great force of men from Raumadale -and Halogaland and Thrandheim, and -is fitting out an immense fleet in the -greatest haste. Hakon is raising men in North -and South More. Two nights ago, just -before Hakon left, a messenger came from -Eirik. -</p> - -<p> -"Here is their plan. When Hakon has -raised all the men he can, he will come -north to meet Eirik, who is making his -way south. They expect to have at least -150 longships when they combine forces, -and intend to wait for your fleet in -Hiorunga Bay and take them in a trap." -</p> - -<p> -"A trap!" cried Sigurd. "With that -great force?" -</p> - -<p> -"Yes, because they are afraid of the -men of Jomsborg, even with the numbers -three to one. The peasants are to tell Jarl -Sigvald that Hakon is in Hiorunga Bay -with only one or two ships, and Sigvald -and Bui will hurry in to capture him, thus -falling among the whole fleet. Do you see?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd's eyes flashed. "So Hakon is a -traitor still! This is terrible, Vagn; in a -trap like that no one will escape!" -</p> - -<p> -"I am afraid not, Fairhair," Vagn -shook his head sadly. "Sigvald will fall -into it, for he is impetuous and hasty, as is -your father also. I see only one thing to do." -</p> - -<p> -"What is that?" cried the others, as he -paused. -</p> - -<p> -"That is for you, Sigurd, and me to -steal a boat here in the harbor and sail -out south. We have a bare chance of -reaching Sigvald in time. Has Eirik -reached Thrandheim yet?" He turned to Astrid. -</p> - -<p> -"Not yet, but he is expected at any time." -</p> - -<p> -"Then we may make it!" broke in -Sigurd, excitedly. -</p> - -<p> -Here Astrid drew herself up, and said, -in a determined voice, "Wait a minute! If -you go I go, too; you needn't think you can -leave me behind!" -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap04"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER IV. -<br /><br /> -THE RESCUE IN THE BAY. -</h3> - -<p> -"That you sha'n't," replied Vagn. -"We may be blown out to sea -or captured by Eirik or Hakon; -there is no telling. You are safe here." -</p> - -<p> -Astrid's eyes flashed, and she cried, -angrily, "I say I will go! If we are -taken, I will be just as safe; and you two -can handle a small boat in any sea." -</p> - -<p> -"But, Astrid," objected Sigurd, in dismay, -"at best it will take us three days, -and—" -</p> - -<p> -"So much the more need of another -person. Now say no more." She set her -mouth determinedly, and Vagn's opposition -vanished in a peal of laughter. -</p> - -<p> -"Come on," he cried gayly; "I would -rather fight a dozen Norsemen than try to -oppose you! We'll go down to the harbor -now and see about a boat." -</p> - -<p> -"You seem to think it is no more than a -matter of picking out a boat and raising the -sail," laughed Sigurd, as they left the hall. -</p> - -<p> -"No," returned Vagn, "but there's no -use thinking about obstacles before they -appear." -</p> - -<p> -The streets were thronged with men -from the countryside roundabout, and the -armorers seemed to be doing a thriving -business. No one paid any attention to the -three, and they soon made their way to the -waterside. -</p> - -<p> -As they walked slowly along, looking at -the ships in the harbor, Sigurd suddenly -stopped. -</p> - -<p> -"Hurrah! I believe that I have a better -plan still!" he cried. "Do you see that -ship over there with the yellow eyes -painted in her prow?" -</p> - -<p> -"What of her?" asked Vagn. -</p> - -<p> -"Don't you remember? She was in -Jomsborg a month since, and her captain is -an old friend of Jarl Sigvald's. Why can't -we get him to take us down below -Hiorunga Bay to meet the fleet?" -</p> - -<p> -"The very thing!" Astrid clapped her -hands in delight. "I confess that it seemed -well-nigh hopeless to make our way in a -small boat without being captured or -blown far out to sea. But suppose he -won't take us?" -</p> - -<p> -"He will," returned Vagn, "I remember -his name—Ulf Ringsson, and he will be -glad to help Sigvald. How shall we see -him?" -</p> - -<p> -"Do you take Astrid back to the hall, -and I will row out in a small boat," replied -Sigurd. "If any are watching us, we will -throw them off that way." -</p> - -<p> -So Astrid and Vagn turned back, and -Sigurd sauntered about for a time, as if -watching the shipping. Presently he -wandered down to a boatman. -</p> - -<p> -"Lend me your boat for an hour or two, -my friend," he said, handing the man a -coin. -</p> - -<p> -"Willingly," responded the man, pushing -out his craft and putting the oars into -it. "Business is not so good these days; -I fear that I may have to go with Jarl -Eirik if I want to make money!" -</p> - -<p> -"Better not," laughed Sigurd, "you -might meet Jomsborg steel, and that would -be bad luck." -</p> - -<p> -The man chuckled as he shoved Sigurd -off. "No danger, my lord! If I'm not -here when you return, just pull the boat -up and leave her." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd nodded, and pulled slowly from -the shore. He did not head straight out -to the ship, but visited other craft first, -asking questions of their crews and appearing -simply curious. After a little he -reached the side of Ulf's ship, and slipping -under the side opposite the shore, clambered -over the rail. -</p> - -<p> -As he set foot on the deck, a tall man -rose and faced him. "Who are you and -what do you want?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd smiled and took off his fur cap. -"I want Ulf Ringsson, and I am Sigurd -Buisson of Bornholm." -</p> - -<p> -Ulf grasped his hand with a cry of -surprise, and led him to the cabin. -</p> - -<p> -"The crew is ashore, but it is best to -take no chances. Now what are you doing -here? I heard you had been taken by -Hakon." -</p> - -<p> -The boy swiftly outlined his adventures, -told of the trap that was to be laid for -the Jomsborg fleet, and asked Ulf to help -them. -</p> - -<p> -"Of course, Sigurd, of course! I can -stow you two and the Lady Astrid away -comfortably, but if we are overhauled—well, -my men are no fighters, you know!" -</p> - -<p> -"We'll take our chance of that," replied -Sigurd, thanking him warmly for his aid. -"Now, when can you sail? Every minute -counts." -</p> - -<p> -"I know, but I can't possibly start sooner -than the morning of the third day from -now. Say midnight of the second night -after this. My cargo is not all in, and it -would look too suspicious altogether. But -the 'Otter' is a fast ship, and we will get -down the coast much faster than will Eirik -with his warships." -</p> - -<p> -"You can expect us then," said Sigurd. -"Will you meet us on shore?" -</p> - -<p> -"It will be better so," replied Ulf. "I -will get the 'Otter' farther out before -nightfall, and will wait for you opposite -here with a small boat." -</p> - -<p> -With a parting handshake Sigurd slipped -over the side again, and rowed slowly -through the shipping on his way back. As -he passed a large ship, he saw that the -sailors were making a clumsy effort to -raise the sail. Indeed, from their looks he -took them for newly raised levies from the -country on their way to join Hakon, as -the ship was a war vessel. He rested a -moment, watching them with a smile; then -it died away as he saw an officer, whose -back was turned toward him, standing -directly beneath the heavy spar that the -men were hoisting. -</p> - -<p> -"He'd better look out," thought Sigurd, -"if those fellows lost their grip on the -rope—ah, I thought so!" -</p> - -<p> -For, even as the thought flashed through -his mind, the rope had slipped loose from -the men, and the yard fell, striking the -officer a glancing blow and knocking him -overboard. -</p> - -<p> -With a shout Sigurd drove his oars into -the water and reached the place where the -man had gone down before the confused -men on the ship could put out a boat. He -could see nothing of the man, so, quickly -throwing off his fur cap and cloak and -unbuckling his sword-belt, Sigurd took a long -breath and dived from the boat's side. -</p> - -<p> -For an instant the ice-cold water paralyzed -him; then, opening his eyes, the boy -struck down. There, just beneath him, was -the senseless face of—Thorkel Leira! -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd checked his stroke. Why not -leave this traitor and villain to his fate, so -richly deserved? Why risk his own life -for that of a worthless fellow such as -Thorkel? But he only hesitated an instant; -hastily gripping the man's hair, he made -for the surface. -</p> - -<p> -Although Sigurd was a good swimmer, -he reached the air with a great sigh of -relief, for he had been under water nearly a -minute, and the water was too cold for -comfort. Thorkel had been struck -senseless and made no resistance. -</p> - -<p> -As he emerged, a shout sounded in his -ear, and there beside him was a small -boat. His own skiff was not far, and after -the men at his side hauled up Thorkel, he -struck out for his own boat. Sigurd -realized only too well that he did not want -to be questioned, for any mishap now would -ruin their plans of escape; so, paying no -heed to the shouts of the Norsemen, he -clambered over the stern of his craft, -donned his fur coat hastily, and made for -the shore. -</p> - -<p> -He pulled up the boat and made off at -once. His dripping clothes had already -frozen, and the cloak hid most of them, -so that he regained the hall without -question. As he entered his room, Vagn -greeted him with a cry of amazement when -he threw off the cloak. -</p> - -<p> -"What on earth—" he began, but Sigurd -interrupted with a laugh. -</p> - -<p> -"Water, rather, Vagn. Help me get -these wet things off first." -</p> - -<p> -Jarl Hakon had sent them a goodly -supply of garments, and when Sigurd had -changed to dry clothes he recounted the -adventure to his cousin. -</p> - -<p> -"Good for you, old man!" cried Vagn, -as he finished. "I don't think that I would -have resisted the temptation to let him -drown and get rid of the wretch. Did any -recognize you?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd shook his head. "I got away -too quickly, and Thorkel was senseless. -The yard struck him on the shoulder, so I -suppose he wasn't very badly hurt. Don't -say anything to Astrid about it." -</p> - -<p> -"Why not?" asked Vagn, in surprise. -</p> - -<p> -"Well," Sigurd hesitated, "she would -make a fuss about it, and—well, I really -wish you wouldn't, old fellow!" -</p> - -<p> -Seeing that Sigurd really wished it so, -Vagn agreed, and they went to Astrid's -room to tell her of their plans with Ulf. -</p> - -<p> -Astrid greeted them with a laugh. "You -changed pretty quickly, Sigurd," she said. -</p> - -<p> -"Why, what do you mean?" Both -boys stared at her. -</p> - -<p> -"Oh, one of my maids just ran in and -told me how some yellow-haired stranger -rescued our old friend Thorkel down in -the harbor, and ran off before they could -find out who he was. So I knew that it -must be Fairhair, here!" -</p> - -<p> -"So it was, Astrid!" cried out Vagn. -"If I'd been there I would have let the -scoundrel drown!" -</p> - -<p> -"No you wouldn't, Vagn," protested -Sigurd. "You might kill him in fair -fight, but you wouldn't let him drown -without trying to save him!" -</p> - -<p> -"Never mind," declared Astrid, looking -at Sigurd, "it was a noble thing to do, -Fairhair, and I am proud of you for it." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd blushed rosily, and hastily -turned the conversation by describing his -meeting with Ulf. -</p> - -<p> -"By the way," added Vagn, "I found -out something. At night our doors are -locked and a man sleeps outside in the -hall, before them. Hakon must think we -are worth keeping!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd thought it over. "The only way -I can see is to entice our guard inside and -tie him up, then go to Astrid's room and -seize her guard before he can cry out. -Any way, Astrid, be ready on the second -night from this, about midnight, and we -will get you somehow." -</p> - -<p> -"We had best not be seen together in -the meantime," cautioned the girl, "or -someone may become suspicious." -</p> - -<p> -Vagn nodded. "That's right. Well, we -won't see you till we come for you, then!" -</p> - -<p> -"All right," laughed Astrid, as they left. -"Good-by, till then!" -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap05"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER V. -<br /><br /> -THE ESCAPE FROM THRANDHEIM. -</h3> - -<p> -That night the two boys watched, and -discovered that their guard was -changed at midnight, so they decided -to make the attempt as soon as the guards -were changed, as this would give them -more time to get away safely. -</p> - -<p> -The two succeeding days passed slowly, -and the boys spent them in wandering -about the town. They excited no attention, -as in the harbor were one or two Danish -ships, a vessel from England, and another -from Iceland, both of the latter being -trading ships wintering in Norway. Sigurd -could not repress a shudder as once they -passed the gloomy temple of Thor. -</p> - -<p> -"When will these people ever become -Christian?" he said to his cousin, as they -gazed at the massive stone portal. "Should -we really conquer Norway, let our first -deed be to tear down this blood-stained old -place, and erect in its stead a temple to -Christ!" -</p> - -<p> -"Aye," corrected Vagn. "'If!' A vow -is an easy thing, Fairhair, to make, but -a hard one to fulfill. Norway has many -chiefs as noble as Jarl Hakon, and no -country can be conquered against its will -while there is one to lead the people against -the invader. King Svein, or his son -Canute, may well take England, for Ethelred -is a cruel and hated king; but I misdoubt -that we shall ever come to Thrandheim -as conquerors." -</p> - -<p> -On the second evening, when Harald -came to lock them in their room, he -grumbled, "If it were not for you two, I -would be with the Jarls now. It will soon -be all up with your Jomsborgers now!" -</p> - -<p> -"Why, what do you mean?" cried Vagn. -"Eirik hasn't come here yet!" -</p> - -<p> -"Nor will he," rejoined Harald, as he -shot the bolt. "He passed outside the -Firth to-day with sixty ships, and will join -his father by to-morrow night at More." -</p> - -<p> -"How many ships will both Jarls have?" -called out Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -The man paused in the hallway. "Close -onto two hundred, for Hakon took seventy-four -south with him, and he will collect -as many more in the south." -</p> - -<p> -As the man's steps died away the two -boys stared at each other in dismal silence. -</p> - -<p> -"Too late, Sigurd!" Vagn's voice broke. -</p> - -<p> -"Not yet," contended Sigurd, stoutly. -"Ulf said that the 'Otter' was fast enough -to pass Eirik, and besides, our own fleet -may not have come so far north yet. -Never give up!" -</p> - -<p> -"That's true," granted Vagn, "for the -men will probably want to land and -plunder. Well, there may be hope yet." -</p> - -<p> -They stood watch and watch until midnight; -then, after the relieved guard had -retired, Vagn nudged Sigurd and the -latter emitted a long, dismal groan. -</p> - -<p> -At the second groan the man outside -stirred; at the third he undid the bolts, -and said, "Here, what's wrong? Are you -sick?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd groaned again, muttering something, -and the man entered. As he did so, -Vagn threw his cloak over his head while -Sigurd sprang at him. For an instant he -struggled furiously, but the cloak stifled -him, and soon he was lying bound on the -floor, while the boys darted off down the -hall. -</p> - -<p> -Silently they made their way down to the -women's quarters, meeting no one. The -man before Astrid's door was half asleep, -and they secured him with only a slight -struggle. As they did so, the door opened -and the girl came out, a dark cloak over -her kirtle. -</p> - -<p> -"Good!" she whispered, as she saw the -man lying bound. "I'm all ready." -</p> - -<p> -They gained the street without mishap, -and ran at top speed down the hill to the -harbor, without meeting a person. Arriving -at the waterside, they found the -"Otter's" boat awaiting them, with Ulf -himself on the shore, wrapped in a cloak. -</p> - -<p> -As they rowed out to the ship, Vagn -told Ulf how they had escaped, and as they -reached the "Otter," Ulf leaped on deck, -crying in a low tone, "All ready men! -Slip the cable and out oars." -</p> - -<p> -The oars, already muffled, were run out, -and the men soon made the "Otter" move -briskly through the water, the faint -starlight serving to guide them through the -shipping. A little later they gained the -open Firth, and the huge square sail was -hoisted. They were at last on their way -home! -</p> - -<p> -"Well, that is the last I will see of -Thrandheim for many a day." declared -Ulf, as they watched the shores flit by. -"It will not matter much, though. There -is little to be gained in trading from this -country, and next voyage I think I will go -to England or Flanders. Now, don't you -want to turn in? I have made the cabin -ready for the Lady Astrid, and I suppose -that you can turn in with the men, as -I will." -</p> - -<p> -By morning they were well down the -coast, and as the "Otter" was a notably fast -ship, Ulf had no fear of pursuit. All day -they sailed south, and at evening the ship's -prow was turned out to sea. -</p> - -<p> -"Eirik's fleet passed down yesterday -afternoon," explained Ulf, "and we do -not want to run into them. If the wind -holds fair we will be nearly opposite -Hiorunga Firth by morning, and will turn -in to the coast then." -</p> - -<p> -When the boys wakened in the morning -they saw that the "Otter" was indeed -heading east, but a thick fog lay over the -sea and the wind had dropped, the "Otter" -being propelled by her oars. -</p> - -<p> -"We are near the coast," declared Ulf, -"and as the sun must be just rising this -fog will blow away before long." -</p> - -<p> -Suddenly, as they forged slowly ahead, -the helmsman hailed Ulf, who sprang into -the forecastle. -</p> - -<p> -"Come hither, friends," he called to the -boys, and pointing ahead, "what is that -yonder?" -</p> - -<p> -There, ahead of them, it seemed as -though many lights were burning dimly -through the mist. For a few minutes they -gazed, puzzled; then Vagn gave a cry. -</p> - -<p> -"Turn her prow, quickly!" he shouted to -the helmsman. "Those are not fires at all! -That is a fleet yonder, and the fog where -they are must have cleared off, so that -the sun shines on the gilded dragon-prows! -That is what we see!" -</p> - -<p> -It was too late, however, for a few minutes -later the fog cleared off around them, -and not a mile away they saw the high -cliffs of Norway; while, farther off, -gleamed the white sails of a great fleet of -ships. -</p> - -<p> -"Which fleet is it?" cried Sigurd, his -heart leaping. -</p> - -<p> -"I know not," responded Ulf. "We -must run in and take our chance. If the -worst comes to the worst, we can outrun -them, for the wind is coming up strongly. -Now for breakfast." -</p> - -<p> -They ate a hurried meal, while the -"Otter" plowed on swiftly through the -waves. At the end of an hour Vagn, who -was watching from the forecastle, cried out -in joy. "It is our own fleet! I see a sail -with a red cross!" -</p> - -<p> -"That is Hiorunga Firth, there to the -north," declared Ulf, as Astrid joined them -in the prow. "See, the fleet is heading -in toward it, and we may be in time yet, -for we will be up with them in half an hour." -</p> - -<p> -In less than that space of time, indeed, -they had come so near that they could -make out the individual ships, and as they -all knew Jarl Sigvald's ship by sight, Ulf -steered toward that division. -</p> - -<p class="capcenter"> -<a id="img-023"></a> -<img class="imgcenter" src="images/img-023.jpg" alt="As they all knew Jarl Sigvald'a ship by sight, Ulf steered toward that division." /> -<br /> -<i>As they all knew Jarl Sigvald'a ship by sight, <br /> -Ulf steered toward that division.</i> -</p> - -<p> -What a sight it was! Ship after ship, -with their gayly painted sails and glittering -prows, in the shape of birds and beasts, all -crowded with armed men, while, far ahead, -shone the sails of more. -</p> - -<p> -"That looks strange, Vagn," said Sigurd, -uneasily. "I do not see any of my father's -ships; it must be that he has pressed ahead, -and may fall into Sigvald's trap!" -</p> - -<p> -A few minutes later the nearest ship -hailed them, and as the Jomsvikings -recognized Vagn and Sigurd a mighty shout -went up, which rolled from ship to ship as -the news spread through the fleet, and amid -a roar of war-horns and clashing of arms, -the "Otter" drew up to the ship of Jarl -Sigvald, the oars being hastily drawn in, -and Vagn leaped aboard, followed closely -by Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -Sigvald was overjoyed at their escape, -but there was no time for telling the story -now. Vagn swiftly described the plot of -Jarl Hakon, and a yell of rage arose from -the men who had crowded around. It was -echoed from the other ships, who had -drawn in, as the helmsman shouted out the -tidings. -</p> - -<p> -"We have no time to lose, then," cried -Sigvald, "for Bui has gone ahead and has -landed men to plunder." He turned to the -"Otter." "Ulf," he shouted, "keep the -Lady Astrid on board, and wait for three -days at the midmost of the Herey Isles, a -mile or two south. If you hear no news of -us by then, fly with all speed to King -Svein." -</p> - -<p> -Ulf waved his hand, and with a last -good-by the boys parted from Astrid as the -ships were cast asunder. -</p> - -<p> -"I will put you on board your ship," -exclaimed Sigvald to Vagn, "as we go. -Up sail! Out oars!" He seized his great -war-horn and blew a mighty blast. The -men sprang to their places, and as they -passed through the fleet cheer after cheer -went up for the plucky boys who had -brought the news. Hastily sails arose -again and blades flashed out in the morning -sun, for Bui, who had landed ahead of -the fleet near Hod Island, must be warned -at once. -</p> - -<p> -They drew alongside Vagn's ship, and -the two boys sprang on board. Vagn's -men, who had followed his father and -grandfather in many a hard fray, went wild -at the sight of him, and greeted Sigurd no -less heartily. But Fairhair was worried -about his father, who he knew was over-rash, -and suddenly he heard the helmsman -give a great cry of dismay, and saw him -wave his arms. -</p> - -<p> -"What is it?" he cried, as he dashed up -the ladder, followed by Vagn. But there -was no need of words. There, cutting -swiftly around the end of Hod Island -toward Hiorunga Bay, was the division of -Bui, in mad haste. He had fallen into the -trap! -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap06"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER VI. -<br /><br /> -HIORUNGA BAY. -</h3> - -<p> -"Forward!" Jarl Sigvald's war-horn -rang out its command, and -the fleet pressed on to support -their rash chief. Sigurd gave a groan of -dismay, but Vagn encouraged him. -</p> - -<p> -"He won't be taken, Fairhair, but will -return when he sees the trap. Nevertheless, -we have fallen into it, for Sigvald cannot -back out now with honor; we must go -forward and fight like Jomsborg men!" -</p> - -<p> -Bui's ships disappeared around the -north end of Hod Island; then, as Sigvald -got his fleet into battle array, with each -half-dozen ships lashed side by side, they -came back into sight, with lowered sails -and oars lashing the waters to spray. -</p> - -<p> -The ship of Bui was the first to reach -the fleet, and as he stood in the forecastle -and shouted of his discovery, Sigvald -checked him, and ordered him to form his -battle-line behind the fleet. Bui rowed past -Vagn's ship, and as he did so Sigurd sprang -on the rail, with a shout. -</p> - -<p> -There was no time for stopping, so his -father only waved his hand in passing, and -called out, in joy and surprise, "Skoal, -Sigurd! Use your best weapons to-day!" -It was the last word Sigurd ever had with -his father, Bui of Bornholm. -</p> - -<p> -As the fleet moved forward slowly, one -by one the ships of Bui straggled back and -formed behind Sigvald's line. The Jomsborg -men might have fled still, but they -scorned to do that, and it was against their -laws. The day was clouding up now, and -as they turned the headland into the bay, -the wind suddenly changed and blew dead -against them—and there, moving on them, -lay the Norse fleet! -</p> - -<p> -Spreading out like a great crescent, -glittering with oars and steel, Hakon's fleet -moved forward, while Sigvald broke his -array into three parts. Vagn Akison, by -virtue of his father's place and his own -renown, commanded a third part of the -ships; beside his vessels lay those of Bui, -while Sigvald commanded the last twenty. -</p> - -<p> -"Look, Vagn!" cried Sigurd, as they -watched the Norsemen, still a half-mile -distant, "they are breaking up likewise!" -</p> - -<p> -"Yes," replied Vagn bitterly, "but there -must be nearly two hundred ships there, -crowded with men. That means sixty or -seventy against each of our divisions of -twenty!" -</p> - -<p> -Then, leaping into the waist, Vagn -distributed the byrnies, or shirts of woven -steel rings, and opened several chests of -swords and axes, so that the men could get -at them. He and Sigurd were fully armed, -and naught remained but to await the attack. -</p> - -<p> -It was not long in coming. Jarl Hakon's -banners were suddenly raised, with a great -burst of war-horns, and a flight of stones -and arrows fell among the Jomsborg ships. -Sigvald's banner was run up likewise, and -his men replied, but the Norsemen had the -advantage, for the wind was with them, and -fast rising to a gale. Nevertheless, the -Jomsvikings shot well, and occasioned great -confusion among their foes, for their long, -sharp shafts pierced shield, byrnie and body. -</p> - -<p> -As the two fleets drew together, most of -the bows were flung aside, and the -spear-racks were emptied. Sigurd and Vagn, -standing on the high forecastle with their -chosen men, plied their weapons fast; but -a minute later, with a crash that nearly -threw them to the deck, the fleets came -together. -</p> - -<p> -"Concentrate on the ship against us!" -shouted Sigurd, and a hail of spears poured -into the large ship whose prow ground into -that of Vagn's. The Norsemen strove to -board, but a terrible burst of weapons met -them, and an instant later Sigurd gave a -cry of joy. -</p> - -<p> -"Hurrah! We will win yet!" Vagn -echoed the cry, for their attacker was -slowly withdrawing. -</p> - -<p> -"Cast a grapnel on them!" ordered -Vagn, and as the Norse ship was secured -he leaped into her, followed by Sigurd and -his forecastle men. The Norsemen gave -way, but as the Jomsvikings pressed -forward a new burst of horns arose, and into -the press sailed a dozen fresh ships. -</p> - -<p> -"Back for your lives!" called Sigurd, as -he saw a crowd of the enemy pouring -aboard. "Back to our ship!" -</p> - -<p> -They could see nothing of the battle on -either hand, for they were surrounded by -the Norse ships; but as they gained the -deck of their own vessel they heard a wild -shout from Bui's ships, and again the Norse -line shrank backward. As Sigurd looked -around, he saw Jarl Hakon's ship just -behind their own. -</p> - -<p> -"Look there, Vagn! Order the men to -turn their spears on Hakon!" -</p> - -<p> -Vagn did so, and a storm of spears and -arrows poured upon the Jarl's ship. He -stood proudly in the forecastle, and for a -moment the rain of weapons almost hid -him; then he reappeared, smiling, but his -armor was ripped to pieces, and he shook -himself free of it. -</p> - -<p> -Now a fresh burst of foemen bore down -on Vagn's division, and only the higher -sides of the vikings' ships saved them. -Men were falling fast, but as yet the -vikings had not suffered nearly so much as -had the enemy. The fighting had not yet -become hand to hand, and in the thickly -crowded Norse ships not a Jomsborg spear -failed of its mark, and the trained skill of -the vikings told heavily against the -unskilled levies of Hakon. -</p> - -<p> -Suddenly Sigurd laughed, and staggered. -"What means the laugh, Fairhair?" called -Vagn, who was directing his men in the -waist. -</p> - -<p> -"An arrow, but in the arm only," replied -Sigurd. A shaft had pierced his arm, just -above the elbow, but he snapped off the -barb and drew it through the wound, and -continued fighting. The next moment, -however, another arrow flew past his head -and was buried in the rail behind him; a -third followed it, glancing from his helmet. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd realized that someone was aiming -at him steadily, and marking the direction -from which the arrows came, he saw the -face of Thorkel Leira in one of the ships -below. The man was just aiming a fourth -shaft, half covered by the shield of a -follower. -</p> - -<p> -Catching the arrow on his shield, Sigurd -flung a spear in reply, with all his force. -The weapon struck full on the shield that -covered Thorkel, pierced it, and Thorkel -staggered back. A fresh attack drew -Sigurd's attention, however, and when he -looked for Thorkel again, his ship had -withdrawn. Now there happened a strange -and terrible thing. -</p> - -<p> -The day had steadily grown darker, with -a rising wind. Suddenly a blaze of lightning -fell athwart the sky, and Jarl Hakon's -ship stood forth in the sight of all, wrapped -in lambent flame, the Jarl himself standing -triumphantly in the stern, grasping a -hammer like that of Thor. -</p> - -<p> -A cry of horror arose from the Jomsvikings, -who took the figure for that of the -war god; and the lightning was followed -by a thick hail, the stones as large as eggs, -which burst full in the faces of the -Jomsborg men. -</p> - -<p> -"Thor with us! The gods fight for us!" An -exultant shout pealed upward from the -Norse host, who pressed onward with -renewed vigor. All at once a cry broke from -Vagn, a cry of anger and dismay. -</p> - -<p> -"Sigurd! Look yonder!" -</p> - -<p> -There behind them Jarl Sigvald had cut -the lashings of his ships and was fleeing! -The Jomsborg men seemed wild with terror, -for now they thought that Hakon was -right, that Thor and Odin were in truth -fighting for him, and they lost heart. -</p> - -<p> -Sigvald's ship cut through the press close -behind that of Vagn, and as it passed the -boy called out: -</p> - -<p> -"Sigvald! Turn and fight! Turn and fight!" -</p> - -<p> -But Sigvald only urged his men to greater -efforts, and the sail was run up. At this -Vagn seized a spear from the deck, and -with a curse hurled it at the fleeing Jarl. -The spear missed him, but struck down the -helmsman at his side, and the ship was gone -from sight in a moment. -</p> - -<p> -Louder and louder pealed the war-horns -of Hakon, as ship after ship followed -Sigvald in his flight. Vagn's men gave one -angry yell, then fought on in silence. -Presently their attackers drew back for -breathing-space, and as they did so the boys saw -Bui's ships close at hand. -</p> - -<p> -Bui was without hope, but he was true -to his vows, and fought on stoutly. The -Norse ships gave way before his onset, and -with a shout of triumph Bui's men cut their -lashings to pursue. It was a fatal error; -for even as they did so fresh Norse ships -drove down on them, broke their solid front, -surrounded them and began to pour in -boarders. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd, watching helplessly, saw the -Norsemen sweep aboard and slowly clear -the deck; Bui retreated to the forecastle -with a few of his men, but he was -surrounded now, and his foes closed in. The -old warrior fought on steadily; Sigurd -caught a glimpse of his father in single -combat with a gigantic Norseman, -wielding an axe. Bui slipped, and the axe -whirled above him and fell on his helmet, -wounding him terribly; but recovering, Bui -cut down his foe, then leaped to the rail. -</p> - -<p> -"Overboard, all Bui's men!" rang out his -voice, loudly. Just then the fight closed in -on Vagn afresh, but Sigurd caught a flash -of armor, and knew that his father had -died as a viking should, beneath the waves. -</p> - -<p> -The Jomsborg ships broke up now, each -fighting desperately to the last. One by -one they were boarded and swept clean of -men, and at length it came the turn of -Vagn's ship. -</p> - -<p> -Then, as the Norsemen swept over the -side, the vikings put sword and axe in play -for the first time, the boys at their head. -Time after time the flood poured across the -bulwarks, and time after time the Jomsborg -steel stemmed the tide and drove it back. -At last a wild yell arose behind them, and -those of the crew who were left retreated -slowly to the forecastle, fighting desperately. -</p> - -<p> -A very handsome man, of lofty stature, -swept over the prow with his men, and cut -his way to Vagn. The two met with a -clash of swords, and the tall man, evidently -a leader of note, fell beneath Vagn's blows; -he was up again, however, and his men -swiftly closed around Vagn. Sigurd gave -a shout of rage, and sprang to his friend's -side, but too late. -</p> - -<p> -The sea of fierce faces swept down on -him, but recoiled before the Jomsborg axes. -Vagn lay motionless, and Sigurd, bestriding -his body, faced the handsome leader, -axe in hand. The other's sword flashed, -and for a moment Sigurd was hard put to -it to ward off the storm of blows; then his -axe fell on the other's helm, and the man -staggered back. Before he could follow up -his advantage, Sigurd slipped in a pool of -blood—he saw a sword whirled above him, -gave his battle-cry once more—and sank -across the body of Vagn. -</p> - -<p> -With the fall of Vagn and Sigurd, the -battle was over. Thirty-five ships had fled -with Sigvald, twenty-five had remained -with Bui and Vagn. One by one they were -boarded and cleared, for Jarl Hakon gave -no quarter; one by one they floated out of -the whirl, empty but for dying and dead. -The vikings died beneath sword and spear, -or followed Bui's example and plunged -beneath the waves, while far in the distance -the white sails of Sigvald glittered awhile -and then vanished to the south. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap07"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER VII. -<br /><br /> -HOW VAGN KEPT HIS VOW. -</h3> - -<p> -"That is all, I think; twenty of -them. No, this one stirred -somewhat. Here, lift him up." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd opened his eyes. Over him were -bending two men, one his handsome opponent, -the other—Thorkel Leira. The boy -struggled to his feet, the former assisting. -</p> - -<p> -It was only mid-afternoon, the storm -had passed, and about the Jomsborg ships -lay the Norse fleet. Glancing around, -Sigurd saw the decks heaped with dead, -and in the waist of the ship was a little -group of Jomsvikings, their arms bound. -Then he remembered Vagn. -</p> - -<p> -Thorkel Leira was holding a horn of -water to Vagn's lips, and as Sigurd, weak -and dizzy, knelt at his friend's side, he -wondered why Thorkel thus aided his -deadly enemy. He was soon to know. -</p> - -<p> -Vagn looked up. As he caught sight of -Thorkel he dashed the horn aside and -struggled up on Sigurd's arm. Before he -could speak, however, a group of men -approached and bound the boys' arms, under -the orders of the handsome chief. Then -they were led into the waist of the ship -and joined the others. -</p> - -<p> -The men gave a murmur of joy. "It -was a noble fight, eh, Vagn?" muttered an -old viking, Biorn of Bretland, or Wales. -"I have fought for twenty years under your -father Aki and your grandfather Palnatoki, -and I never saw a greater battle than this." -</p> - -<p> -"It is a sad one for the brotherhood, -Biorn," replied Vagn weakly, "when the -Jarl himself turned tail and fled." -</p> - -<p> -A murmur of anger ran around the -group, then Sigurd asked, "Who is the tall -man, and what will they do with us?" -</p> - -<p> -Biorn nodded toward some small boats -near by. "They are taking us on shore, I -know not why. Neither do I know the man." -</p> - -<p> -A group of Norsemen approached, and -the captives were led to the boats, which -were swiftly rowed to the shore. Here, -upon a long fallen tree, sat the Jomsborg -men, with their feet bound in a long rope; -but their hands were left free. -</p> - -<p> -The Norsemen surrounded them, binding -up wounds, exchanging rough jests on -the battle, and examining with awe and -wonder these vikings whose name was so -famous, and who had fought so stoutly -against such great odds. -</p> - -<p> -Presently the tall man and Thorkel -Leira landed. "I have it, Sigurd!" cried -Vagn. "That handsome man must be Jarl -Eirik, Hakon's son!" -</p> - -<p> -At that instant the handsome man came -up to the captives. -</p> - -<p> -"You fought well and stoutly, Jomsvikings," -he said, "and I am in truth sorry -that Jarl Hakon has ordered that no quarter -be given, for I would fain spare your -lives if I might." -</p> - -<p> -"It is the fortune of war," replied Vagn, -smiling bravely. "Had we conquered, I -do not think that Sigvald would have -spared Hakon either, yet Christian men -have more merciful customs than you who -follow Thor and Odin." -</p> - -<p> -The other flushed slightly, turning to -Thorkel. "It is not to my taste, Thorkel, -to slay these helpless men thus." -</p> - -<p> -Thorkel smiled his cunning, cruel smile. -"It is much to my taste, Jarl, to slay Vagn -Akison!" -</p> - -<p> -At this Vagn cried out, "Yet you feared -to stand before me in battle, Thorkel! Say, -will you loose my bonds and meet me now -with sword or axe?" -</p> - -<p> -A murmur of assent arose from the -Norsemen who stood around, but Thorkel -shook his head, as he fingered the big axe -in his hand. -</p> - -<p> -As Thorkel withdrew to speak with the -handsome man for a moment, old Biorn -leaned over and whispered excitedly to -Sigurd: "It is just a chance, Fairhair, so -try it." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd nodded as Thorkel returned. -"Best begin with the chiefs, Thorkel," he -cried, although his heart beat madly, for -if Biorn's plan did not work nothing could -save his life. Thorkel advanced and stood -in front of him. -</p> - -<p> -"Since you are in haste to die, let it be -so." -</p> - -<p> -"Wait!" exclaimed Sigurd, as the man -swung his axe aloft. "Let someone hold my -hair, lest it be defiled and soiled." -</p> - -<p> -A Norseman, with a word of admiration -at the lad's bravery, stepped forward and -gathered up the boy's long, fair hair in his -hands, and the axe swung. -</p> - -<p> -As it descended, Sigurd jerked his body -so strongly to one side that the axe was -buried in the earth, and Thorkel lost his -balance and fell forward. A laugh went -up from the crowd as the angry man rose, -but the handsome chief advanced and held -his arm. -</p> - -<p> -"Who are you, handsome lad?" -</p> - -<p> -"I am called Sigurd, and am Bui's son," -replied Sigurd, looking up to the other's -eyes, which met his in admiration. "The -Jomsborg men are not yet all dead!" -</p> - -<p> -"Truly you are a son of Bui!" exclaimed -the other. "Will you take life and peace -from me?" -</p> - -<p> -"If you have the power to give it," -answered Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -The man drew himself up. "He offers -who has power to give—Jarl Eirik Hakonson." -</p> - -<p> -"Thanks, Jarl," replied Sigurd, with a -breath of relief, "I will accept it." The -whisper of old Biorn had proved true. -</p> - -<p> -Thorkel, with a dark frown, plucked up -his axe, and cried angrily, "Though you -spare all these men, Eirik, Vagn shall not -escape me!" -</p> - -<p> -With that he raised the axe. As the -weapon whirled, Biorn flung himself -against Thorkel's knees. The man stumbled, -the axe fell; and Vagn, springing up -in a flash, seized it and fulfilled his vow. -</p> - -<p> -A great shout of applause rang out, for -above all things Norsemen love a brave -deed. They crowded around admiringly, -and Jarl Eirik with a smile, said, "Will -you also take life, Vagn?" -</p> - -<p> -"That I will," answered Vagn, "if you -will also give it to my men as well." -</p> - -<p> -"Loose them from the rope," commanded -the Jarl, and it was done. -</p> - -<p> -By this time evening was coming on, and -the Norsemen hastily made a camp on the -shore; Jarl Hakon was encamped across -the bay. The men sat around the fires and -talked in low tones, and presently the two -boys were summoned to the fire of the Jarl. -</p> - -<p> -Eirik greeted them with a winning smile. -"Sit down and eat, friends, for I have -somewhat to think over. My father gave -express commands that no Jomsviking was -to be spared; why I gave you life I know -not, save that you were but boys, and full of -courage. Now, whither would you go?" -</p> - -<p> -Vagn looked at Sigurd. The latter -nodded, and Vagn told Eirik the story of -Ulf and Astrid, who were waiting a few -miles away. When he finished the Jarl -sat in thought for a moment. -</p> - -<p> -"Here is my counsel. If I send you both -off together, my father will send a ship -after you to slay you, and I will not have -my promise broken. I go home from here -by land to the mountains, and so to my own -earldom. I would advise that you, Vagn, -come with me, for I can protect you, and -let Sigurd rejoin Ulf with the eighteen -Jomsvikings who are left. I will send you -home, Vagn, within a month at most." -</p> - -<p> -"That is a good plan," exclaimed Vagn. -"Do you not think so, Fairhair?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd assented, though he disliked to -part with his cousin; but there was no help -for it, and so it was decided. -</p> - -<p> -Early the next morning the Jomsborg -men and Sigurd ran out three small boats -and said farewell to Vagn. Eirik armed -them all well, and made them many presents; -and as they pushed off Vagn stood on -the shore, waving farewell. -</p> - -<p> -"I'll see you at Jomsborg next month," -called Sigurd. "Farewell!" -</p> - -<p> -Under a fair wind the three boats ran -quickly down the bay, rounded the end of -Hod Island, and arrived in an hour at the -Herey Islands. Steering in between the -largest and smallest, they reached into the -bay, and there before them lay the "Otter." -</p> - -<p> -A shout of greeting came to them, and -as they pulled up to the side Ulf Ringsson -sprang on the rail. -</p> - -<p> -"What news of the battle? Who won?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd pointed to his men, all of them -wounded. "These are all left of the -Jomsvikings," he replied. A cry of horror went -up, and Ulf staggered back. -</p> - -<p> -"Impossible! Where is your father Bui, -Jarl Sigvald, Vagn Akison, Aslak -Holmskalle? They cannot be dead!" -</p> - -<p> -"Some are even worse off," said Sigurd, -climbing the rail wearily. "Vagn is safe, -my father is dead with Aslak, and Sigvald -and his men have fled home again." -</p> - -<p> -While Astrid greeted Sigurd, and his -wounded and weary men clambered on -board, Ulf remained stunned with amazement. -"Fled! Fled!" he muttered. "The -Jarl himself false to his vows!" -</p> - -<p> -He could not believe it; for it was the -most sacred law of Jomsborg that no viking -should turn his back to a foe. Sigurd told -of the fight, while the excited sailors -questioned his men, and as he finished Astrid -sprang forward. -</p> - -<p> -"You are wounded, Sigurd! See, your -arm is all red, and your head is bloody!" -</p> - -<p> -"Yes, bind it up," laughed Sigurd bitterly, -"for the Jomsborg rules are shattered -with the brotherhood forever!" Then he -reeled, and would have fallen save for the -strong hand of Ulf. -</p> - -<p> -They carried him to the cabin, and while -the men set sail, Ulf, who was skilled as a -leech, extracted the broken arrow-head and -bound up the wound. The other, on his -head, was not dangerous, and Sigurd soon -fell into a deep sleep, not waking till the -afternoon. -</p> - -<p> -The rocking of the ship told him that -they were out at sea, so he hastened on -deck; to his surprise, the land was out of -sight, and a heavy gale was blowing. -</p> - -<p> -"So you are awake!" cried Astrid. "How -do you feel?" -</p> - -<p> -"Ready for another battle," laughed -Sigurd, then his brow clouded over as he -thought of his father. Astrid, divining his -thoughts, was silent for a moment, then -changed the subject. -</p> - -<p> -"We had no sooner left the land than -this gale broke on us, and Ulf says that it -is growing stronger every minute." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd looked around. Indeed, the gale -was a heavy northeaster, and now he -noticed that the sail was close-reefed, and -that everything was stowed away save the -three boats in which he had come to the -"Otter," which were lashed securely in -the shelter of the high stern. -</p> - -<p> -"Hello, I'm glad to see you around so -soon!" cried Ulf cheerily, and the boy -gripped his hand in thanks. -</p> - -<p> -"If Jarl Hakon were here, Ulf, he would -say that Ran, the ocean queen, was trying to -complete the work begun by Thor and Odin -at Hiorunga Bay." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd smiled at Astrid, but the captain -looked about anxiously. -</p> - -<p> -"We are in for a bad blow, Sigurd. It -is good that the 'Otter' is stanch, for to -tell you the truth, we are far from our -course for Denmark, and it may well be -that we shall be driven farther still." -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap08"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER VIII. -<br /><br /> -"SKOAL, TO KING OLAF!" -</h3> - -<p> -Much as they loved the keen wind -and dash of the spray, Sigurd and -Astrid were soon driven from their -post in the bow of the "Otter," for the seas -began rolling up tremendously, and they -were forced to seek the shelter of the cabin. -The men were all stowed away below, save -for the watch on duty, and as the "Otter" -was a stanch vessel, and Ulf a good -captain, Sigurd had no fear but that they -would outride the storm safely. -</p> - -<p> -"How strange it all seems!" remarked -Astrid that evening. "Only a few short -weeks ago we were all together at the -heir-ship feast of my uncle, and now the -Jomsborg power is shattered, Vagn is far off in -Norway, and here we are driving no one -knows where, over the sea! I wonder what -became of your falcon!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd laughed. "I wonder what! -Never mind, we will soon be back again -with good Queen Gunhild. Hello! how -goes it, Ulf?" -</p> - -<p class="capcenter"> -<a id="img-031"></a> -<img class="imgcenter" src="images/img-031.jpg" alt=""Never mind, we will soon be back again with good Queen Gunhild."" /> -<br /> -"<i>Never mind, we will soon be back <br /> -again with good Queen Gunhild.</i>" -</p> - -<p> -The captain entered, dripping with brine, -and shook his head. "Badly, Sigurd. It is -fully the worst storm I ever saw, and I -was a fool for ever putting to sea at this -time of year. However, we must trust in -God and do our best to weather it." -</p> - -<p> -So for five days the "Otter" scudded -before the gale, utterly helpless. There was -plenty of work for all, however, for the -giant seas swept the low hull repeatedly, -and everyone was kept busy bailing the -ship, from morning to night. It was lucky, -indeed, that the eighteen Jomsvikings had -come aboard with Sigurd, for as it was all -were so exhausted by the constant labor -that they worked mechanically, and at the -end of every watch they lashed themselves -to the bulwarks and dropped to sleep at -once. -</p> - -<p> -On the fifth evening Sigurd was sitting in -the cabin, talking to Astrid, when they were -startled by a loud crash, followed by shouts -and cries. Sigurd ran out on deck. -</p> - -<p> -"The mast!" shouted Ulf in his ear. -Sigurd turned and saw only a ragged stump. -Ulf motioned him inside, for the gale blew -all words away, and when the door was -closed cried in despair. -</p> - -<p> -"Sigurd, I have done my best! Had the -mast held we would have been safe, for the -storm is breaking, I think; but an hour since -I saw land in the west, and we cannot beat -off now." -</p> - -<p> -"Know you what land it was?" inquired -Astrid. Ulf shook his head despondently. -</p> - -<p> -"For aught I know, it may be Scotland, -or the Fareys, or the Orkneys, or even -that Vinland which the Icelanders say Eirik -the Red discovered. I am lost, and we -are in the hands of God." -</p> - -<p> -Presently Ulf went out again, and managed -to rig enough canvas to the stump of -the mast to keep the "Otter's" head before -the wind. In this fashion they drove ahead -all night, and with daybreak a long line of -cliffs was disclosed, straight ahead, and -only a few miles away. -</p> - -<p> -As they stood watching on the forecastle, -Astrid pulled at Sigurd's arm. "Why -can't we escape in those boats, when the -'Otter' drives ashore?" she shouted in his -ear, pointing to the three boats lashed in -the stern. This had not occurred to Sigurd -or Ulf, because the viking ships themselves -were so small that they rarely carried boats, -as they could be drawn up on shore easily -enough. -</p> - -<p> -"Hurrah! Good idea, Astrid!" Sigurd -hastened to Ulf's side, but the latter -shrugged his shoulders at the plan. -</p> - -<p> -"To what end? We will only be putting -off death for a few minutes; once we drive -on those cliffs and it will be over." -</p> - -<p> -Nevertheless, at Sigurd's urging the boats -were made ready, for although the storm -was breaking they were fast nearing the -shore. Into each boat were put arms and -food, well secured. -</p> - -<p> -"We must leave before she strikes," -shouted Ulf, "else the seas will sweep -boats and all away." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd nodded, and returned to Astrid. -The cliffs were not a mile away now, and -they could see the white spray flying high -from the dark rocks. Presently Ulf -motioned to them, and they descended into -the waist of the ship, joining the crowd -about the boats. Sigurd took command of -one, Ulf of another, and Biorn of Bretland -commanded the third; then all awaited the -word. The "Otter" was low in the water -now, and it would be no great task to launch -the boats over her side. -</p> - -<p> -Presently Ulf gave a sharp command. -"Out!" The six men assigned to each boat -lifted it, poised it an instant on the rail, then -as a giant crest foamed along the three -boats were borne out together. A man -leaped in each, and fended off from the -"Otter's" side with a spear, while the rest -hastily embarked. -</p> - -<p> -"Farewell, old Otter!" cried Ulf, the last -to leave; and as they swept from the vessel -they saw her suddenly lurch and reel wildly. -</p> - -<p> -"Just in time!" said Sigurd to Astrid, -who was in his boat. "She struck then, but -scraped over; next time—" -</p> - -<p> -While he was speaking, the ship heeled -far over on her side, amid a cloud of flying -foam; but they could not watch her further, -for now they were fighting for their own -lives. Sigurd was at the tiller, and he -followed Ulf closely, while the men rowed -steadily. The seas swept them in under the -cliffs, and Ulf suddenly raised his hand and -waved it. Straight at the high walls his -boat darted, and then Sigurd saw a little -stretch of beach before them as he swept in. -</p> - -<p> -With a last stroke the men drove the -boats up, then leaped out and drew them up. -Sigurd carried Astrid up the beach and -looked around. The cliffs did not seem so -steep now, and Sigurd realized that they -would be able to climb them, just as Ulf -joined him. The captain was in more -hopeful spirits now. -</p> - -<p> -"Your plan certainly saved us, lady," he -exclaimed to Astrid. "I had given up -hope—strange I did not think of those boats -myself. But we so seldom use small boats -that I never gave them a thought. Now, -Fairhair, what had we best do?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd looked out to sea, where the hull -of the "Otter" was fast breaking up under -the smashing blows of the waves. "Well, -I think we had better take the arms and -food from the boats, scale those cliffs, and -see where we are. We have over a score -of well-armed men, and the folk, whoever -they are, will hesitate before molesting us." -</p> - -<p> -Ulf turned and gave the necessary orders, -then, followed by Biorn and the rest, they -made for the cliffs. These, as Sigurd had -foreseen, offered no great difficulties to the -Norsemen, who were all used to climbing -about their native fiords, and in half an hour -they stood on the brow and looked about. -</p> - -<p> -Before them lay a heavily wooded country, -rolling with small hills and valleys, but -without a sign of habitation. The storm -was nearly over now, and while the seas still -rolled mountain-high below them, the sun -was just breaking through the clouds, and -in the distance they caught the sheen of a -river. The men hailed the sun with a cry -of delight, and Ulf pointed to the river. -</p> - -<p> -"Let us make for that, Sigurd, and there -we can have fresh water and a meal. After -that we can decide what to do." -</p> - -<p> -So, striking away from the sea, they -entered the forest. It was the end of autumn -now, and though the leaves had fallen from -many of the trees, the forest was composed -in great part of pines, fresh and green. -Even Biorn looked puzzled as he tried to -make out the country. -</p> - -<p> -"I do not think it is Scotland," he said, -"and certainly it is neither the Fareys nor -the Orkneys. It is not my own land of -Wales, for that was far from our course; -it might be Ireland, but I have never been -in that land." -</p> - -<p> -"Ireland!" cried Astrid. "Why, isn't -that where men say Olaf Tryggveson is king?" -</p> - -<p> -"So it is," rejoined Sigurd, "but it must -be a wide land, and we have small hope of -finding Northmen here." -</p> - -<p> -"Well," remarked Ulf, "we can but push -on boldly. If we are indeed in Ireland, we -are lucky, for men say that in that country -there is the finest civilization in Europe—" -</p> - -<p> -"There used to be, Ulf," growled old -Biorn, "just as there used to be in Wales, -my own land; but the heathen vikings have -well-nigh destroyed it all." -</p> - -<p> -Soon they come out on the banks of a wide -and sluggish river, and with cries of joy the -men rushed down to the bank and plunged -in, drinking greedily and washing the salt -brine from their bodies. Sigurd filled a -horn for Astrid, but as she returned it a -shout broke from Biorn: -</p> - -<p> -"Back! Back! Out swords, men!" -</p> - -<p> -At the same moment a flight of arrows -fell among the men, striking down two of -the sailors, and a wild yell reëchoed from -the trees. The Jomsvikings, protected by -their byrnies and helmets, hastily scrambled -up the bank and fell into line around the -leaders, the others forming behind them. -</p> - -<p> -Dark forms flitted among the trees, and -Sigurd called out, "Shield to shield, men! -Hold your spears ready for the word." -</p> - -<p> -The vikings' bows were useless, the -strings having been soaked, so they waited -helplessly. Arrows fell thickly, but Sigurd -covered Astrid with his shield, and they -did no further harm. Then, with a yell, a -crowd of men broke out of the forest; they -were clad in woolen tunics, a few wore -armor, while all held spears and axes. As -they charged, Sigurd gave the word. -</p> - -<p> -The attackers broke as the heavy -Jomsborg spears sent half a dozen to the -ground; but as they did so a war-horn rang -out behind them, and a voice cried in -Norse, "At them, men! For the Cross!" -</p> - -<p> -Through the forest glades swept a band -of steel-clad men, driving the others -before them in headlong flight. As pursuers -and pursued vanished amid the trees, their -leader approached the little band of -shipwrecked men. -</p> - -<p> -Although Sigurd was tall, he noted with -surprise that this man was a good head and -shoulders above him, and broad in proportion. -His features were frank and open, -his eyes blue and piercing, and his hair was -red-gold, waving over his golden armor. -He wore a blue cloak, a gold helm and -gold-linked byrnie, and on his shield was a great -cross in red. -</p> - -<p> -"Are you Christian men?" he asked, as -he drew near, fixing his eyes on Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -"That we are," cried the latter, joyfully. -"Where are we? Who are you who -rescued us so opportunely?" -</p> - -<p> -"You are on the coast of Ireland, and my -city of Dublin is only three miles distant. -These Irish would never have dared come -so near had they not thought me absent -from home on a cruise. I am Olaf, son of -King Tryggve of Norway." -</p> - -<p> -At this the Jomsvikings gazed in wonder -on the handsome chief; then with a blast -on his war-horn old Biorn led the shout: -</p> - -<p> -"Skoal to King Olaf! Skoal!" -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap09"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER IX. -<br /><br /> -HOW ASTRID FARED FORTH. -</h3> - -<p> -"Thanks, friends!" smiled Olaf, -and Sigurd thought that never in -all his life had he seen so handsome -and kingly a man. "Who are you, -young sir? And who are these men? -Truly, I have seldom beheld so fine a set of -warriors, wounded though they are!" -</p> - -<p> -"I am Sigurd Buisson of Bornholm, -King, and with me is Astrid of Vendland, -niece of Gunhild of Denmark. This is Ulf -Ringsson, captain of our ship, and as for -my men, they are the last of the Jomsvikings." -</p> - -<p> -"What!" Olaf's eyes opened in amazement, -and he threw down his weapons. -"Tell me your tale, quickly! I heard of -Svein's accession feast, but nothing of what -followed. Has Sigvald, then, won Norway?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd told of the battle at Hiorunga -Bay, and Olaf's face darkened. As he -concluded, the Norsemen of Olaf returned and -all took up the march for Dublin, Sigurd's -men mingling with the others. -</p> - -<p> -While they walked along Olaf told them -of how he had fled to Russia when his father -was murdered, how he had become a viking, -wandering the ocean, and how he had been -baptized. Then he had come to Ireland and -won the kingdom of Dublin, ruling it -together with his brother-in-law, Olaf -Kvaran. -</p> - -<p> -"We saw your ship from the castle," he -explained, "so I came out to aid any who -might escape. Now, what do you intend -doing?" -</p> - -<p> -"As to that," returned Sigurd, "I care -little; but the Lady Astrid here must be -returned home." -</p> - -<p> -"Then will you be my man?" inquired Olaf. -</p> - -<p> -"That will I!" Sigurd turned to his -men and called, "Listen, Jomsvikings! -What say you to taking service with King -Olaf?" -</p> - -<p> -"Aye!" the shout went up, with clashing -of arms, and Olaf smiled. "That pleases -me well, Sigurd, for a few Jomsborg men -are worth a hundred others. As to Astrid, -she must take her chance; it is too late in -the season for ships now, and I fear she -must remain with us till spring. However, -that can wait; there is the city." -</p> - -<p> -As they left a valley, Dublin lay before -them, and the Jomsborg men cried out in -surprise, for the town was very beautiful, -and defended with strong walls and towers -such as they had seldom seen. Soon they -were riding through the streets, and the -men were quartered in the palace, where -Olaf also assigned rooms to Ulf, Sigurd -and Astrid. -</p> - -<p> -Olaf sent fresh and new garments to -all, and soon they rejoined him in the great -hall for the midday meal. Here Olaf -introduced them to Queen Gyda, his -brother-in-law, and one or two of his chief men, -and soon they were all chatting away -merrily, forgetful of their past troubles. -</p> - -<p> -After the meal Sigurd led his Jomsborg -men into the hall, up to the high seat of -Olaf. Kneeling, Sigurd placed his hands -between those of the King, and swore to -obey him and to be his man. One by one -the rest followed his example, and when -the ceremony was over Olaf presented each -man with a shield, ornamented with a large -red cross; but to Sigurd he gave a -magnificent golden helmet, on top of which was -wrought a dragon in the same metal, its -wings outstretched and sweeping far back. -</p> - -<p> -"I won this helm in Russia," smiled the -King, "so see that the dragon bears his -face ever toward my foes!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd was overjoyed with the gift, -which was a helm worthy a king, and -thanked Olaf most sincerely. The next -day he was given a command in the -court-men, or bodyguard, and took up his new -duties. -</p> - -<p> -A week later the first snow fell, but as -Astrid had given up all hope of reaching -home before spring, she did not mind -greatly. Indeed, Olaf's court was a pleasant -one, and both Sigurd and Astrid enjoyed -themselves immensely. -</p> - -<p> -Queen Gyda became very fond of Astrid, -who was a favorite with all because of her -sunny disposition and gay heart. Sigurd's -wound soon healed, and by Yuletide both -had adjusted themselves to their new -surroundings. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd grew much attached to King -Olaf. Olaf was high-tempered, but just, -and in warlike exercises no one could equal -him. Often he would go down to the -harbor, bid his men row out a warship, and -then while the oars were out walk along -them. Not content with this, he would -sometimes juggle knives or balls, keeping -his balance perfectly. -</p> - -<p> -He took great interest in "Fairhair," for -Sigurd's nickname could not be left behind, -and himself added to the store of sword-tricks -the boy had learned in the school at -Jomsborg. -</p> - -<p> -Yuletide passed, and a few weeks later -a ship drove into the bay, to the astonishment -of everyone, for the ships of that day -did not often venture on voyages in -winter. The new arrivals were from Norway, -and were traders. -</p> - -<p> -It happened that Ulf had not heard of -the ship, and as he sat at meat that evening -he leaped to his feet suddenly. -</p> - -<p> -"What is that man who just passed the -door?" he exclaimed. The King darted a -swift, keen look at the captain, and replied: -</p> - -<p> -"That is Thorir Klakke, who arrived -to-day from Norway with his brother -Ketil, bearing news and goods for trading." -</p> - -<p> -"Then beware of him, Olaf," remarked -Ulf, "for I have often seen him in deep -converse with Jarl Hakon. He is here for -no good, I think." -</p> - -<p> -Shortly after this Thorir and his brother -entered. Both men were short, dark, and -well dressed; but their eyes roved about -constantly beneath their low brows. Ketil's -face in particular was powerful, yet sullen. -</p> - -<p> -Thorir started slightly at sight of Sigurd, -but Olaf greeted him kindly, and he sat -down silently, falling into low converse -with his brother. For several days nothing -occurred, save that Thorir had frequent -audiences with Olaf; but at every meal -Sigurd noted Ketil's gaze fixed on himself -or Astrid, although it dropped before that -of Sigurd. This puzzled him, for he could -not see why Ketil should be interested, and -it also angered him, for he saw plainly that -Astrid did not like it. -</p> - -<p> -A week or two after the arrival of the -Norsemen, Olaf and Sigurd were talking -together, while Astrid and the Queen were -busy with their sewing. Suddenly the King -exclaimed, abruptly: -</p> - -<p> -"Sigurd, how would you like to visit -Norway next summer?" -</p> - -<p> -The boy started, meeting the King's eye -eagerly. "Nothing better, my lord!" -</p> - -<p> -Olaf smiled. "Well, Thorir urges me to -take the realm of Norway from Hakon, as -is my right. He says that the bonders are -not satisfied with the Jarl's rule and that it -would be an easy task to overthrow him. -What think you?" -</p> - -<p> -"Well," responded Sigurd, "if Jarl -Hakon could overthrow the might of Jomsborg, -methinks it would go hard with others -who attempt his kingdom." -</p> - -<p> -Here Astrid, who had been listening -earnestly, broke in: "Perhaps, King Olaf, -Hakon might have sent this man to bring -you into his power!" -</p> - -<p> -Olaf stared at Astrid for a moment, then -his blue eyes lit up with a fierce light, and -his fist came down on the table. "As I am -a Christian man, that is it! Beware, -Thorir Klakke! If I go to Norway, it -will not be as your master expects!" -</p> - -<p> -"Hakon has sixteen Jarls under him," -remarked the Queen, "and some of them -may not be such great friends of his by -next fall. If each commands one of the -districts of the kingdom, you may find an -opening in that way, Olaf." -</p> - -<p> -The King nodded. "In any case, I will -take a strong force. And when I do rule -Norway, I swear by this sword that I will -root out paganism from the land, and bring -the country under the Cross of the white -Christ! The Hammer of Thor shall vanish -from the land!" -</p> - -<p> -For a moment the King's handsome face -was stern, and filled with a high resolve; -then it softened again, as he rose and bid -Sigurd good-night. -</p> - -<p> -A few days later the boy felt the bearing -of Ketil becoming intolerable, and he -resolved to warn the man to gaze at Astrid -less insolently. It was his watch upon the -walls that night, and as he was passing -through the narrow and dark streets, three -men sprang out on him, from a doorway. -Although taken by surprise, Sigurd put his -back to a wall, and drew his sword. -</p> - -<p> -His light shield cracked and split under -the furious blows, although the men could -only attack Sigurd singly, for a doorway -on either side of him afforded some -protection. Knowing that his men were not far, -Sigurd shouted the old Jomsborg call, and -at this the three assailants redoubled their -efforts. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd caught an axe blow on his shield, -which sheared it from his arm; but his -sword fell upon the other's shoulder, and -with a muttered curse the axe fell. Springing -out, Sigurd clove the helm of the -second man with one quick stroke, but he -received at the same time a tremendous blow -from the sword of the third man. The -boy staggered, and fell over the body of the -man he had killed; and a loud shout came -from the corner, with torches streaming in -the lane, which put the assassins to flight. -</p> - -<p> -The men gave a shout of anger as they -saw Sigurd lying in the street, but the men -had escaped, and Biorn raised Sigurd -tenderly. The latter, thanks to the gift of -Olaf, was unhurt, but a dent in the side -of the helmet bore witness to the blow's -power. -</p> - -<p> -Biorn turned over the body of the slain -man, and the men gave a cry. "He is one -of the crew of Thorir Klakke! To the King!" -</p> - -<p> -"Stop!" shouted Sigurd as the vikings -were rushing off. "Let this wait till -morning; they cannot escape, and the King -dislikes to be disturbed from his sleep." -</p> - -<p> -They yielded, although unwillingly, and -Sigurd took up his guard again. This was -to be an eventful night, however, for two -hours after midnight one of the harbor -guards ran up to him, and cried: -</p> - -<p> -"Sigurd, Thorir Klakke's ship is leaving, -and will not answer our signals; come -quickly!" -</p> - -<p> -Calling to Biorn, Sigurd ran down to the -harbor, and in the dim light could see the -trading vessel, which had not been drawn -up on shore, slowly making her way -toward the harbor entrance, for the port was -too wide to freeze far from shore. -</p> - -<p> -Without wasting time in hailing, Sigurd -sprang into a light skiff, moored at the edge -of the ice, set a dozen men at the oars, -and in five minutes was close to the ship. -</p> - -<p> -"Way enough, men," he said, then lifted -his voice: "What business have you -leaving Dublin thus? Come back and give an -accounting!" -</p> - -<p> -At this the oars flashed out the faster, -and a mocking voice responded: "What, -indeed, young cockerel? Go back to -Jomsborg and—" -</p> - -<p> -"Help, Sigurd! Help!" broke in a cry, -"they have—" -</p> - -<p> -Silence fell again, but something flashed -into the water beside Sigurd's boat, and as -Biorn picked it up, the boy exclaimed: -</p> - -<p> -"That was Astrid's voice! Alongside, men!" -</p> - -<p> -Only a mocking laugh answered, as the -square sail rose and the ship filled away. -"No use," said Biorn. "Better return; -see, I have picked this up." He held out -something to Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -Now Sigurd and Astrid both knew the -secret of Runic writing, which only the -priests and high chieftains among the -Northmen were familiar with; and looking -down at the object, Sigurd saw it was a bit -of wood, with something scratched on it. -The light was too dim to see further. -</p> - -<p> -"Back to the landing!" cried Sigurd, a -terrible fear in his heart. "Hasten!" -</p> - -<p> -As they drew ashore he leaped out, and -held the piece of wood up to the light of a -torch. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap10"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER X. -<br /><br /> -FAREWELL TO DUBLIN. -</h3> - -<p> -Biorn and the vikings crowded -around, as he deciphered the scratches, -for they were unable to read Runic, -which was more like shorthand than -anything else. A cry of dismay burst from -Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -"Listen, men! 'Ketil bears me to -England! Rescue, Sigurd!' Come, men, to -the palace!" -</p> - -<p> -"To the palace! To the palace!" They -echoed his words, and the terrible Jomsborg -battle-yell startled the sleeping town, and -pealed up to the castle. -</p> - -<p> -"Bring Thorir Klakke, but harm him -not," commanded Sigurd, "while I arouse -the king." -</p> - -<p> -Olaf, however, was already up, wakened -by the tumult. Sword in hand, he entered -the great hall just as Sigurd burst in at the -other end. -</p> - -<p> -"What means this uproar?" roared Olaf, -his eyes blazing with anger. -</p> - -<p> -"Justice and vengeance, King!" panted -Sigurd, as he handed Olaf the bit of wood. -Sheathing his weapon with a frown, Olaf -took the object, and by the light of the -torches read the message. -</p> - -<p> -"What means it?" -</p> - -<p> -"Astrid of Vendland is kidnaped, Olaf, -and I was set upon by three men in the -streets. One I killed, and he was a man of -Thorir Klakke's—stay, here is Thorir -now." -</p> - -<p> -Biorn and two vikings entered the hall -behind Sigurd, leading the terrified Thorir. -Olaf, grasping the whole situation, strode -up and thundered in the merchant's ear: -</p> - -<p> -"What means this night's work? Where -is your brother?" -</p> - -<p> -Thorir stammered out, "Indeed, my lord, -I know not. Is he not in his rooms?" Then, -growing bolder, "Am I accountable -for Ketil's doings, Olaf? What mean you?" -</p> - -<p> -Olaf looked into the man's eyes a moment, -and before that terrible gaze Thorir -squirmed helplessly, but did not weaken. -"Begone to your rooms!" said the King, -contemptuously, and turned abruptly to -Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -"Now tell me the tale in full." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd told him of the attack, of the -flight of the ship, and of Astrid's cry, in a -few words. "I sent men to her rooms," he -concluded. "Here they come now." -</p> - -<p> -Close on his words the men entered, -with them Queen Gyda and some of her -ladies. Queen Gyda, who had learned the -cause of the tumult from the vikings, told -how a messenger had summoned Astrid -an hour before, saying that Sigurd was -hurt in a brawl, and how the girl had run -out hastily. -</p> - -<p> -"Come with me, quickly," ordered the -King, and Sigurd followed him to the -ramparts of the castle. The dawn was just -breaking, and far out at sea they saw a -speck of white. -</p> - -<p> -"With Thorir I will deal later, for we -have no proof against him as yet," said the -King, "but that man yonder has dishonored -me, and shall die. Fairhair, take what men -you will from my courtmen, and the -'Crane,' the fastest longship in the -harbor. Ketil has taken his brother's ship, -so you should soon come up with him. The -'Crane' is in the water, and is well -provisioned; so hasten—be off within the -hour." -</p> - -<p> -"Thanks, Olaf!" replied Sigurd. "I -was about to ask this very thing of you. I -will take my own men and thirty of yours. -Thanks, for all your kindness, and above -all for your friendship, Olaf!" -</p> - -<p> -The King smiled sadly. "I have few -friends, Sigurd, and methinks you are the -most faithful of them, though the newest. -No, go with God, and forget him not, for -it is still the season of storms." -</p> - -<p> -As Sigurd turned away, the King -stopped him with a sudden impulse. -</p> - -<p> -"Stay! Give me your hands." Wondering, -Sigurd put his hands between -Olaf's. "Now swear again your oath to -me, Jarl Sigurd!" -</p> - -<p> -The boy, overcome by this unexpected -title and honor, stumbled through the oath, -and rose with tears in his eyes. -</p> - -<p> -"I need no oath to be faithful, King -Olaf! When you have won Norway, the -title of friend is all I want." -</p> - -<p> -Quick tears sprang to Olaf's eyes also, -and unbuckling his sword-belt, he threw it -over Sigurd's shoulders, saying, "I have -no earldoms yet, but here is my Jarl-gift, -my friend. Farewell!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd wrung the King's hand, then -turned and ran down the stairway to the -courtyard. Hastily assembling his men, -and choosing thirty from Olaf's followers, -he sent them down to the "Crane" with -Biorn, and followed them himself a few -minutes later, after bidding Ulf farewell. -The captain would have accompanied him, -but Olaf was sending him on a mission to -an Irish king in the interior. -</p> - -<p> -The "Crane," as Olaf had said, was well -stocked with all things needful for a -voyage; so, weighing anchor, the sail was run -up and the voyage begun. As they left the -harbor, Sigurd told his men of his -advancement, and it was greeted with a shout of -satisfaction; for the Jomsvikings were -proud of their young leader, and the other -men had heard many tales of his bravery. -Indeed, even though the title carried no -lands, it was the ambition of every chief -of good birth to be made Jarl, or Earl, for -the Jarls were second only to the King. -</p> - -<p> -The oars were run out, for the wind was -light, and under all speed the "Crane" ran -southward. Ketil's ship was out of sight, -but his goal was known, and Sigurd was -confident that he would overtake the other -ship before night. -</p> - -<p> -"Why, think you, is he heading for -England instead of for Norway?" Sigurd -asked old Biorn. -</p> - -<p> -The latter paused a moment. "Well, -Jarl Sigurd, it is in my mind that Ketil is -a cunning man. If he took Astrid to -Norway, he would make nothing; but by -taking her to England, much. King Ethelred -would pay high for such a hostage from -King Svein of Denmark." -</p> - -<p> -"Oh, I see! Then she will not be -harmed?" -</p> - -<p> -"Assuredly not, Jarl, at least till she -reaches England, which I trust will never -be. Ethelred is as treacherous as Hakon -himself, and if she once falls into his -clutches it would be a bad business." -</p> - -<p> -They did not come up with Ketil's ship -so soon as Sigurd expected, for not till -mid-afternoon did the helmsman give a shout, -and Sigurd, running to the forecastle, saw -a white speck far ahead. -</p> - -<p> -"Lower the sail," he ordered, "and get -out all the oars," for until then only half -the oars had been going, to save the men's -strength. "We cannot come up with them -to-day," he explained, "so it were best to -let Ketil think himself safe." -</p> - -<p> -So the sail was lowered and the "Crane" -proceeded under her oars till nightfall, -when the sail was hoisted again and the -oars taken in. The wind freshened toward -midnight, when Sigurd relinquished the -watch to Biorn, and at dawn he was -aroused by the old viking. -</p> - -<p> -"Come, Jarl! A squall from the west -has broken on us, and it is daybreak." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd followed him to the deck. There -he found the sail close-reefed, and the -"Crane" running before a squall of wind -and driving snow. There was nothing to -be done, however, save to await the sunrise. -</p> - -<p> -As full day broke, but dark and gloomy, -with flurries of snow, a shout went up, for -not half a mile distant lay Ketil's ship, also -running before the wind. -</p> - -<p> -"Shake out the reefs, men! We may as -well take chances, and make sure of her." -</p> - -<p> -Biorn stopped him, however, and pointing -ahead, showed Sigurd a dull gray line. -"England, Jarl, or Wales, rather! It -would be useless to try to board Ketil in -this heavy sea; the ships would be smashed -to kindling-wood." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd reluctantly acknowledged that the -old viking was right, so he contented -himself with following the other ship, while -with every hour the Welsh coast grew -plainer ahead of them. The sky cleared -off, but the sea was still running too high -for any attempt at boarding. -</p> - -<p> -"I know where we are, Jarl," called out -the helmsman. "Do you remember that -great headland, Biorn?" -</p> - -<p> -"That I do," exclaimed the viking. -"See how the coast falls away there, -Sigurd? That is Wales, where live my -own people, and we are entering a great -firth which goes far up into the country, -and on the right is the Saxon kingdom of -Wessex. I recall it well. Six years ago -we sailed up and plundered a town they -call Bristol. It must be that Ketil means -to land along the Saxon coast." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd gazed with interest on the lofty -cliffs, but soon they turned the last -headland, and Ketil pointed his ship due east. -Sigurd saw that they were indeed in a -great firth; the "Crane" easily held her -own with the fleeing ship, but did not -approach closer. -</p> - -<p> -"If they succeed in getting ashore, -whither would they take the Lady Astrid, -think you?" inquired Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -"To King Ethelred, doubtless," -answered Biorn, "at London, in the east. -However, they cannot escape us now." -</p> - -<p> -"Arm yourselves, men!" ordered Sigurd, -a little later, "the sea is falling fast, and -we will run aboard." -</p> - -<p> -Ketil, however, saw this also, and evidently -resolved to take no chances, for he -turned in toward the coast, plying his oars -desperately. The two ships, a quarter of -a mile apart, drew into the coast and ran -along the low shores. -</p> - -<p> -Suddenly Biorn gave a cry of fury. -"He will escape us yet!" Ketil's ship, -just beyond a headland, was turned in -toward the shore. The helmsman turned -the "Crane" and the sail was run down -as the other ship disappeared. Under all her -oars, the "Crane" darted ahead, and there -before them lay the ship of Ketil, while the -crew were leaping out. A band of armed -men from the town above ran down and -met Ketil. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd did not wait to see the meeting, -but as the "Crane" scraped on the sand -and ice he leaped overboard, followed by -Biorn, and waded ashore. Amid Ketil's -party Sigurd had seen the flutter of a dress, -and he knew there was little use searching -the other ship, so he dashed up the hill. -Suddenly, however, a flight of arrows fell -among Sigurd's men, and the shout rose of -"Death to the sea-wolves!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd, with Biorn and another man, -was far ahead of the rest, running at top -speed. As the sudden attack was made, a -number of Saxons sprang out from ambush -and surrounded the three. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap11"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XI. -<br /><br /> -AT ETHELRED'S COURT. -</h3> - -<p> -Sigurd flung his hand up and -sheathed his sword. The Saxons -paused, and one of their number -stepped forward. -</p> - -<p> -"You will get little plunder here, vikings, -and many hard knocks," he called, "so you -had best put to sea again." -</p> - -<p> -"We are no vikings or sea-wolves," -answered Sigurd. "I am Jarl Sigurd -Buisson, one of King Olaf's men from Dublin, -and am in pursuit of these men who fled up -to the town. Two days since they abducted -a noble lady from Olaf's own castle, whom -I seek to rescue." -</p> - -<p> -The Saxon leader gave an exclamation -of astonishment, and at this moment -Sigurd's men ran up and joined him. The -Saxon bows were raised, but the leader -checked them. -</p> - -<p> -"You look over-young to be a Jarl," he -declared, "but if your story is true we have -indeed done ill. The leader of those men -said he was pursued by sea-robbers, and -that he was on his way to King Ethelred; -so, although he was a Northman, we gave -him safe conduct. What proof have you -of your tale?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd, who was in despair at this -unexpected check, knew that it was necessary -to win the Saxon over. "Does my ship -look like a viking dragon?" he said calmly. -"Were we vikings, we would not be abroad -this time of year. See, I wear the Cross, -and my men are from Olaf's courtmen, as -you may see from their shields and weapons. -We are Christians all, and no followers -of Thor." -</p> - -<p> -At this the Saxon stepped up and shook -his hand heartily. "Your pardon, Jarl, but -I am warden of the coast, and must do my -utmost to defend it from sea-rovers. I am -Jarl Edmund, and now I recall that in the -other party was a woman, or rather girl." -</p> - -<p> -"She is a noble lady of Denmark," said -Sigurd, not thinking it wise to tell Astrid's -real position. "Now, cannot we follow -these men to the town?" -</p> - -<p> -Jarl Edmund turned. "Of course, but -they told us they were on the King's -business, and I sent a man with them to get -them horses at once. I am indeed sorry -for this, Jarl." -</p> - -<p> -"You but did your duty," replied Sigurd, -"and there is no help for it." He looked -at Biorn: "What is your counsel, old -friend?" -</p> - -<p> -"Ketil will push forward to London," -replied Biorn, "so I think you had best -follow him with the Jomsborg men, and try to -catch him. I will take the others and the -'Crane,' and proceed by sea to London." -</p> - -<p> -"Good!" Sigurd turned to Edmund -again. "I suppose we can procure horses -in the town yonder?" -</p> - -<p> -"Yes," replied the Saxon, eager to repair -his mistake, "I will myself go with you." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd picked out his old Jomsborg men, -and saying farewell to Biorn, made all -haste to reach the town. As they entered, -Edmund dispatched several men, one of -whom returned with the news that Ketil's -party had left ten minutes before. At this -Edmund made a gesture of dismay. -</p> - -<p> -"I fear you will not come up with them, -Jarl Sigurd, for they took the best horses -to be found. However, we will see what -we can do." -</p> - -<p> -In half an hour Sigurd and his men were -riding east, Edmund having furnished -them with a guide. They pushed on for -many days, but found that Ketil kept well -ahead, commandeering the best horses as -he went, on the plea of the King's business. -At Malmesbury and Wantage, Sigurd and -his men were surprised at the size of the -cities and the splendid civilization they -found there, which was far ahead of any -that the north could boast of. Wessex and -Sussex had not been ravaged by the Danes -for many years, and the country amazed -them by its beauty and fertility. -</p> - -<p> -"If these Saxons had kings like ours," -remarked Sigurd to his men, "King Svein -would have a hard time indeed before he -could take the throne of England." -</p> - -<p> -At Reading they found that Ketil was -only half a day ahead of them so they -pushed on to London with all speed, -reaching it in the evening. Next morning -Sigurd took his way to the palace. -</p> - -<p> -Here he gave his name and title to the -chamberlain, and was shown into the -great hall, around which ran a buzz of -astonishment as he appeared. Sigurd had -filled out amazingly in the last few months, -and was large for his age; he wore his -golden helm, a blue cloth kirtle and waist, -and the great sword that Olaf had given -him, its hilt wound with gold and the -scabbard thick with carved ivory. As he -walked up the hall, he removed his helm -and let his long golden hair stream over -his shoulders. -</p> - -<p> -The chamberlain led him to the high-seat, -and Sigurd knelt a moment before -King Ethelred, then rose. The king was a -pale, crafty-looking man, and as Sigurd -looked around his heart sank for an instant, -for among the courtiers he beheld the -mocking face of Ketil. -</p> - -<p> -After the chamberlain announced his -name and title, the King arose. "Greeting, -Jarl Sigurd! The men of King Olaf -are ever welcome at our court, and we look -forward to another visit from himself. -Well I remember Olaf, who spent a year or -two with us, and I would fain see him -again. You look young to hold a Jarlship -under so great a man!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd answered fittingly, then said, -"My lord King, I ask your aid. Among -your men I see a certain Norseman, Ketil -Gormson, who not long since abducted a -lady from the castle of King Olaf. I have -followed him closely, and since he is here, -the Lady Astrid is not far away." -</p> - -<p> -King Ethelred looked surprised. "Why, -what is this? The man Ketil is a peaceful -trader, and arrived here only yesterday. -He has told me nothing of any lady!" -</p> - -<p> -"Nevertheless," replied Sigurd firmly, -"she is with him, and King Olaf sent me -to rescue her. I must crave your help, -King Ethelred." -</p> - -<p> -The king ordered Ketil to stand forth, -which he did, a sly smile upon his face. -Ethelred asked him what he knew of -Sigurd's tale. -</p> - -<p> -"Nothing, my lord; I have no woman -with me, and have but just arrived by slow -stages from the west coast where I was -trading." -</p> - -<p> -Ethelred looked at Sigurd, and then the -latter knew that he was being made a mock -of. No doubt the king had Astrid hid away, -intending to hold her for a hostage. -</p> - -<p> -"You see, Jarl Sigurd," said the king -softly, "you must have been mistaken in -this man, who is a kind-hearted fellow -indeed. Anything that I can do to aid you -will be done at once. Bring your men to -the palace, and you shall be given quarters -here." -</p> - -<p> -At these words, and Ketil's mocking -smile, Sigurd lost his temper. Taking a -step forward, he cried angrily: "There is -no mistake, King Ethelred, and well you -know it! Think not that you will escape -the heavy hand of Olaf by smooth words, -when he hears of this. As for you, Ketil," -Sigurd turned on the man, who shrank -back at his blazing eyes, "take heed to -yourself! If I meet you outside the palace -I will slay you like the dog you are!" -</p> - -<p class="capcenter"> -<a id="img-045"></a> -<img class="imgcenter" src="images/img-045.jpg" alt=""As for you, Ketil, take heed to yourself!"" /> -<br /> -"<i>As for you, Ketil, take heed to yourself!</i>" -</p> - -<p> -"You forget yourself, Jarl Sigurd," -spoke out the king, sternly. "I have -promised you assistance in this matter, so -bring your men to the palace at once, and -we will have search made for the lady." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd rejoined his men with dismay in -his heart. He knew only too well that the -King's command meant that he would be -watched closely, and he saw no way of -rescuing Astrid. When he told the men -the result of his visit to court, they were -as angry as he; but there was no help for -it, and in the afternoon they took up their -quarters in the palace. -</p> - -<p> -Ketil took good care to keep out of -Sigurd's way. The Jomsvikings wandered -freely about the city, staring wonderingly -in the shops, and Sigurd bade them keep a -sharp lookout for Astrid. The days passed -away, and Ethelred tried to soothe his -visitors by a pretended search of the city, and -by soft words, but at last Sigurd determined -to take matters into his own hands. It -was now the middle of February, and -Sigurd was impatient to return to King Olaf. -</p> - -<p> -Calling his men together after the evening -meal, he said, "Men, if we are to find -Lady Astrid we must do it ourselves. I -believe she is held here in the palace, in the -woman's wing; do you therefore hang -about that side, pretending to look in the -shops. I myself will do the same, and -mayhap the Lady Astrid will either see us, or -we will light on some clue." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd was treated with great honor, but -when he went abroad he knew that he was -spied upon closely. The next day he -visited the shops near the women's -quarters of the palace, and as he sauntered -along one of his men strolled up. -</p> - -<p> -"Come with me, Jarl," he whispered. -Sigurd accompanied him, talking and -laughing, and the man said, "Look at the -third window from the end." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd did so, and his heart gave a leap -of joy. There, hanging from a corner of -the window, was a scrap of blue and gold -cloth that he knew had been taken from -Astrid's scarf. As he looked up, a face -appeared, but at a quick sign of warning -from him, it vanished. -</p> - -<p> -"Hurrah!" he cried, when he had -regained his room, "we have found her, -sure enough! And now to rescue her." -</p> - -<p> -That same evening he heard a wild -shout go up from his men, in the next -room, and a moment later Biorn strode -into his room. Sigurd greeted him with -unbounded joy, then seeing Biorn's face -half covered with bandages, cried: -</p> - -<p> -"What is this? Wounded, Biorn?" -</p> - -<p> -The old viking smiled. "We met a -Danish ship four days ago, Jarl, and she -stopped to talk with us." -</p> - -<p> -"Up to your old tricks, sea-wolf!" -laughed Sigurd. "What did you talk -about?" -</p> - -<p> -"The price of swords, mainly," answered -Skarde. "The Danes finally decided -that ours were better, so we gave them -Ketil's old trading ship and brought in the -Dane with us; she is brand new, and as fast -as the 'Crane.' It was hard work, though, -for I had only thirty men, and they were -double that. We lost ten killed, and half -of us are wounded; but that is no matter. -Now for your story." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd quickly outlined the position of -himself and Astrid. When he concluded, -Biorn was silent for some time. -</p> - -<p> -"It is no light matter, Sigurd, to brave -Ethelred; but I think we had best carry off -the Lady Astrid. Once aboard the -'Crane,' we would be safe. But how to -do the business?" -</p> - -<p> -"By craft only, Biorn. Astrid saw me -to-day, and knows we are here. How to -get a message to her?" -</p> - -<p> -"That is easy enough. Do you write it, -and I will shoot an arrow into her window -to-night." -</p> - -<p> -"Good! I never thought of that." Sigurd -procured a bit of parchment, and in -a few minutes the message was ready. "I -told her that to-morrow night we would -wait beneath her window. She must contrive -to let herself down, and if necessary -we will fight our way down to the 'Crane.' Is -she below the bridge or above it?" -</p> - -<p> -"Below. I will go down to-morrow and -bid the men be ready to receive us. We -must get some fresh water on board, too." -</p> - -<p> -An hour later Biorn returned. "The -arrow flew straight, Jarl. I waited a few -minutes and saw a light cross her shutter -thrice." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd nodded. "Then she understands. -Get the 'Crane' ready to-morrow, and -return by nightfall. Better have a boat or -two at the water-stairs, just at the end of -this street." -</p> - -<p> -"Trust me, Jarl," said the old viking, -and returned to the ship. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap12"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XII. -<br /><br /> -THE FLIGHT FROM LONDON. -</h3> - -<p> -The return of Biorn and the finding of -Astrid happened so close together -that Sigurd determined to take -advantage of his opportunity. He saw the -King twice a day, at meals, and on each -occasion Ethelred seated him near the -high-seat and conversed affably with him; but -Sigurd felt that the iron hand was but -concealed within a silken glove, and that the -King would soon find means to rid himself -of this troublesome Northman. -</p> - -<p> -The day after Biorn's arrival, at the -noonday meal, Ethelred called Sigurd to his -side as usual. -</p> - -<p> -"How is the search progressing, Jarl? -Have you any news yet?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd assumed a gloomy air. "I only -wish I had some, King Ethelred. My ship -arrived last night, and I cannot long delay -my return to King Olaf, I fear." -</p> - -<p> -The King seemed unmistakably relieved, -and Sigurd judged that his visit to the -shops the day before had not escaped the -spies. Ketil he had not seen since that -first day, but as he always saw some of his -men whenever he left the palace, he -believed the Norseman was keeping close -watch on him. -</p> - -<p> -That evening Biorn entered his room -shortly after dark with a coil of thin but -strong rope and a light grapnel. -</p> - -<p> -"Is the 'Crane' in shape?" asked Sigurd -eagerly. "We had best wait an hour or -two to let the streets get deserted." -</p> - -<p> -"Yes, all is ready, and two large boats -are waiting at the stairs. We are only -three streets from the river, so the escape -is open." -</p> - -<p> -"I'm not so sure about that," replied -Sigurd uneasily. "If Ketil discovers -those boats there, and has been following -you, as is likely, we may have trouble yet. -However, time enough for that when it -comes." -</p> - -<p> -An hour later there were few people in -the streets, so Sigurd roused his men and -set out. -</p> - -<p> -"We had better not keep together," he -said. "Three of you, with Biorn, come -with me; the others wait at the corner here. -We will not be long." -</p> - -<p> -So the four quickly made their way to the -corner of the palace where Astrid's -window was located. A high wall enclosed -the palace, with a strip of garden inside; -the palace itself had but two stories, Astrid -being on the upper. -</p> - -<p> -As they reached the wall, Biorn flung -up the grapnel, which held, and Sigurd -went up the rope, hand over hand. Changing -the rope to the inside, he slid down, -and stood beneath the window. -</p> - -<p> -All was dark above, but when he threw -up a stone at the shutter, it opened and -something tumbled out. Catching it, -Sigurd saw it was a rope made of shreds of -curtains; he held it firm, and a minute later -Astrid slid down and stood by his side. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd greeted her with a silent handclasp, -and led her to the wall. Climbing -up, he drew Astrid to the top, and next -minute both stood in the street. Old Biorn -greeted Astrid heartily, and threw a dark -cloak over her dress; and without delay -they started for the river. -</p> - -<p> -When they met the dozen men left by -Sigurd, he sent them forward with Biorn -to get the boats ready, following with -Astrid. Ten minutes later they descended -the stairs and pushed off, Astrid and Sigurd -standing in the prow of the first boat. -</p> - -<p> -"Hurrah! You are free at last, Astrid!" -cried Sigurd, in a low tone. At the same -instant the girl pulled him sharply -backward, and a spear whizzed under his arm. -A yell arose, and a dark mass in front of -them resolved itself into a large boat full -of men. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd threw all concealment aside. -"Pull, men, pull!" he shouted. One of the -men sank back with a spear through him, -and with that the other boat crashed into -Sigurd's. -</p> - -<p> -Standing in the prow, Sigurd cut with -his sword at the foremost man, while Biorn -endeavored to ward off the other craft. -Then Ketil's mocking laugh sounded in -Sigurd's ears, and as his blow fell harmlessly -on the other's shield, a boat-hook caught -his byrnie and all but jerked him overboard. -</p> - -<p> -"You have tough bark, friend Sigurd," -cried Ketil, as the boy staggered. Sigurd -tried in vain to free himself from the hook, -as Ketil pulled, so he cried: -</p> - -<p> -"Take Astrid on board and set sail, Biorn!" -</p> - -<p> -Instead of resisting the boat-hook, -Sigurd gave a leap forward into the prow -of Ketil's boat. As he did so, Biorn pulled -away, with a cry of dismay from Astrid, -and left Sigurd amid his foes. -</p> - -<p> -When the boy sprang on board, Ketil was -pushed back, and he staggered. Sigurd cut -him down with a single blow, disengaged -the hook from his steel shirt, and looked -around. He had forgotten the second boat, -and this was right alongside. Striking -down a second man, Sigurd leaped back -among his own followers. -</p> - -<p> -"To the 'Crane,' men! Follow Biorn!" -</p> - -<p> -The men needed no urging, and they -soon caught up with the first boat. Looking -back, Sigurd saw that they were not -pursued, for the others were demoralized at -the loss of their leader. -</p> - -<p> -"All safe, Sigurd?" cried Biorn, as they -came up. -</p> - -<p> -"All safe," the boy replied, "and I think -I have paid Ketil for his villainy. At any -rate he won't bother us for some time. -Row fast, men, there is no use trying to -hide now." -</p> - -<p> -Shouts rose on the air behind them, and -they saw torches darting to and fro. Soon -they passed below London Bridge, and in -a few minutes were aboard the "Crane," -the men on board sending up a hearty -cheer. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd led Astrid to the cabin, while -Biorn took charge of the ship, whose oars -were already out. "Now, Astrid, tell me -your story," said Sigurd, as they sat down. -</p> - -<p> -"Well, about midnight that night, Ketil -came to my room with a note in Runic -saying that you were wounded and to come at -once. I thought it strange that you should -send him, but went willingly enough. -</p> - -<p> -"As soon as we were outside the palace -his men seized me and carried me on the -ship. There I was freed, but locked in the -cabin. I scratched a few words on a piece -of wood, for I heard Ketil say they were -going to England, and then heard you come -up alongside. I threw the wood out of the -window, and called, but Ketil ran in and -threw a cloak over my head." -</p> - -<p> -"After that I was treated well enough. -After we landed, Ketil made me promise -not to escape if he left me free; and when -we got to London King Ethelred was very -nice to me, giving me women to wait on me, -and many gifts." -</p> - -<p> -"The villain!" cried Sigurd angrily, and -he told Astrid all the king had said. -</p> - -<p> -"I was kept in my room," continued -Astrid, "but I had nothing to complain of. -Then one day I saw you in the shops across -the way, and you know the rest. I tore up -some curtains to make a rope with, and here -I am." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd laughed. "Well, shall we stay -here, or go out on deck?" -</p> - -<p> -"Out on deck, by all means. But why -do your men call you Jarl?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd told her of his last interview with -Olaf, and Astrid said, casting down her -eyes: "Well, I suppose after this you will -hold me so far below you that—" -</p> - -<p> -"Nonsense," broke in Sigurd, laughing, -"get on deck and stop this foolery!" -</p> - -<p> -Astrid gayly ran out on deck, and Sigurd -followed. They were speeding swiftly -down the Thames, which is seldom frozen -in winter, and all sound of pursuit was lost. -As there was nothing to be seen in the faint -starlight, Astrid went to bed, Sigurd -giving the cabin up to her, while he took -charge of the ship, Biorn relieving him -after a few hours. -</p> - -<p> -At sunrise they were well at sea, and as -there were plenty of furs on board, the -men were warmly clad. Suddenly Sigurd, -looking back, cried out: -</p> - -<p> -"Look there, Biorn! What ship is that?" -</p> - -<p> -The old viking gave a grim laugh, and -then Sigurd recollected the ship which -Biorn had taken on his way to London. -</p> - -<p> -"She had only fifteen men in her, Jarl, -for I could spare no more from the -'Crane'; but yesterday I picked up a score -of Norsemen in London, and as they were -willing to take service with Olaf, they are -now on board. She may come in handy." -</p> - -<p> -"Yes, indeed," agreed Sigurd, "and she -is a handsome ship, too. Where did you -get the men, Biorn?" -</p> - -<p> -"Oh!" replied the other, carelessly, -"they were prisoners of Ethelred's, so I -invited them to take a cruise. They were -not closely watched, so there they are!" -</p> - -<p> -"What have you done!" broke out -Sigurd, in dismay. "Don't you know that -this will bring all the Saxon forces down -on us?" -</p> - -<p> -Biorn shrugged his shoulders. "There -were only two of Ethelred's longships lying -in the water, Jarl, and seeing that they lay -unwatched, some of the men rowed over -last night and all but hewed away their -masts." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd seized the old viking's hand. -"Pardon, Biorn, I might have known you -better. That explains why we were not -followed; now what shall we do?" -</p> - -<p> -"Well, it is madness to put to sea in this -weather, but there is no help for it. I -would suggest that we either go north to -Mercia or Northumberland and winter -there, or else strike over to Flanders and -go overland to Denmark. We would be -safe enough in the north of England, for -there are many vikings there and Ethelred's -power is weak, to say the least." -</p> - -<p> -"Then let us head for there, gather a -few more men if possible, and strike for -Denmark or else Flanders." -</p> - -<p> -This was decided on finally, for Sigurd -wished to take the captured ship with him, -but his men were too few to manage both -vessels in case of danger. So they coasted -along the shore of East Anglia, then turned -north, past the Wash, and came to the -Humber River. They met with no storms -on the way, though the weather was cold -enough. -</p> - -<p> -Just before reaching the Humber, the -"Crane" stopped at a small river for fresh -water. There were no habitations in sight, -so Sigurd and Astrid went ashore while -the casks were being filled. -</p> - -<p> -"It is good to be on land again, Sigurd!" -cried Astrid, after racing and beating him -to the top of a small hill. -</p> - -<p> -"I've been at sea so long that I don't -notice it much," laughed Sigurd spreading -his fur cloak in the snow for Astrid to sit on. -</p> - -<p> -As they rested, looking over the broad -expanse of snow, dotted with trees and -forests that spread inland, they heard the -ringing call of a war-horn from the ships. -</p> - -<p> -"Come on, Astrid!" cried Sigurd, starting -up, "something must be wrong at the -ships!" -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap13"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XIII. -<br /><br /> -ALFRED OF MERCIA. -</h3> - -<p> -They dashed down the hill, and in a -few minutes were through the trees -and on the river bank. They found -Biorn drawing up his men. -</p> - -<p> -"Why, what's the matter, Biorn?" -</p> - -<p> -"I am not sure, Jarl, but look up the ice -yonder." -</p> - -<p> -He pointed up the frozen bed of the little -river, and Sigurd saw a large party of -armed men, pulling a sledge, running -toward them. Sigurd examined them for a -minute. -</p> - -<p> -"I don't think they mean to attack us, -Biorn, or they would not have that sledge. -They look like Saxons, so best be ready." -</p> - -<p> -By this time more men had arrived -from the ships, and as the Saxons -approached, Sigurd saw that there were some -fifty men in the party. Finding the -Northmen waiting, they stopped running, and one, -better dressed than the rest, in a bearskin -mantle and helmet, hastened on. -</p> - -<p> -As he came near, Astrid said, "Why, -Sigurd, he isn't any older than you are! -And you were afraid of him!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd made no reply save a smile, for, -indeed, the Saxon was only a youth, but a -noble-looking one. Nearly as tall as Sigurd, -he was not so broad, but his face was frank, -and attracted the young Jarl at once. -</p> - -<p> -"Are you Danes or Norsemen?" called -the stranger. -</p> - -<p> -"Norsemen," answered Sigurd, "and -you are Saxons, I take it." -</p> - -<p> -"Right you are," laughed the boy, with -a glance over his shoulder. "Are you -plundering the country?" -</p> - -<p> -"Nay," answered Sigurd. "We are -Christians. Bid your men stand back, for -our arrows lie loosely on the strings." -</p> - -<p> -The boy laughed again, as if it were a -good joke, and turning, waved to his men, -who halted. -</p> - -<p> -"Let me explain," he said. "I am Alfred, -son of Jarl Alfric of Mercia, and with -me is Sigrid my sister. Briefly, we are -flying from the men of King Ethelred; will -you assist us?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd, suspecting a trap, looked keenly -at the boy; but his gaze was met squarely, -and Sigurd's suspicions vanished. "Where -is your sister, and your pursuers?" he asked. -</p> - -<p> -Alfred pointed to the sledge. "My sister -is ill, and we have to carry her." His face -suddenly became serious. "Hasten your -reply, sir Norseman, for God's sake! The -King's men are not half a mile behind, and -there are nigh three score of them, while -half of mine are wounded or sick." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd stepped out and gripped his hand. -"No time for talking, then! Take your -sister and the sick or wounded men out to -my ships, and let all your fighting men join -mine. Take charge of him, Astrid, and -use the boats quickly." -</p> - -<p> -The boy called up his men, dividing them -as Sigurd had ordered, and joining the -Norsemen with twenty Saxons. -</p> - -<p> -"We will give Ethelred's men a sharp -lesson, Biorn. Do you post the men as you -see fit." -</p> - -<p> -A hundred yards up the river was a bend, -and running toward this, Biorn motioned -the men to hide behind the dry bushes that -stood along the banks, while he ran forward -to reconnoiter. A minute later he returned -at full speed. -</p> - -<p> -"Here they are," he cried. "Pass the -word to wait till they come opposite, then -loose arrows and at them with axes." -</p> - -<p> -Barely had Biorn sunk out of sight when -the pursuing party appeared, three-score -Saxons under two leaders. "Pick off the -leaders, men," whispered Sigurd, and as -the party came between the two bands of -Norsemen, Biorn's horn sounded, and a -cloud of arrows poured into the compact -body of Saxons. At the same time the -vikings seized their swords and axes and ran -forward. -</p> - -<p> -The Saxons resisted bravely, but their -leaders had fallen at the first fire, and after -a minute of sharp hand-to-hand fighting -they broke and fled. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd had headed his men, engaging a -tall Saxon in single combat. The other -wounded Sigurd badly in the shoulder at -the first exchange of blows; and, dropping -his shield, Sigurd grasped his great sword -in both hands and rushed his foe. At the -first blow the other's shield-arm fell, numb -with the shock; at the second his sword flew -from his hand and he slipped on the ice, -falling heavily. -</p> - -<p> -Seeing that the enemy had broken, Sigurd -paused and shouted: -</p> - -<p> -"Back, men, back! We only want to -give them a lesson, not to slaughter them!" -</p> - -<p> -His own men obeyed, but Alfred's Saxons -drove on after the fugitives, and -Sigurd could hardly blame them. Then he -turned to his foe; the man lay looking up, -awaiting the death stroke. -</p> - -<p> -"Get up," exclaimed Sigurd with a -laugh, "I am no murderer!" -</p> - -<p> -With an amazed expression, the Saxon -slowly got up, and then, seizing Sigurd's -hand in his, knelt and kissed it. "Thanks, -lord," he said, "you are the first who ever -bested Wulf at the sword, and if you will -take him, he will serve you right well!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd smiled, but faintly; and Biorn -was just in time to catch him in his arms. -The wounded shoulder was streaming -with blood, and he had suddenly turned -faint. -</p> - -<p> -While Biorn held him and the other men -crowded around, Wulf tore off his woolen -tunic and deftly bound up the wound, -Biorn watching him suspiciously; then, -taking Sigurd's feet while Biorn tenderly -held his body, the two carried him back -to the shore. -</p> - -<p> -As they approached, Astrid ran up. -</p> - -<p> -"Sigurd! Is Sigurd hurt?" -</p> - -<p> -"It is nothing," replied Biorn, "only a -wound in the shoulder. He'll be all right -in ten minutes." -</p> - -<p> -Wulf, who had wounded the boy, now -surprised Biorn by his tenderness. Setting -the boy with his back to an ice-hummock, -he bathed his face with snow, and Sigurd -opened his eyes. -</p> - -<p> -"Keep quiet," growled Biorn, as he -struggled to rise, "I will attend to the -embarking, and you can rest for a space." -</p> - -<p> -By the time the water casks were aboard -Alfred and the Saxons had returned, and -the Saxon boy seemed genuinely sorry for -his rescuer's mishap. All then embarked, -and Biorn divided the men between the -two ships. -</p> - -<p> -On the "Crane" he took the Jomsvikings, -Olaf's courtmen, and a dozen -Saxons; the Norse prisoners and thirty -Saxons went on board the other ship. In -an hour the sails were hoisted, and the -ships bore away from the land, heading east. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd sat on the forecastle of the -"Crane," Astrid and the two Saxons near -him. "Now tell me your story," said -Sigurd, giving his own name and Astrid's. -</p> - -<p> -"Our father was the Jarl of Mercia," -began Alfred, "but King Ethelred has -always been jealous of his popularity, and -has persecuted him unceasingly. Three -weeks since a party of armed men appeared -to seize our father, but he fled to a Danish -ship on the coast, and she took him off. -My elder brother Alfgar was taken and -blinded." -</p> - -<p> -Astrid and Sigurd gave a cry of horror, -but Alfred smiled sadly. "You do not -know of what Ethelred is capable, my -friends. In his present condition Alfgar is -unfit to become Jarl, thus being as good as -dead in the King's opinion. -</p> - -<p> -"My father had barely time to send a -man to warn us at Lincoln, and we fled -from home just in time to get to the fens -and escape. Some fourscore men, all -devoted servants of my father, fled with us. -Twice Ethelred's men came upon us, and -we beat them off, but wounds and sickness -thinned my men, and these are all I have -left. Last week Sigrid came down with -fever, and we had to fly again; but this -time, thanks to you, we are safe. We will -never forget that we owe our lives to you, -Jarl Sigurd!" -</p> - -<p> -Astrid immediately took charge of the -sick girl. Thanks to his temperate life, -Sigurd's wound promised to heal rapidly, -and the man Wulf proved invaluable. He -had been educated in a monastery, and was -skilled in leech-craft, and seemed devoted -to the boy Jarl. -</p> - -<p> -"I thought to be killed at once," he told -Sigurd, who had summoned him. "You -are the best swordsman, as well as the only -merciful viking, whom I ever met. My life -is yours, Jarl, if so you will have it." The -man's words were so sincere that Sigurd -accepted his offer gladly, for he was an -expert swordsman as well as leech, and could -both read and write, which was no small -accomplishment. -</p> - -<p> -A council was now held on the -"Crane's" forecastle, to decide on what -course they should pursue. They finally -came to the conclusion that they would run -south and cross to Flanders, where Alfred -and Sigrid would probably find their -father. As soon as this course was fixed on, -Biorn took charge of the "Snake," as the -other vessel was named, transferring to -her that evening. -</p> - -<p> -It proved well, indeed, that he did so, for -during the night a gale swept down out of -the northeast, and bore them helplessly -before it. The Saxons on the "Snake," most -of whom had never been to sea before, were -of little use, and even Alfred was sick, -though Sigrid escaped; but there was nothing -to do save to keep the ships before the -wind. It was bitterly cold, but as the -Norsemen did not mind this much, and the -girls were well wrapped up, no one suffered -greatly. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd had no fears for the two ships, -for both were new and rode the waves -easily. The ships of the vikings could only -sail with a fair or a side wind, and as they -would be driven far past Flanders unless -the gale broke up soon, the four discussed -the situation that evening in the "Crane's" -cabin. -</p> - -<p> -"We are certainly getting all the storms -we want," laughed Sigurd to Astrid, as he -came in and shook off the snow. "Shall -we take the chances and head around for -the southern end of England?" -</p> - -<p> -"No!" cried Alfred. "Cannot we make -for Normandy? There are many vikings -there, and it is settled by Norsemen." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd shook his head. "Not unless the -wind shifts." -</p> - -<p> -"I see," broke in Astrid, "that you are -thinking about getting me back home. I -admit that I would like to see Vendland -again, but why don't you just take the -simplest course, Sigurd, run before the -wind, then around England and back to -King Olaf?" -</p> - -<p> -"It sounds easy," laughed Sigurd, "and -that is what I would do if I were alone. -But with you and Sigrid on board I don't -like to take unnecessary risks." -</p> - -<p> -Sigrid laughed as Alfred, in the throes -of seasickness, seized his cloak and left the -cabin. "Don't mind us, Jarl; head for -Ireland by all means!" -</p> - -<p> -"Well," responded Sigurd, "we'll see -how things look in the morning. I'm going -to turn in now and get some sleep." -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap14"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XIV. -<br /><br /> -IN BRETLAND. -</h3> - -<p> -The morning broke dark and gloomy, -with no land in sight. Sigurd, -concluding that they had been driven -below the Thames, if not below the end of -England, ordered the helmsman to steer -due west, and while he was unable to -communicate with the "Snake," he saw Biorn -follow his example at once, and knew that -he understood. -</p> - -<p> -The gale had now lessened to a steady -wind from the northeast, interspersed with -flurries of snow, and both ships drove -steadily along under half-canvas. -</p> - -<p> -For two days they held this course, and -then Sigurd held a shouted conference with -Biorn. It seemed evident that they had -been carried south of England, so the prows -were turned north, and the next morning -land appeared. Alfred had found his sea-legs -by this time, while Sigrid was rapidly -gaining strength and color from the salt -sea-air, which drove the marsh fever out -of her. She was a very pretty girl, indeed, -with her blue eyes and long flaxen hair, -and she and Astrid were firm friends from -the start. -</p> - -<p> -Wulf, who was now more a friend than -a captive, was a great favorite with all on -board, even with Alfred's Saxons. On the -morning that land was sighted, he drew -Sigurd aside. -</p> - -<p> -"Jarl, we must have fresh water at once. -Three of the casks were loosened by the -storm and have run out; there is only a -cask or two of ale left." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd made a wry face. "Well, that -will keep us from thirst, and the men like -it well enough, though I have little taste -for it; but perhaps we can get water from -some river along the coast here, or from -the 'Snake.'" -</p> - -<p> -Wulf disagreed. "All Ethelred's Jarls -and Thanes will be looking for us, you may -be sure, and as soon as we are sighted the -housecarls will be poured down wherever -we land." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd thought it over, and finally -signaled the "Snake." Biorn drew alongside, -but when Sigurd mentioned the shortness -of water, the old viking gave a cry of -dismay. -</p> - -<p> -"Why, we thought to get some from -you! Never mind, we are drawing into the -coast, and I will make a landing and find -out where we are. We cannot be very far -from South Wales, and once there it will -be plain sailing, for the people there are of -my own race, and I have not forgotten the -language of the Cymry." -</p> - -<p> -So they steered toward the shore, which -was high and rocky. After coasting along -for two or three hours, a large bay was -revealed, half frozen over, with a hamlet -nestling on the cliffs above. -</p> - -<p> -"They are fishing folk, most like," said -Alfred, "but there is no sign of a river -hereabouts. We may have to melt up some -of that ice!" -</p> - -<p> -Biorn's ship now drew carefully in, and -broke through the thin outer edge of ice. -When the "Snake" would go no farther, -Biorn leaped out after testing the ice with -oars, and a dozen men followed him to the -shore. They found the hamlet in great -consternation, dreading the forays of the -pirates, but Biorn soon appeased their fears, -buying a goodly quantity of fish from them, -and returned to the ships. -</p> - -<p> -The "Snake" drew alongside the -"Crane." "No fresh water, Jarl," -reported Biorn. "Everything is frozen fast, -and these people melt ice for their needs. -They say there is a river half a mile -inland, but we dare not risk it." -</p> - -<p> -"I would advise that if possible we bear -around South Wales and reach up for the -Northern Kingdom. It will only be a day's -difference, and we won't find much help -among the people on this coast. We might -take in some ice-cakes, in case the ale -gives out." -</p> - -<p> -"How long does it take to reach North -Wales?" asked Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -"We ought to get there to-morrow night, -or the next day at latest," replied Biorn, -and Sigurd waved assent. The ships -were rowed up to the ice and a supply of -this was taken on board each ship; then the -sails were hoisted, half the oars put out, -and at full speed they passed along the -coast, for Sigurd was determined not to -be caught in another tempest. -</p> - -<p> -Next morning, however, the Land's End -was reached, and the prows turned north. -By nightfall the land was in sight ahead, -and early next morning they drew close -into shore. -</p> - -<p> -"I know where we are," shouted Biorn -to Sigurd. "Do you follow me, Jarl, and -we will speedily come to an open river, -unless I am greatly mistaken." -</p> - -<p> -Before noon, indeed, a great shout of joy -went up from the men, for there before -them was a bay, with an open river flowing -down. True, the channel was narrow and -dangerous for ships, for the ice nearly met -on either side; but the "Crane" followed -the "Snake" closely, and they entered the -channel. Half a mile from the mouth this -widened out and turned suddenly; as the -"Snake" reached the bend Sigurd heard -Biorn's war-horn, and saw his men arming -themselves in haste. -</p> - -<p> -"To arms, men!" he shouted, "and be -ready for whatever may befall!" Alfred -quickly donned his armor and stood by -Sigurd in the prow. As they in turn came -around the bend, they saw the reason for -Biorn's preparations; there before them lay -two large ships, moored for the winter on -shore, with a camp close by. From their -appearance they were Danes, and high -above, on a neighboring knoll, could be -seen the roofs of a town of goodly size. -</p> - -<p> -As the "Crane" came alongside the -"Snake," Sigurd saw that the vikings on -shore were also arming and assembling -around their two ships. -</p> - -<p> -"This is the town of Neath, Jarl," cried -Biorn, as he leaped on board the "Crane," -"and it was here that I was born. What -ships these are I know not; shall we draw -in and hail them?" -</p> - -<p> -"That would be best," replied Sigurd. -"Doubtless they are some vikings who are -wintering here, but it is strange, indeed, -that they are allowed to remain so near a -town, unless they came on a peaceful -errand." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd ordered the men to row as close -to shore as they could. The ship stopped -two or three hundred yards from it, for -it was impossible to break through the ice, -and Sigurd blew a loud blast on a peace-horn. -In answer came one from the camp, -and a dozen men left the two ships and -started over the ice toward the "Crane." -</p> - -<p> -As these came near, Astrid uttered a little -cry and caught Sigurd's arm. "Oh, Fairhair, -look at that big man in front! That -is Halfdan, the brother of Queen Gunhild, -and my own uncle!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd looked closely at the man, -remembered him well, for he had seen him -often while the Jornsborg men were at King -Svein's court. Halfdan stopped just -beyond spear-cast of the "Crane." -</p> - -<p> -"Who are you, and do you come in peace -or war?" he called. -</p> - -<p> -"Good-morning!" laughed Sigurd, "don't -you know your friends, Jarl?" -</p> - -<p> -The other started, looked keenly at the -ship, and ran forward. "Surely, it is -Sigurd Fairhair!" he cried, as he came -near. "And by the eye of Odin! Am I -dreaming or is this Astrid?" -</p> - -<p> -"Astrid it is, uncle!" laughed the girl, -jumping down on the ice and throwing her -arms around his neck. The Jarl struggled -to disengage himself, and cried in mock -dismay: -</p> - -<p> -"Help; help, are you trying to make me -captive? Let loose! Respect my dignity!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd followed Astrid to the ice, and -clasped Halfdan's hand. "Be careful, -uncle," laughed Astrid, "Sigurd is your -equal in dignity now!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd nodded at the surprised look of -the Dane. "Yes, I am one of Olaf -Tryggveson's men now, Jarl, and he made -me a Jarl lately, although I am altogether -too young for such an honor." -</p> - -<p> -"Nonsense, nonsense!" replied Halfdan, -his merry eyes gleaming with happiness, -"you are the handsomest Jarl I ever saw in -my life, upon my word! But come up to -the camp." -</p> - -<p> -"Wait," said Sigurd, turning to his -ships. "Alfred, do you and Sigrid join -us. Wulf, you and Biorn take charge of -the ships and lay them up on shore, there -beside the others. We are with friends." -</p> - -<p> -As Alfred and Sigrid climbed down to -the ice, the young Jarl presented them to -Halfdan, who greeted them heartily. -</p> - -<p> -"I have heard of your father's misfortune," -he exclaimed, "and I was sorry, -indeed, for I fought against him three or -four years ago, and he was a noble foeman. -However, he is safe in Flanders now, and -is like to return before long." -</p> - -<p> -"Why, what do you mean?" cried Alfred, -in surprise. -</p> - -<p> -"Come along to the camp and I'll tell -you." Halfdan led the way to the shore. -"It's too cold to be standing out here talking." -</p> - -<p> -As they entered the camp, the news -spread that a party of Jomsvikings were -among the arrivals, and a loud blast went -up from the horns, while the Danes met -them with shouts of joy, for the men of -Jomsborg were prime favorites with King -Svein's men. Sigurd found several whom -he knew, while Astrid was met with fresh -cheers. As they entered the large hut of -Halfdan, the Jarl drove the men off. -</p> - -<p> -"Get out of here!" he cried. "Go down -and help stow the ships up on land beside -ours. We have much to talk over here, and -would be left in peace." -</p> - -<p> -With a last cheer, the men vanished, and -Halfdan closed the door. -</p> - -<p> -"Here is food and water, friends, if you -are hungry." -</p> - -<p> -"We have plenty of food, but a drink -of water would not be amiss," answered -Sigurd. "And now, how come you here, -in Wales?" -</p> - -<p> -"First make yourselves comfortable." -Halfdan piled furs along the wall, for -Astrid and Sigrid, while he and the two -boys sat on the long wooden bench. "Well, -of course you remember the oath that -Svein made that night? He wasn't in such -a hurry as you Jomsvikings were, but he -has been making big preparations. He sent -me here right after the news of Hiorunga -Bay arrived, for he had counted on your -men making a descent on Ethelred from -the west as well as from Northumbria, -where he himself will land in the spring -or summer. -</p> - -<p> -"I arrived here a month or two ago, and -have arranged matters with Idwal ap -Meirig, the King of North Wales. What -barbarous names these Welsh people have!" -</p> - -<p> -"Probably they think ours just as bad," -laughed Sigrid, "for they hate everything -Saxon; and as for your Norse names, I -am sure they used to sound harsh, even to us!" -</p> - -<p> -"Well, in any case, King Idwal is up in -the town yonder, has agreed to join us, and -we see him nearly every day. Now, tell -me something about yourself, Sigurd." -</p> - -<p> -It was late when Sigurd finished his -tale, so Halfdan, who had given orders -meanwhile, showed the two girls to a hut -that had been hastily fitted up for them, -and shared his own with the boys for the -night. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap15"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XV. -<br /><br /> -IN WINTER QUARTERS. -</h3> - -<p> -Next morning Halfdan's men joined -forces with the new arrivals, and -got the two ships up on the shore, -dismantling and unloading them, while -parties of men hastened out to the -surrounding woods, and returned with great -quantities of firewood and timber, with -which fresh huts were built. -</p> - -<p> -This was finished by evening, for Halfdan -had a hundred and fifty men, and many -hands made light labor. For several days -the Norsemen rested quietly, for they had -many wounded, and some of the Saxons -were still down with fever. Sigrid, -however, was now almost well, and the jovial -roughness of Halfdan amused her and -brought the roses back to her cheeks. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd and Alfred wished to visit the -town above, and if possible to take up their -quarters there, but Halfdan discouraged -them from doing so. -</p> - -<p> -"King Idwal watches us sharp enough, -for he has suspicions of every Northman -within a hundred miles. One cannot blame -him, either; the vikings have ravaged poor -Bretland terribly, destroying monasteries -and towns, and burning and plundering. -Your own man Biorn is a sample; he was -carried off in his youth. -</p> - -<p> -"As for visiting the town, it is not -worth while. There is nothing there save -a great castle and a cluster of dirty little -houses, and in any case Idwal has forbidden -our men to enter the town. Once a -week the country folk come down here with -their market stuff, and Idwal sends us ale -by the cask. Never fear, he will be down -pretty soon to see for himself who these -new vikings are." -</p> - -<p> -For two weeks they remained in camp, -seeing nothing of the Welsh king, but all -were greatly interested in the people, who -brought fresh meat and food into camp -once a week. Indeed, the vikings' camp -at these times assumed the appearance of -a fair, for most of the men made small -objects which the country people took in -exchange, and many merchants set up -permanent booths inside the camp. The -Welsh people were smaller by far than the -Norsemen or Danes, and their bright, -quick eyes and black straight hair -contrasted strangely with the Northmen and -Saxons, most of whom were fair. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd and Alfred had at first feared -that the Saxons and Danes, hereditary -enemies, would not mingle well; but their -fears proved to be unfounded. Halfdan -discovered from the country people that in -the forests to the west, only a few miles -distant, wolves were a terrible scourge; so -the men set to work and made skis for -themselves, and even Sigrid learned to use -the "snow-skates," as the Saxons called -the long wooden runners. In the second -week of their stay the four young people -and Halfdan took a score of men, leaving -the camp in charge of Biorn, and for three -days went off on a wolf-hunt in the forest. -</p> - -<p> -On their return Biorn told them that -word had arrived in their absence from -King Idwal, who intended to visit them on -the following day, with all his court. Great -preparations were made for his reception. -Pine boughs were brought in from the -forest, with which the huts were decorated -gayly, and Halfdan's large hut was hung -with tapestries and cloths, which Sigurd -found in the cargo of the vessel which -Biorn had captured. -</p> - -<p> -All the men rubbed up their armor and -weapons, and when in the morning the -Welsh were seen winding down the hill, -the force was drawn up in three divisions, -the Danes, Norsemen and Saxons grouping -themselves together under the standards -of Halfdan, Sigurd and Alfred. Presently -the Welsh arrived in the valley leading to -the camp, and their coming was greeted by -a loud burst from the horns of the vikings. -</p> - -<p class="capcenter"> -<a id="img-057"></a> -<img class="imgcenter" src="images/img-057.jpg" alt=""They were greeted by a loud burst from the horns of the vikings."" /> -<br /> -"<i>They were greeted by a loud burst <br /> -from the horns of the vikings.</i>" -</p> - -<p> -Leading the way came a troop of -archers, behind whom, mounted on small -shaggy ponies, rode the King and his court. -Idwal was a larger man than most of his -followers, with keen black eyes and firm -features, shaved in the Danish fashion, -with two long mustaches. As he came up -Halfdan advanced and greeted him. -</p> - -<p> -"Welcome, my lord King! It gives us -pleasure to return the hospitality of your -castle!" -</p> - -<p> -Idwal smiled. "Truly, Jarl, I am glad -that these men of yours are not minded to -foray my borders! We would have a hard -time of it to repel such a force as this. -I heard that you had been joined by a -fresh band of vikings, so came down to -assure myself that we were in no danger." -</p> - -<p> -At this Halfdan motioned Sigurd and -his friends to advance and presented them -to the King. The latter frowned as Alfred -came forward, and swept his eye over the -band of Saxons. -</p> - -<p> -"It is many years since a Saxon has -dared seek hospitality from the Cymry, my -lad," he remarked. Then Alfred told his -story, and the king's face cleared. -</p> - -<p> -"Well, to be frank, I have small love -for Saxons, but since you are enemies of -Ethelred, that is another matter. Tell me, -in case your father returned home and I -joined with King Svein, would you be for -or against me?" -</p> - -<p> -He gazed keenly at Alfred, but the lad -met the look squarely, though with a smile. -"As to that, my lord King, I can only say -that I would fight for my own land against -the invader, whoever he was; yet if my -father thinks it right to join King Svein, -as well he may, I will be at his side." -</p> - -<p> -Halfdan broke in with a laugh. "Don't -be afraid, my lord, this Saxon will not have -to be feared for some time to come! I dare -say that if you make a foray against Ethelred -this spring, he would stand as stoutly -at your side as any of your nobles. But -come into the camp, my lord." -</p> - -<p> -The vikings opened a path between their -ranks, and Idwal led his men through them. -In an open space amid the huts, Halfdan -had cleared away the snow and stretched -a large sail over a number of long tables, -while on either side blazed a dozen great -fires. -</p> - -<p> -"By my faith," cried King Idwal, "this -is a right royal reception, Jarl! An open -air banquet is far more to my liking than -one inside these huts, and these fires would -warm an army!" -</p> - -<p> -So saying, the king tossed aside his fur -cloak, and Sigurd saw that he wore a light -suit of armor beneath it. In the king's -train were some twoscore nobles, and a -bishop, to whom Halfdan accorded the -place of honor. Among the Welsh, -bishops and priests were honored even above -the king, and they found Bishop Dafydd -a learned, kindly, and intensely religious -man, who was at once interested in Astrid -and Wulf, with both of whom he conversed -at great length. -</p> - -<p> -It was well, indeed, that Halfdan had -been hunting for three days previously, for -his stock of venison was heavily drawn -upon. Great fish were brought in, newly -taken from the river below, and to the -delight of the Welshmen a huge boar's head, -in the Saxon style, was placed before the -king. The vikings spared no pains to make -the feast a notable one, and to Sigurd's -satisfaction the presence of Bishop Dafydd -and his men prevented it from becoming a -wild carouse, as the Norsemen were only -too apt to make it. -</p> - -<p> -Before the King left that evening there -was an exchange of gifts, as was -customary. Biorn and Jarl Halfdan, who -were skillful smiths, had the week before -made a beautiful byrnie, of woven gold -rings, and this was presented to the king, -who was delighted with it. -</p> - -<p> -He presented Halfdan with a great -boar-hound, and to Sigurd he gave a cloak, -edged with fur, the scarlet cloth -embroidered in silver thread. As he had been -informed of the presence of the two girls, -he had thoughtfully brought for them new -outfits of garments suited to their rank. -</p> - -<p> -Idwal returned to his castle that evening, -and the bond between him and the vikings -was firmly cemented. He assured Jarl -Halfdan that as soon as King Svein landed -in the east he would pour a flood of men -over the West Saxon earldoms, and -Halfdan had no doubt that the Danish king -would fulfill the oath he had sworn at his -accession feast. -</p> - -<p> -After this the camp settled down for the -remainder of the winter. Every week -hunting parties, on skis, brought in fresh -meat from the surrounding forests, while -their arms were repaired and added to by -the smiths. The chiefs of the Northmen -were all trained armorers, and his work at -the forge added greatly to Sigurd's strength -and widened his shoulders immensely. -</p> - -<p> -The two girls had a most enjoyable -time, for every man in the camp worshiped -them. They joined the hunting parties, -and many a wolf fell before Astrid's bow, -while Sigrid, though less warlike, took -part with equal zest. -</p> - -<p> -The time passed away rapidly, and in -March the snows melted and the four ships -were run out and overhauled. They were -freshly pitched and calked, the masts were -stepped, and at last they lay at anchor, -fully ready for the sea. -</p> - -<p> -King Idwal paid the camp a second visit, -after which the chiefs returned to the castle -with him for a few days. He sent down -provisions of all kinds for the ships, and -at the beginning of April, Sigurd took -leave of Halfdan. -</p> - -<p> -They gathered in the Jarl's hut on the -evening before sailing. -</p> - -<p> -"Now, Jarl," said Sigurd, "I suppose -you will take Astrid home with you?" -</p> - -<p> -"That depends," replied Halfdan, -quizzically, "upon whether she wants to go or -not! She seems to like wandering about -the world, with a knight-errant to rescue -her and guard her from harm!" -</p> - -<p> -Astrid blushed, and cried, "That's not -fair, uncle! I'm going home with you—but -listen! Why can't you come with us to -King Olaf, and go home by the north? -It is just as short that way, and far less -dangerous!" -</p> - -<p> -The big Jarl leaped to his feet. "Hurrah! -I never even thought of that; I -thought to go home around the south of -England, but in truth this way is as short, -and I would fain see this King Olaf, whom -you praise so highly." -</p> - -<p> -It had been arranged that Halfdan was -not to sail till the next week, so he at once -dashed out and called his chiefs together. -Telling them of the new plan, the men -went to work, by torchlight, and finished -loading his two ships, and by morning all -was ready. -</p> - -<p> -With a fair wind they reached out into -the bay, and three mornings later, after -coasting along the Irish shore, they came -in sight of the towers of Dublin. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap16"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XVI. -<br /><br /> -AN AMBUSCADE. -</h3> - -<p> -Sigurd was received with unbounded -joy by King Olaf, for he had been -given up for lost in the storm that -swept the coast just before his departure. -Halfdan stayed in Dublin for a week, then -decided to return home without further delay. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd parted with Astrid sorrowfully, -for they had become very dear to each other -in their wanderings, and although Alfred -and Sigrid remained with him, he knew -that he would miss her greatly. -</p> - -<p> -"Never mind," he said, as they walked -down to the ships, "we will land in -Norway this summer or fall, and be sure that -I will turn up at the Danish court, or in -Vendland, not long after." -</p> - -<p> -"I'll be glad to see Vagn once more, -when I get home," said Astrid. "It will -seem almost as good as seeing you." Halfdan -had told them of Vagn's safe arrival -home, so that Jarl Eirik had evidently been -true to his word. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd and Alfred, in the "Crane," -accompanied Halfdan's ships for a few miles; -then, with a last farewell to Astrid, the -"Crane" was turned about, and sought -Dublin again. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd's duties were light at the court. -Olaf's Irish kingdom was not divided in -districts, ruled by Jarls, as was Norway; -so that Sigurd had little to do beyond -commanding the courtmen. Alfred had not -done homage to King Olaf, for he resolved -to remain true to his own land; nevertheless, -the King gave him a command, and -Alfred bore himself well indeed. -</p> - -<p> -With the beginning of summer Olaf took -all his warships out of the water, scraped -the bottoms, and gave them a thorough -overhauling. Thorir Klakke was still in -Dublin, and Sigurd found that he was -urging the King to sail as soon as might be -for Norway, saying that the bonders -would flock to him on his arrival, so that -he need not take so large a force. King -Olaf, who thoroughly understood his treachery, -did not undeceive him; but to Sigurd -he said, one night after Thorir had left -the hall: -</p> - -<p> -"Jarl, if ever a man deserved hanging, -there is one. While you were absent in -England, two half-brothers of mine were -driven from Norway by Jarl Hakon, and -came to me here. Thorir tried to bribe -them, and fortunately they let him think -that they fell in with his plans, which he -disclosed fully. -</p> - -<p> -"Jarl Hakon, in truth, sent him here. -Thorir will try to slay me on the voyage," -the King smiled grimly, "but if he fails, he -is to get me on shore at a certain point -where Hakon will keep men in waiting day -and night. These men are to fall on me -and kill me." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd gave a cry of anger, and the -priest, Thangbrand, growled out, "Let me -attend to him, Olaf! I'll warrant he does -not trouble you any more!" -</p> - -<p> -Olaf laughed heartily. "Thangbrand, -you are more fitted for a viking than for a -priest! If I ever win Norway, I will send -you to Iceland to convert that island to -Christ." -</p> - -<p> -The priest's face lit up. "Thanks, my -King! It is a shame that so fair an island -as that should have no church of Christ in -all its length! It may be that I will meet -resistance there, but methinks I can hold -my own." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd laughed at this characteristic -speech. Thangbrand was a strange mixture -of priest and warrior. Driven from home -for his quarrelsome disposition, he had -joined himself to Olaf; but in reality the -man was deeply religious, and he was, -indeed, the ideal man to carry the Cross to -heathen Iceland. In those days the Cross -and sword went together, and the old gods -of Norway knew many martyrs to their -faith before Christianity was established -in the land, in later years. Right or -wrong, this was the spirit of the age, for -men overlooked the fact that Christ's gospel -was one of peace, and in their enthusiasm -and religious fervor they spread it with -fire and sword. -</p> - -<p> -There was much irregular fighting -around Dublin, for the Irish kings were -ever striving to drive the Norsemen from -their land. They fought bravely, but their -men were ill-armed compared with the vikings, -and Olaf had no trouble in preserving -order for many miles around the city. His -brother-in-law, Olaf Kvaran, was away on -a trip to Iceland at this time. -</p> - -<p> -"How would you like, Jarl," said Olaf -to Sigurd one evening, "to visit King Brian -Boroimhe? I am minded to make peace -with him, for when I go to Norway I want -to leave Dublin in security, and my brother -is not to be relied on. A firm peace with -King Brian for at least a year would be -an excellent thing." -</p> - -<p> -"I would be glad, indeed," replied -Sigurd, "for I have heard so much about -the interior of Ireland that I would fain -see it." -</p> - -<p> -"Well, I will have letters written in the -Irish tongue," said the King, "and do you -take what men you will, together with an -interpreter. Be ready to start next -Monday, and I think you will find the King at -Kells, a large place some thirty miles to -the west. However, I will provide a -reliable guide." -</p> - -<p> -Thangbrand, the priest, hearing of the -embassy, eagerly sought leave to accompany -Sigurd, which Olaf willingly granted. -So, on the following Monday, Sigurd, the -priest, and a score of men left Dublin. -Their weapons were all in peace-bands, and -an Irish captive was taken as guide and -interpreter, having promised to lead them to -Kells in exchange for his liberty. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd laughed when Thangbrand joined -the party. The huge priest wore a byrnie -under his gown, a light steel cap on his -head, and at his saddle-bow was shield and -sword. -</p> - -<p> -"No one knows what may happen," he -replied stoutly, to the boy's peal of -laughter, "we may be waylaid by these Irish -thieves, or this guide may lead us astray, -and it is best to be prepared for anything." -</p> - -<p> -Kells was only a good day's march away, -so they set forward briskly. After reaching -the bounds of Olaf's territory the road -lay through woods and swamps for a dozen -miles; but toward evening they emerged on -an open plain, partly cultivated, and saw in -the distance the spires and towers of a large -city. Several times they had been stopped -by bands of Irish, but their guide served -them faithfully. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd was amazed at sight of Kells. -"Why, this is wonderful!" he said. "I -had no idea that there was such civilization -so near to Dublin!" -</p> - -<p> -Thangbrand smiled. "Kells has seldom -been ravaged by vikings, for many years; it -is a strong place, with a great monastery -in the town. I have been here once before, -and found that the land is beautiful enough -in times of peace, but in war-time it would -be well-nigh impossible to reach the city." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd saw that this was so, as they -approached, for on either side of the road -were defenses, and several stone castles -came in sight. Just at sunset they entered -the gates of the town, and their guide -spurred ahead to find quarters for the men. -</p> - -<p> -As they passed through the streets they -met with sour looks and loud curses from -the Irish, who hated the Northmen bitterly, -with only too much reason. The vikings -had ravaged the fairest vales of Erin, had -destroyed her monasteries and splendid -civilization, and but for the strong hand -of King Brian would have overrun the -country utterly. That night they took -their quarters in a large inn, and the next -morning visited the court. -</p> - -<p> -The King's palace was far beyond -anything Sigurd had ever seen, even in -London. It was built of stone, and the great -hall within was a blaze of arms and -tapestries. The nobles who thronged the hall -were clad much as were the Northmen, -but their golden bracelets and cloak-pins -were richly wrought, and the precious -metal seemed abundant. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd led his men to the high-seat, and -bowed low to King Brian, the famous -chieftain. The latter was a powerful, -stern-faced man of some sixty years, and he -opened and read the letters of Olaf with a -frown, afterwards handing them to a monk -who stood at his side. -</p> - -<p> -"Sir Jarl," he said, without rising, -fixing his gray eyes on Sigurd, "I will have -an answer written at once. For the -present you and your men will be quartered -in my palace here. King Olaf is a brave -and worthy man, and I am glad to conclude -a year's truce with him; were other -Northmen like him, Erin would be a happier -land." -</p> - -<p> -The monk translated the King's words, -and bowing low, Sigurd retired. Thangbrand -at once visited the monastery, taking -Sigurd with him; and although the good -monks were somewhat surprised at the -warlike appearance of the priest, they -entertained their visitors well, and showed -them over the buildings. -</p> - -<p> -Next morning Sigurd had another -audience with King Brian, who handed him a -parchment for King Olaf, and presented -him with a heavy golden arm-ring; after -which the Norsemen left the city at once -on their return journey. -</p> - -<p> -They rode along at a good pace, and as -they came near the boundaries of Olaf's -territory, Sigurd and Thangbrand rode -somewhat ahead of the party; for Thangbrand, -who was an adept at horsemanship, -of which the young Jarl knew little, was -showing Sigurd how to make his steed -curvet and prance, and thus they insensibly -drew ahead of the rest. -</p> - -<p> -They turned a bend in the road, which -wound along beneath thick trees; and as -they did so a number of men sprang to -their horses' heads, and others sprang at -Sigurd and Thangbrand, striving to pull -them from their saddles. At the same -instant, before they could grasp their -weapons, men dropped on them from the -branches overhead, and a minute later the -two Norsemen, bound hand and foot, were -being hurried away through the forest -depths. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap17"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XVII. -<br /><br /> -KETIL TURNS UP. -</h3> - -<p> -Far behind them sounded a few faint -shouts and horns, as the men reached -the spot where the two leaders had -been ambushed; then these died away into -silence. Sigurd saw that they were carried -by a band of two dozen Irish, who were -hastening north through the forest. He -started to speak to the priest, who was -borne at his side, but one of the men struck -him roughly on the mouth, with a sharp -command in Irish, and he ceased. -</p> - -<p> -At nightfall the band halted beside a -stream, and Sigurd judged they had traveled -several miles from the scene of their -capture. A blazing fire was built, over -which the men cooked their meal, the two -captives being flung down beneath a large -tree. -</p> - -<p> -"What fools we were to leave the -guide!" growled Thangbrand into his thick -black beard. "I wish they would give us -somewhat to eat." -</p> - -<p> -His wish was gratified immediately, for -the leader of the band approached, cut the -ropes that bound their hands, and gave -them bread and meat, and a horn of water -from the stream. After this they were -bound again. -</p> - -<p> -"They seem to be expecting someone," -exclaimed Sigurd, "did you note that the -leader had sent men out in all directions?" -</p> - -<p> -This had indeed been done as soon as -they arrived, and an hour later there was a -shout, and into the firelight came a second -body of men. As they saw them, Sigurd -gave a cry of amazement, for at their head -was Ketil Gormson, whom he had left in -London the winter before! -</p> - -<p> -The new arrivals were also Irish, Ketil -being the only foreigner. The leader of -the first party greeted him, and Ketil put -into his hand a bag that clinked pleasantly. -Then he stepped forward to Sigurd's side. -</p> - -<p> -"So I have you at last, my lord Jarl!" -he cried, an evil light in his dark eyes. -"It is a far cry from London to Ireland, but -I have watched and waited patiently." -</p> - -<p> -"It is a pity that I didn't strike harder -that night!" replied Sigurd. "What is -your object in this attack?" -</p> - -<p> -Ketil laughed shortly. "You go with me -to Jarl Hakon, my fine fellow, and as for -this follower of the white Christ, I think -I will turn him over to these good friends -of mine in the morning." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd turned pale, for he knew that any -Norsemen who fell into the hands of the -Irish obtained short shrift. Thangbrand, -however, roared out: -</p> - -<p> -"Loose my hands, you traitor, and face -me with drawn blade!" -</p> - -<p> -"So," sneered Ketil, "I thought that -priests of your God were meek and humble -men, willing to die for their faith!" -</p> - -<p> -Thangbrand flushed under the reproof, -and fell silent. Ketil turned away, set a -guard over the captives, and in a few -minutes the band lay sleeping in their cloaks -beneath the trees. -</p> - -<p> -The Norsemen's weapons had not been -taken from them, but as they were bound -firmly they were of no use. Sigurd, -however, saw that the peace-bands had been -torn from his sword in the hasty flight -through the forest. -</p> - -<p> -An hour after this he felt Thangbrand's -hands touch his. The two captives lay -side by side, and their guard was sitting -a few feet away, nodding sleepily. Turning -by inches, Sigurd looked at the priest, -and saw him motion toward the unbound -sword. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd, very slowly and cautiously, -rolled over on his face, bringing the -weapon within reach of Thangbrand, who -at the same time turned his back. Thus -his hands, after a little vain searching, -met the hilt of the weapon and slowly -drew it forth. An instant later their guard -straightened up and strolled over to them. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd lay on his face, and with a quick -movement Thangbrand had thrust the -drawn blade beneath him. The guard, -thinking that both were asleep, turned -away, humming an air, and Sigurd caught -a faint rasping noise as the sword blade -cut through the priest's bonds. -</p> - -<p> -Soon the guard returned, and stooped -over Sigurd, who lay nearer him, to assure -himself that his bonds were right. As he -did so, Thangbrand drew him down to the -earth, his hands about the man's throat. -</p> - -<p> -The struggle was brief and noiseless. In -a few seconds the man relaxed, and the -priest quickly bound and gagged him; then -he cut Sigurd's bonds, whispering: -</p> - -<p> -"If my hands were not so stiff I would -have done better." -</p> - -<p> -Indeed, Sigurd found that his hands and -feet were too stiff to move, for he had -been tightly bound. They both sat for a -moment rubbing their limbs, then arose. -</p> - -<p> -"Which way, Jarl?" -</p> - -<p> -"West, Thangbrand. Once we strike -men belonging to King Brian we will be -all right, for his bracelet here will be -known, and you are a priest, too." -</p> - -<p> -Without a word more they stepped away, -each picking up a light shield from beside -the sleeping men as they went. The -forest was dark, but as the moon was just -rising Sigurd knew that their way would -soon be light enough to travel fast. -</p> - -<p> -In half an hour they were well away -from the camp, and both broke into a swift -trot, threading their way among the trees, -and as far as they were able heading west. -The trees were roughly barked on the -north, and this guided them somewhat, for -both men were accustomed, at home in -Norway, to finding their way through the -forest by such signs. -</p> - -<p> -"Hold up, lad," panted Thangbrand, -after an hour's running. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd slackened his pace, for the -ground was too uneven and rough to keep -it up longer, and for a time they walked -swiftly onward. -</p> - -<p> -"Pray heaven that we strike no bog or -morass," said Thangbrand, "for if we do -we are lost." -</p> - -<p> -"I wonder if we will be pursued?" -</p> - -<p> -"If we are, I do not propose to fall into -their hands alive," answered the priest, -stoutly. "They are evidently some -wandering band, who have been hired by that -villain Ketil. I'd like to get him within -reach of my sword!" -</p> - -<p> -They kept onward till dawn, walking and -running by turns. As the gray light broke -through the trees, they found that the -forest was thinning out somewhat, and Thangbrand -flung himself down for a brief rest. -</p> - -<p> -"I think we must be getting near the -cultivated fields in that broad plain we -crossed yesterday," conjectured Sigurd. -"If we can once get to Brian he will protect -us, for I have heard that no one could -be more jealous of his word than he." -</p> - -<p> -Ten minutes later they continued their -way. The sun was just rising now, and as -they stood on the top of a small hill, -vainly endeavoring to see some signs of -habitation, a faint yell arose from the forest -behind them. -</p> - -<p> -"Come on, Thangbrand," exclaimed -Sigurd, breaking into a run. "It is a -matter of speed now." -</p> - -<p> -For half an hour they kept up a brisk -trot, but could hear the yells rising from -time to time behind them, each louder than -the last. Finally Thangbrand stopped -short. -</p> - -<p> -"Go on, Fairhair. I am clean winded, -and your life is worth more than mine to -Olaf. Do you go on, while I hold them -here as long as may be." -</p> - -<p> -"One of the Jomsborg oaths," replied -Sigurd, quietly, "is to never desert a -comrade—" -</p> - -<p> -"Out upon your Jomsborg oaths!" -roared Thangbrand. "Get you gone, and -lose no time!" -</p> - -<p> -"Listen!" cried Sigurd quickly. "Isn't -that a horn?" -</p> - -<p> -Far off toward the west they heard the -faint notes of a war-horn, while from -behind them a loud shout arose, as their -pursuers came in sight. -</p> - -<p> -"Hasten, Fairhair," cried the priest, -unsheathing his sword. "Go yonder and -bring help while I hold them here!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd smiled and unsheathed his own -weapon, as he looked around. -</p> - -<p> -"Cease this nonsense," he said, though -not without a thrill at thought of the -generosity of the big man. "Let us stand -beneath this big oak, where we can swing -our swords without being struck in the -back." -</p> - -<p> -They took position on either side of a -large oak tree, and five minutes later the -first of their pursuers appeared. He halted -at seeing them, and sent up a yell; as his -comrades came up, they spread out, enclosing -the tree in a circle. -</p> - -<p> -To do him justice, Ketil was brave -enough. When he appeared, he led a dozen -men straight at the tree, and in a second -the two were fighting furiously. The Irish -crowded around, striking with their long -knives, but speedily recoiled before the -terrible sweep of Thangbrand's huge sword, -and the more scientific, but no less deadly, -blows of the young Jarl. As they retired, -their chief yelled an order, and the arrows -began to whizz past. -</p> - -<p> -The first Sigurd caught with his shield, -the second he cut in two as it flew. A -shout of amazement went up from the -Irish as Thangbrand did the same, for, -unacquainted as they were with the exercises -and training of the Norsemen, this skill -seemed little less than magical. Again and -again the two men repeated the trick, but -it was impossible to ward off more than one -or two shafts at a time, and soon both -Thangbrand and Sigurd were wounded. -Suddenly Ketil sprang at Sigurd with a -shout of impatience. -</p> - -<p> -The Irish circled around, watching the -combat with eager eyes, forgetful of all -else, while Thangbrand guarded Sigurd's -back. Thrice Ketil's steel met that of -Sigurd, then seeing an opening, the latter -struck; but his feet slipped on the -dew-wet grass, and he fell headfirst. -</p> - -<p> -Thangbrand was instantly bestriding his -body, facing Ketil. At this the Irish came -in behind him, watching eagerly for a -chance to use their long knives, while the -priest crossed swords with Ketil. Suddenly -the latter threw up his arms as something -flew past Thangbrand, and fell with a spear -through his body as a yell of terror went -up from his band. -</p> - -<p> -Looking about as he raised Sigurd to his -feet, Thangbrand saw King Brian -Boroimhe behind him, sword in hand, while -his men pursued the fleeing band in all -directions, cutting them down without -mercy. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap18"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XVIII. -<br /><br /> -A MISSION FOR THE KING. -</h3> - -<p> -The King addressed Thangbrand in -Latin, which the priest understood -fairly well. -</p> - -<p> -"Just in time, my friends! The guide -whom I sent with you returned late last -night with word of your mishap, and early -this morning I sent men in all directions, -joining myself in the search, for I was -greatly angered that my safe-conduct had -been broken in this wise." -</p> - -<p> -"We owe you our lives, my lord," responded -Thangbrand gratefully. "These -men were in the pay of a traitor, whom -your spear slew before I had a chance at -him, unfortunately." -</p> - -<p> -The old king smiled, not unkindly. -"Strange words for a man of God, sir -priest! But I see that your blade has done -good service to Jarl Sigurd, and perhaps -in these times a priest must be man of the -world as well." King Brian sighed heavily -as he looked around, then said, "Ask the -Jarl if he has my letters safe." -</p> - -<p> -When Thangbrand translated, Sigurd -held up the letters, their seals unbroken; -and now the King's men returned, and the -party went to Kells at once. Here, as -Sigurd was in haste to get back to Dublin, -the King gave him an escort of fifty men, -and they set out without delay. -</p> - -<p> -Upon reaching the territory of Olaf, -Sigurd dismissed the Irish and pushed -forward; but on coming within sight of the -city he gave an exclamation of dismay. -Instead of the King's standard, there -floated from the castle a huge black banner! -</p> - -<p> -Wondering greatly, they galloped up to -the city and entered. To their amazement, -the shops were all closed, and the whole -city wore an air of mourning. Sigurd, -without stopping to ask questions, left -Thangbrand and hurried to the great hall. -</p> - -<p> -It was empty, save for Olaf, who sat in -the high-seat, his head bowed in his hands. -Sigurd advanced and held out the letters. -</p> - -<p> -"Here, my lord, is the reply of King -Brian Boroimhe. Why is the black -standard on the castle, and why are all the -shops shut?" -</p> - -<p> -Olaf raised his head and gazed at Sigurd -with heavy eyes. -</p> - -<p> -"Welcome back, Jarl, in an evil hour. -Queen Gyda died last night." -</p> - -<p> -As Sigurd stared at the King, the latter -rose slowly, descended from the high-seat, -and taking Sigurd's arm in his, exclaimed: -</p> - -<p> -"Sigurd, come and talk to me. I am -lonely, and the most wretched of all men." -</p> - -<p> -They walked up and down the hall, and -Olaf told Sigurd how the night before the -Queen had been seized with a fatal illness. -Good Bishop Sigurd, the English prelate -who had come to Ireland with Olaf, had -done his best, for he was a skillful leech, -but to no avail. -</p> - -<p> -"Why should this evil come upon me -now?" cried the King, bitterly. Sigurd -said little, allowing the King's pent-up -grief to find utterance, then he said, softly: -</p> - -<p> -"It is the will of God, Olaf, and perhaps -he has done it for the best. May it -not be that he means you to give your -whole life to the spreading of his Word in -heathen Norway, and has sent you a touch -of adversity to try you?" -</p> - -<p> -"Mayhap," responded the King, "but it -is hard. He has given me good fortune, -and I must bear the bad when it is his -will; it may be true that he wishes me to -devote myself, heart and soul, to bearing -his gospel to my countrymen." -</p> - -<p> -The blow was a terrible one to Olaf, and -it was indeed many a month ere he recovered -a portion of his former light-hearted -spirits. Two days later the Queen -was buried, and after the period of mourning -Olaf threw himself into the work of -preparing the expedition with feverish -energy. -</p> - -<p> -This was no light task, indeed. Olaf -had a dozen warships in the harbor, but it -was impossible to take so large a force, as -men had to be left to defend Dublin. Olaf -had decided to give up his Irish land, in -case of succeeding in Norway, to his -brother-in-law, Olaf Kvaran, but he could -not leave him without men. -</p> - -<p> -At last, after many consultations with -Sigurd and his other chiefs, the King -decided to take only the five largest ships, -which would hold about seventy-five men -each. Thorir Klakke had no inkling that -Olaf knew of his treachery, and he advised -the King to make a sudden descent on -Norway and to take Jarl Hakon unawares at -Thrandheim, before men could be gathered. -Thorir, in giving this advice, thought that -either he would be able to kill Olaf by -treachery on the voyage, or else that the -men of Hakon, posted at Agdaness in -Norway, would remove Olaf before the plan -could be accomplished. -</p> - -<p> -The five ships were fitted up in the best -of shape. The dragon heads were taken -from their prows, and in the place of these -great crosses were set up, for Olaf knew -that only by the favor of God would he be -able to win his father's kingdom. They -were laden with all the wealth that Olaf -had gathered in his travels through Russia, -Constantinople, and England, and at -length the expedition was ready to start. -</p> - -<p> -It was a bright morning in August that -the King went on board his ships, followed -by all his men. Before doing so, he called -Alfred and Sigrid to him, and asked them -what they intended to do. Alfred -hesitated, for although he wished to -accompany Olaf, he did not forget that his -father was in Flanders, and he did not -like to separate from his sister. Finally, -Olaf said, with a smile: -</p> - -<p> -"You both had best come with me. I -have a plan which I think will work out -to your satisfaction; I will tell you later -just what it is. Put all your Saxons on -board the 'Snake,' Alfred—the ship that -old Biorn captured in England, and sail -with us. Sigurd will command the -'Crane,' and when we get to the Orkneys I -will tell you what I have in mind." -</p> - -<p> -So, wondering what the King meant, the -"Snake" was added to the fleet, to -Sigurd's great joy. He had feared that -Alfred and his sister would be left behind, -and it was with no small satisfaction that -he helped fit out the "Snake." -</p> - -<p> -When the men were all embarked, -Bishop Sigurd, standing in the prow of -King Olaf's ship, offered up a solemn -prayer asking the aid and the blessing of -God for their enterprise. As he concluded, -a great "Amen!" rolled over the sea from -ships to shore, the anchors were weighed, -and the journey was begun amid a blare of -war-horns and the clash of arms. -</p> - -<p> -The Pentland Firth was not passable, -according to reports brought to Olaf, so he -bore up for the Orkneys, as had been his -wish from the first. These islands had -long been settled by Norsemen, and Jarl -Sigurd Lodvarson ruled them: but the Jarl -and his people were all heathen, for no -missionaries or Christian men had been -allowed to settle in the islands. It was -Olaf's firm intention to spread the Word of -God wherever he went, and as the Orkneys -were in his path, he decided to visit Jarl -Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -This was a dangerous proceeding, for -the Jarl was powerful, and might have -settled the fate of the expedition there and -then; but matters came out luckily for -Olaf. His six ships came to anchor in -Asmundar Bay, in Rognwald Island, and -in the bay they found a single ship lying at -anchor. -</p> - -<p> -Olaf, seeing that the ship was a fine one, -and very beautifully furnished, dispatched -Sigurd Fairhair to bring her commander -on board his own ship, hoping to get news -of Norway. To his surprise, it happened -that this commander was no other than -Jarl Sigurd Lodvarson himself! -</p> - -<p> -Olaf greeted him with a smile. "Truly, -it seems that we have an abundance of -Sigurds here! Yourself, my own Jarl -Sigurd Fairhair, good Bishop Sigurd, of -England, and possibly a score of my men, -all named alike." -</p> - -<p> -The Jarl, not knowing where King Olaf -was bound with his fleet, was somewhat -fearful for his safety, and when Olaf urged -him to be baptized, he refused, saying the -faith of his fathers was good enough for -him. Then King Olaf arose, holding in one -hand a sword, in the other a cross. -</p> - -<p> -"Jarl, you hold, as Jarl of the Orkneys, -part of my inheritance, for I claim all the -lands as mine which the Kings of Norway -have possessed. As it has come to pass, -by the will of God, that you are in my -power, there are two courses open to you. -The one, that you accept the true faith, -and allow yourself to be baptized, with all -your subjects. You may expect to hold -under me the Jarldom which you now -possess, and what is of more importance, -you may hope to reign for ever in a -nobler kingdom than this. -</p> - -<p> -"The other course, a very wretched one, -is that you die; and after your death I -will pass over the islands and bring the -folk to believe in the true God. Now -choose, Jarl, which course you will take." -</p> - -<p> -The Jarl hesitated; then he slowly -stretched out his hand and took the cross -from that of Olaf. This action was greeted -with glad shouts from the crews, and without -delay Bishop Sigurd baptized Jarl -Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -Then he swore oaths of fidelity to King -Olaf, and placed in the King's hands his -son, Hundi, who was also baptized, and -who accompanied Olaf to Norway as a -hostage. -</p> - -<p> -Next day Olaf came on board the "Crane." -</p> - -<p> -"Sigurd," he said, "are you willing to -undertake another mission for me? You -seem to scrape through somehow, no matter -what happens, and as this one is of some -importance I can think of no one better -fitted to undertake it." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd smiled. "If I have scraped -through some tight places, Olaf, I don't -ascribe it to my own conduct! I have been -fortunate in finding friends, and for the -rest, God has protected me. Now tell me -what this mission is." -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap19"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XIX. -<br /><br /> -AT KING SVEIN'S COURT. -</h3> - -<p> -Astrid and Halfdan had a safe and -quiet voyage home to Denmark, but -when they arrived there they found -that many changes had taken place during -the winter. The pale, quiet, religious -Queen Gunhild had died, and as she alone -had restrained King Svein from his wild -and warlike impulses, the King was gathering -great forces for his descent on England. -</p> - -<p> -Astrid took up her abode in the castle -as formerly, but the life was a lonely one. -Her parents had died when she was a -child, and only her Uncle Halfdan was near -her. She disliked King Svein, who, -although he always treated her well and -kindly, was a moody and irritable man, -with no thought for anything save his -selfish ambitions. Soon after Astrid's -return he placed in her care his two sons, -Harald and Canute, and she took great -interest in the education and care of the two -lonely boys, little thinking that in after -days the younger was to prove a great and -worthy king of England, thanks to her -early teachings. -</p> - -<p> -So the summer passed, while men -assembled and were sent on to the Danish -settlements in the north of England to wait -the arrival of Svein in the fall. Jarl -Halfdan was sent in command of one of these -detachments, and after his departure Astrid -felt her loneliness more than ever. -</p> - -<p> -One day King Svein sent for her. -Wondering at the summons, Astrid proceeded -to the hall, where she found the -king surrounded by his chiefs. -</p> - -<p> -"Lady Astrid," he said abruptly, -"prepare your belongings for a journey. -Your hand has been asked in marriage -by the son of King Vladimir of Russia, and -needless to say, I have accepted the offer, -for besides being a great honor, this will -bring to my army a number of ships from -Russia." -</p> - -<p> -Astrid was overwhelmed, but answered -the King bravely. "You have no right to -dispose of my hand, King Svein, in this -fashion! It is unjust to me, for I am not -your vassal. My lands lie in Vendland, -and if necessary I shall appeal to King -Burislaf for protection against this outrage!" -</p> - -<p> -The King's face darkened. "You will -do as I order!" he exclaimed angrily. -"King Burislaf also will do whatever I -order him, and this is a thing unheard of, -that a girl should decide her own marriage!" -</p> - -<p> -A murmur of assent went up from the -chiefs, and Astrid gazed hopelessly around -the circle of fierce faces, finding no hope in -them. How she longed for her good uncle -to stand at her side! But as the King said, -a girl in those days could rarely indeed -marry whom she liked; her parents or -guardian settled that without consulting -her, and Astrid felt that she was helpless. -"This is a noble marriage," continued -the King, more calmly, "so let me hear no -more of these protests. You will leave -here in two weeks for Gardarike, Vladimir's -capital, with a fitting escort." -</p> - -<p> -With that the girl was dismissed to her -apartments. Young Canute, hearing of -the matter, tried to comfort her, but the -boy was of course as helpless as she. So, -although Astrid resolved that the marriage -should never take place, even though she -had to fly from home, the packing of her -effects proceeded. -</p> - -<p> -A week later, as she was sitting sewing -in the garden, she heard a great noise -from the harbor, shouts and war-horns -mingling with the clash of arms. She -sent Canute to see what it was about, and -presently the boy came running back, his -eyes bright and his cheeks flushed with -excitement. -</p> - -<p> -"Oh, Astrid!" he cried, "we have visitors! -Two great ships just sailed into the -harbor, from far over the sea—the strangest -ships! They didn't have any dragon -in the bow, but instead was a big gilded -cross! All the men on board had shields -with red crosses on them, and I saw them -as they landed—great warriors, all of -of them!" -</p> - -<p> -Astrid's cheek paled suddenly. What -ships could these be, sailing under the -Cross, unless—? Canute continued hastily: -"And, Astrid, you ought to see the -chiefs! There is one old viking, so fierce -and brave-looking, and a beautiful girl -with bright yellow hair, and a boy who -must be her brother; but greatest of all -was a young man with hair like sunlight, -streaming over his shoulders, and a great -golden helmet—" -</p> - -<p> -Astrid did not wait to hear the rest. -Dropping her work, she ran to her rooms, -her heart beating wildly. Swiftly calling -her women, she attired herself, and -descended to the hall, which was empty. She -hastened out, and leaving the castle, went -down to the harbor. -</p> - -<p> -There all the townfolk and the men -from the castle were crowded about the -market place, and as they made way for her -respectfully, Astrid saw King Svein talking -to a number of people, whom she could -not see for the crowd. As she made her -way through the press, a well-known voice -fell on her ear; and then, with flushed -cheek, she found herself face to face with -Sigurd Fairhair! -</p> - -<p class="capcenter"> -<a id="img-071"></a> -<img class="imgcenter" src="images/img-071.jpg" alt="She found herself face to face with Sigurd Fairhair." /> -<br /> -<i>She found herself face to face with Sigurd Fairhair.</i> -</p> - -<p> -He gave a cry of delight as he saw her, -and gripped her hands until they hurt. -</p> - -<p> -"Astrid!" -</p> - -<p> -"Why, Sigurd!" she replied, noting how -he had grown, "what a big man you have -become already! Oh, how glad I am to see -you—and how I need you, too!" she added -in a lower tone. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd gave her a quick, anxious look, -then turned. "Here, Alfred, Sigrid!" he -shouted, and the next minute the two girls -were in each other's arms, while the crowd -looked on, amazed. Sigurd told King Svein -something of their tale, then the king -ordered all to follow him to the castle. -</p> - -<p> -"We can talk in peace there," he said. -"Do you come up at once. My men will -attend to your ships, so bring your warriors -ashore and let them be entertained at the -barracks." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd left this to Biorn, and the four -young people followed Svein to the castle, -where they seated themselves in the hall, -below the high-seat. -</p> - -<p> -"Now, how do you come to be here, of -all places?" asked King Svein, who -remembered Sigurd well. In return Sigurd -told him about the rescue of Alfred and -Sigrid. Svein nodded. -</p> - -<p> -"I know the story. Jarl Alfwic is even -now with my army in England. Go on." -</p> - -<p> -"King Olaf," continued Sigurd, "sent -Alfred and his sister to you asking that -you take them with you to their father; -or, if you could not do this, to see that they -received a pilot to take them safely to -Flanders. However, since you are going -to England before long yourself, that is -settled." -</p> - -<p> -"Right glad will I be," replied the King, -"to have the son of Jarl Alfwic with me. -They will be safely delivered to the Jarl, -have no fear." -</p> - -<p> -"As to myself," said Sigurd, "that is -another matter. King Olaf has sailed for -Norway to take the kingdom from Jarl -Hakon, and—" -</p> - -<p> -He was interrupted by a cry of amazement -from the Danes. -</p> - -<p> -"What say you?" shouted Svein, leaping -up, "King Olaf has sailed for Norway? -Skoal! Skoal!" The chiefs roundabout -echoed the cheer. -</p> - -<p> -"He sent me to you, King Svein, to ask -that if possible you will send him ships -and men; or, if you cannot do this, that at -least you will not aid Jarl Hakon and Jarl -Eirik." -</p> - -<p> -"As to the first request, I cannot do -that," replied Svein, "for I need every -man I can raise. Be sure, however, that -Olaf need fear no attack from me; I will be -joyful, indeed, when the traitor Hakon is -driven from Norway!" -</p> - -<p> -"That will be good news for Olaf," -rejoined Sigurd, "for an attack in the rear -would be fatal. He has but five ships, of -which mine is one, and his success will -depend entirely on his being able to surprise -Hakon." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd then told of how Olaf had -Christianized the Orkneys, and how he had -dispatched him immediately on this journey. -Olaf was to remain three weeks in the -islands, baptizing the people, and had -arranged to meet Sigurd at Moster, an -island on the west coast of Norway, for -which Olaf would direct his course. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd had no opportunity to speak with -Astrid till the evening, and he was puzzled -by her words of that morning. Not till -Alfred, Sigrid and he went to her apartments -in the evening did he receive an -explanation. Then Astrid told them about -Svein's plans for her marriage. -</p> - -<p> -"It is a shame!" exclaimed Sigrid. -"Why, in England a girl must yield obedience -to her father's wishes, but she is not -forced into marrying in this way!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd was silent, his brows knitted. "I -am in a bad position," he said at last. "Of -course, the simplest way out of it would be -for you to come on board the 'Crane,' and -for us to join King Olaf; but I am on a -mission here that I must not neglect. I -cannot anger Svein against Olaf, as such -an action would do; not that I care for my -own sake, but it might mean ruin to my -King." -</p> - -<p> -Alfred agreed with him. "Yes, you -must consider your duty to Olaf; and yet -there are two sides to it—" -</p> - -<p> -"No," broke in Sigurd, "there are not. -At any cost must Svein's finger be kept out -of Olaf's pie, for Svein is liable to abandon -his English trip and turn all his forces -against Norway in a sudden fit of rage. -That would be fatal to Olaf at present." -</p> - -<p> -"I think I have a plan," remarked Sigrid -after a moment. "As long as you do not -appear in Astrid's escape, it will be all -right, won't it?" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd nodded. -</p> - -<p> -"Well then, give Wulf a few men and -that cutter that is on the 'Snake,' let them -take Astrid on board, and wait for you at -some place along the coast. You must -leave to-morrow or next day to rejoin Olaf, -so you can pick them up as you go, and -King Svein will think Astrid has fled of her -own will." -</p> - -<p> -"Good!" cried Sigurd. "What say you -to the plan, Astrid?" -</p> - -<p> -"I think it is a good one, too," replied -the girl, her dark eyes sparkling, "but all -my things are packed up, and I don't want -to meet King Olaf looking like this!" -</p> - -<p> -She blushed as a peal of laughter went -up from the rest. -</p> - -<p> -"Never mind, Astrid," laughed Sigrid, -"I will put a chest aboard the 'Crane' -to-night; my things will fit you pretty well, -and King Olaf gave me a whole shipload -of dresses." -</p> - -<p> -"Better put it in the cutter," said Alfred, -"for when Svein finds his ward gone, he -will search our ships first thing." -</p> - -<p> -So it was arranged, that the next night -Wulf, who had firmly attached himself to -the young Jarl, should wait at the dock for -Astrid, who insisted on making her way -down to the harbor alone. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap20"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XX. -<br /><br /> -THE KING AND THE TOWEL. -</h3> - -<p> -Next morning Wulf was instructed in -his part. He had become firmly -attached to the young Jarl, and was -eager for the business; he and Biorn had -proved wise advisors on many occasions. -</p> - -<p> -In the afternoon Sigurd and Alfred went -hunting with King Svein, and the party did -not return till long after nightfall. When -they reached the castle they found the -courtyard ablaze with torches. -</p> - -<p> -"What is this? What means this -commotion?" roared the King, dismounting -hastily and striding forward. -</p> - -<p> -Ulf, the gray-headed old seneschal, met -him. "The Lady Astrid of Vendland has -disappeared, my lord, and we can find no -trace of her in all the castle and town!" -</p> - -<p> -For a moment the King's rage was terrible, -and he turned on Sigurd, his face -working in fury. -</p> - -<p> -"This is your doing, Jarl! You have -accepted my hospitality, traitor, and—" -</p> - -<p> -"You forget yourself, my lord," interrupted -Sigurd calmly. "I have been with -you all day, and could have known nothing -of this matter. I do not blame the girl -greatly, yet you can account for my actions." -</p> - -<p> -"True," replied Svein, his anger cooling -under Sigurd's reply, "I beg your pardon, -Jarl, for my haste. Will you allow my -men to search your ships? It may be that -the girl has fled on board one of them, -seeking shelter with the Lady Sigrid." -</p> - -<p> -"Willingly, King," answered Sigurd, -Alfred joining with him. -</p> - -<p> -The King at once sent men in all -directions, mounted and on foot; but when -Sigurd retired for the night nothing had -been found of Astrid. -</p> - -<p> -In the morning Sigurd took leave of King -Svein, who, preoccupied with the flight of -Astrid, offered no hindrance to his -departure, presenting him with many gifts, -indeed, which Sigurd returned in kind. -</p> - -<p> -His departure was the occasion for a -much more sincere and affectionate -farewell between himself and the young -Saxons. Alfred and Sigrid stood on the deck -of the "Crane" till the last moment, and -their eyes were moist as they said good-by. -</p> - -<p> -"Be sure to visit us in England next -year," were Alfred's parting words. "We -will look for you in the summer at Lincoln!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd promised to come if possible, and -so the three friends parted. As the "Crane" -sailed from the harbor Sigurd's last view -was of Sigrid, standing on the forecastle -of the "Snake" and waving her scarf in -farewell. -</p> - -<p> -"Where are we to pick up Wulf and -Astrid?" Sigurd asked Biorn, after they -had left the land behind. -</p> - -<p> -"About twenty miles north, Jarl. I sent -a man with him who knew of a small -river mouth where they can lie hid -without danger." -</p> - -<p> -Shortly after noon Biorn, taking the -helm, steered the "Crane" carefully in to -the land, skirting along the shore, and in -half an hour the cutter darted out as they -passed. -</p> - -<p> -"Hurrah!" shouted Sigurd, as Astrid -climbed up the side. "You have done well, -indeed, Wulf! King Svein was completely -at sea as to where his ward had gone!" -</p> - -<p> -"And now for King Olaf!" cried Astrid -merrily, as Wulf carried Sigrid's chest into -the cabin and she disappeared. -</p> - -<p> -It was many days before they saw the -King, however, for Moster was far up the -Norwegian coast. They made the high -cliffs of Agdir first, and sailed north along -the coast; on the way they passed by -Hiorunga Bay, but did not enter, for the -place recalled sad thoughts to Sigurd's -mind. -</p> - -<p> -"Have you seen Vagn?" he asked Astrid, -as they watched the Herey Islands speed -by. -</p> - -<p> -"Oh, yes!" she exclaimed. "How could -we have forgotten to speak of him before! -He came to see me last spring—and just -think, Sigurd! He is married!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd gave an exclamation of surprise, -and Astrid continued. -</p> - -<p> -"Yes, he married a girl in Norway, and -brought her back to Denmark. He would -have nothing to do with Jarl Sigvald on -his return, calling him a coward and a -traitor, and the Jarl is remaining close in -Jomsborg. Vagn himself is in the south of -Denmark, where his father owned some castles." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd was surprised to hear that his -cousin was married, and he firmly resolved -to visit him as soon as the result of Olaf's -expedition was decided. The next morning -they arrived at Moster, and before the -fishing village found the four ships of Olaf, -which had arrived a few days previously. -</p> - -<p> -Olaf welcomed Astrid back with much -merriment. "You seem to come back to -your friend Oli," he laughed, "and this time -Oli is not going to let you go away so -soon!" -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd told him the story of Astrid's -flight, and the King commended his Jarl -for acting so wisely. "If Svein had come -on us now, Fairhair, it would have been all -over with us; as it is, you did right in -getting the maid away without trouble, and I -am heartily glad that you did so." -</p> - -<p> -Olaf stopped at Moster for two days, and -as he had first landed in Norway there, -he marked out a space on the ground, gave -Thangbrand plenty of money and materials, -and left him there to build the first church -in the country. -</p> - -<p> -After this Olaf sailed north day and -night as the wind favored him, following -the land, but keeping to the open sea, -outside the islands which were strewn thickly -along the coast. When the wind was contrary -he anchored at the islands farthest out -to sea, and did not touch the mainland, for -fear that Jarl Hakon would receive news -of his coming. At last, just at evening, -they reached Agdaness, at the entrance to -the Firth of Thrandheim. -</p> - -<p> -After the ships were anchored and the -awnings raised, King Olaf visited the "Crane." -</p> - -<p> -"Now, Sigurd," said he, "I wish your -advice. Thorir Klakke is on board my ship, -and you know how his plans were revealed -to me by my brothers, whom he attempted -to bribe. Well, Jarl Hakon's men are hidden -in the forest yonder, and are doubtless -awaiting us; Thorir is to take me ashore -alone, as if to arrange some plan of action, -and there I am to be killed. Now, what -would you suggest doing?" -</p> - -<p> -Thinking it over, Sigurd replied, "It -seems to me, Olaf, as that it would be fitting -to let the traitor fall into his own trap. -Put a score of men ashore to-night, let them -hide near by, and when Hakon's men appear -let our men charge them and put them to -flight, after which Thorir should be executed." -</p> - -<p> -"That is a right good scheme." answered -the King. "I do not want to take life, God -knows, yet such criminals must be punished; -and the most fitting punishment for -this man is death. So be it." -</p> - -<p> -Early the next morning Sigurd, watching -from the "Crane," saw Thorir and the King -go ashore alone. They walked along the -shore, then Thorir held up his glove, as if -signaling. The next minute a number of -men broke from the trees, but as they did -so, more men rose up from among the -bowlders on the shore and put them to -flight. Two of these latter fell on Thorir, -while the King watched, and the unfortunate -man expiated his treachery with his life. -</p> - -<p> -After this, Olaf, walking down to the -water, shouted to Sigurd to come ashore, -which the young Jarl did. -</p> - -<p> -"Come, Fairhair, let us walk up and see -if we can find a farm, where we can learn -tidings of Jarl Hakon. If he is in Thrandheim -we must fall upon him to-day or to-morrow -at latest, for these men will bear the -news of our coming." -</p> - -<p> -They walked up the hill, leaving their -men behind, and presently came to a little -farmhouse, with a pasture behind it where -some cows were grazing. Walking up to -the door, they saw an old woman inside, -and Olaf addressed her. -</p> - -<p> -"Good dame, may we have a drink of -fresh milk? We are two travelers, and -will pay for what we take." -</p> - -<p> -"Welcome, friends!" replied the woman. -"Enter and I will get some milk and bread." -</p> - -<p> -While she was away, Olaf and Sigurd -washed their hands at the well beside the -house, and entering again, the King took -up a towel that was lying on the table, and -dried his hands on it. At that moment the -woman returned, and snatched the towel -from his hand. -</p> - -<p> -"It is easy to see that you have not -been brought up very well, and have been -taught little good," she cried angrily. -"Know you not that it is wasteful to wet -all the towel at once?" -</p> - -<p> -Olaf responded, soberly, "Well, well, -mayhap I shall still rise in the world so -high that I may dry my hands in the -middle of the towel!" Sigurd was bursting -with laughter, and at this reply he could -hold in no longer, and the woman looked -furiously at him. -</p> - -<p> -They drank their milk, and the coin that -Olaf handed the woman somewhat appeased -her. "Tell me," he asked, "do you -know where Jarl Hakon is?" -</p> - -<p> -"Last night he was in hiding, my son -told me." -</p> - -<p> -"In hiding! What mean you?" exclaimed -the King. -</p> - -<p> -"Why, whence come you that you know -not? Within the last few months Hakon -has become so cruel and tyrannical that -there is no living with him; two days ago -his exactions in Gauladale caused the -bonders to rise against him, under Orm Lugg. -They separated the Jarl from his ships and -drove him into the forest, no one knows -where. My son told me last night, ere he -crossed the Firth to join the bonders, that -they were going to look for him at the -home of Thora of Rimul, a great lady who -is a relative of the Jarls." -</p> - -<p> -"Well, well!" said the King, as they -hastily returned to the ships. "Think you -not that heaven is with me, Fairhair? -Here I come to Norway at the very -moment when Hakon has goaded the bonders -to rise in revolt; I find him cut off from -his men and ships, driven a fugitive into -the forests, mayhap slain by this time! -Come, let us make all haste to cross the -Firth and arrive at Gauladale." -</p> - -<p> -So, hastily shouting out the news to the -other ships as they went on board, the -prows were turned across the Firth of -Thrandheim, toward the district of Gauladale. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap21"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XXI. -<br /><br /> -THE DEATH OF HAKON. -</h3> - -<p> -As they left the shelter of the bay -and drew across the Firth, the -narrow entrance of which was only -two or three miles in width, three ships -were seen sailing along the opposite shore. -Olaf steered directly for them, for -without doubt these were ships of Hakon's; -but as the fleets neared each other, the -three ships, evidently taking Olaf's ships -for foes, turned toward the shore. -</p> - -<p> -The King dashed forward, coming up -with the three ships just as they ran up -on a sandbar. Their crews leaped -overboard, wading and swimming to shore, and -directly in front of Olaf's ship was seen -a large, handsome man, swimming. Olaf -shouted, but he paid no heed; so, seizing -the tiller, the King flung it at him. The -heavy missile struck him on the head, and -he sank. -</p> - -<p> -Then Olaf's men, leaping overboard, -pursued the flying men, slaying some and -capturing others. As soon as the captives -were brought on board the King interrogated them. -</p> - -<p> -It seemed that the man whom Olaf had -slain with the tiller was Erland, a son of -Jarl Hakon, and that these ships were -going to the Jarl's aid. Further, the -prisoners said that Jarl Hakon's forces -were utterly dispersed, that the bonders -were in revolt throughout the whole -district, and that none knew where the Jarl -was in hiding. -</p> - -<p> -King Olaf at once landed some of his -men with orders to tell everyone who he -was, why he had come, and to bid all the -bonders meet him the next day in Gauladale. -Then the five ships were steered -east, going up the Firth, and that -afternoon the King was landed at Gauladale. -</p> - -<p> -He found a great meeting of the chief -bonders and leaders of the revolt against -Hakon in progress, and as soon as these -found who he was, they greeted him with -tears of joy, and welcomed him most -heartily. Olaf brought his chiefs, Sigurd -among them, to the assembly, and when -all were seated one of the older leaders -of the peasants rose and addressed him. -</p> - -<p> -"Olaf, Jarl Eirik will demand stern -payment of this attack on his father, -Hakon, when he hears of it; nevertheless, -we are determined that Jarl Hakon shall -die, for his life has been altogether evil. -You, however, are of the race of our old -Kings, from Harald Fairhair to your -father, Triggve, and in the name of this -assembly I ask you to become King over -us, at least until an assembly of the people -can be held at Thrandheim to elect you in -regular form." -</p> - -<p> -This caused the men of Olaf much joy, -and the King accepted the offer of -leadership which they made him. The same -evening they traveled up the valley to -Rimul, where the Lady Thora lived. It -was here that the bonders thought Jarl -Hakon was in hiding, but some distance up -the valley, beside the river was found a -cloak, which was recognized as Jarl -Hakon's. -</p> - -<p> -"He has perished in the river!" cried -many voices, and this opinion was strengthened -by finding the body of Hakon's horse -farther down, on a sandbank. But as -everyone was discussing this, an old bonder -came up to Olaf. -</p> - -<p> -"Olaf," he remarked, "you know well -how cunning the Jarl is, and how skilled -he is in tricks. A man of his nature does -not get carried away by a river, however -swift; can you not see that this is but a -trick to make us cease the search and disband?" -</p> - -<p> -"That is so," replied Sigurd at once. -"I believe the man is right, King." -</p> - -<p> -Others assented to this opinion also, and -the small army pushed on to Rimul. By -torchlight they made a thorough search -of the homestead of Lady Thora, but -without avail; so King Olaf, standing on a -large stone near the barn, cried out: -</p> - -<p> -"Men, we have searched without avail -for Jarl Hakon; at this time we can do no -more. But know, that with fitting gift and -payment I will reward whoever shall slay -the Jarl and bring me his head." -</p> - -<p> -With that they left the homestead, and -proceeded to Ladi, where they remained -for the night. This was a very large farm -and village, belonging to the Kings of -Norway, and here Olaf took up temporary -quarters. The men were next morning -landed from the ships, the bonders were -levied, and word was sent throughout the -whole country that King Olaf, son of King -Triggve, had arrived to take the rule from -the hands of Hakon, and that a General -Assembly of the People was to meet at -once at Thrandheim. -</p> - -<p> -These things, however, were not all done -in a day. The very next afternoon, after -reaching Ladi, word was brought to King -Olaf that a man was inquiring for him, -having a large package. King Olaf and -Sigurd went to the door of the farmhouse, -and saw an ill-favored man wearing the -collar of a thrall, or slave. -</p> - -<p> -"What do you want of me?" inquired -the King. -</p> - -<p> -For answer the man opened his package -and showed a human head. Sigurd -could not repress a shudder, and he -turned away; the head was that of Jarl -Hakon of Norway. -</p> - -<p> -Olaf called his men at once, and the -thrall told his story. He was the tooth-thrall -of Hakon, the slave, who, according -to custom, had been given the Jarl when he -cut his first teeth; he had fled with Hakon -from the bonders, and the Lady Thora had -made for them a sure hiding-place in a -cave beneath the pigsty, in the very yard -where Olaf had offered a reward for -Hakon's head. -</p> - -<p> -"What led you to betray the Jarl?" -asked Olaf, angrily. -</p> - -<p> -"Chiefly for the reward you promised, -King, for we could hear your voice -distinctly. So I slew him as he slept and -brought his head to you for the promised -reward." -</p> - -<p> -"Seize him, men!" cried Olaf, his eyes -blazing with anger as he pointed to the -thrall. "I will keep the promise which I -made, to give you a fit reward, and it will -keep those who come after us from betraying -their lords! You dog! You were the -servant of a wicked man, but he was your -master and a good one to you, and you -were bound to him by oaths the most -sacred. Your reward shall be a fitting one -indeed; take him out and behead him, men!" -</p> - -<p> -When this was done, King Olaf took the -thrall's head, together with that of Hakon, -and sailing out to the island of Nidarholm, -which was used as a place of execution for -evildoers, the two heads were placed on -the gallows. That night King Olaf gathered -his leaders in the farmhouse at Ladi. -</p> - -<p> -"My friends," he said, "Jarl Hakon is -dead, and I doubt if Jarl Eirik will dare -to attack us. The General Assembly will -be held soon, and I trust that the people -will take me for their king. It seems to -me that only by the aid of God was the -mighty Hakon overthrown so easily; moreover, -the time is come when idolatry and -heathen worship in Norway must give way -to the Holy Truth. You have come hither -from Ireland with me, and are you now -willing to give your lives, if need be, to -spread the Word of God?" -</p> - -<p> -"Aye!" shouted all, and after a council -it was decided that as soon as Olaf had -been chosen king the first steps should -be taken to stamp out the worship of Thor -and Odin at the great temple in Thrandheim. -Sigurd remembered his adventure -with Vagn in that temple, and he felt a -thrill at thought of planting the Cross in -place of the great golden statue of Thor; -for the words of the King had fired all his -chiefs, and Bishop Sigurd also had spoken -at length. -</p> - -<p> -They abode quietly at Ladi for two or -three weeks, Astrid taking up her quarters -in the big farmhouse. There was nothing -to do save to wait till the bonders met in -General Assembly, and for this reason also -King Olaf waited before tearing down the -great temple to Odin at Ladi. It would -not be wise to anger the bonders before -being elected; afterwards, when he was -the rightful King, it would be different. -</p> - -<p> -Finally word arrived that the delegates -to the Assembly had met from all eight -districts of Norway, so Olaf and his men -traveled up to Thrandheim, at the head of -the Firth. Olaf was pretty sure of election, -for while he dwelt at Ladi most of the great -men of the country had visited him, and -his handsome presence and kingly mien -had made a very favorable impression; -moreover, he was well known by reputation -as one of the greatest warriors of his time. -</p> - -<p> -Arrived at Thrandheim, Olaf, Sigurd, -Astrid and the others of the King's party -were given apartments in the palace of -Jarl Hakon, and two mornings later they -took their way to the Assembly. Here an -immense crowd was assembled, from the -whole Thrandheim district, and as soon as -the Assembly had been constituted, King -Olaf stood up in sight of all, his red-gold -hair flying in the breeze, the sun streaming -from his golden armor and scarlet cloak. -</p> - -<p> -"It is known to all men here assembled -that I have offered myself to be King over -you. You must expect the sternest -treatment by Jarl Eirik for the attack on his -father, unless you obtain protection; on -the other hand, I have a difficult task -before me in obtaining possession of my -father's realm, after being so long absent." -</p> - -<p> -Olaf gave a brief account of his life and -adventures, from his boyhood up to his -discovery of Thorir Klakke's treachery, his -coming to Norway, and the death of -Hakon, and concluded with: -</p> - -<p> -"I believe that there is no man in Norway -who by legal right and descent has so -much right to the crown as I. But I must -be made King by you, the Assembly of the -People, and if you do so I will protect you -and rule you according to the ancient laws -of Norway." -</p> - -<p> -The tale of his exile and sufferings -greatly moved the people, who were already -predisposed in his favor. As he sat down, -half the delegates leaped to their feet. -</p> - -<p> -"Skoal! Olaf Triggveson, skoal! We -will have you to be our King, and none -other! Skoal!" -</p> - -<p> -A blare of horns mingled with shouts -rent the air, and Sigurd, behind Olaf, set -his great standard flapping in the breeze. -A silence fell over the people as they saw -the Cross, but only for a moment; again -the shout arose, pealing across the town -and the bay and echoing back from hill to -hill behind them: -</p> - -<p> -"Skoal to King Olaf! Skoal!" -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap22"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XXII. -<br /><br /> -THE SACRIFICE TO THOR. -</h3> - -<p> -Thus was Olaf Triggveson chosen by -the General Assembly to be King -over all Norway, and the rule of the -land was made over to him in accordance -with the old laws, by the officers of the -people. The bonders swore to be faithful -to him, to support him while he won the -whole kingdom, and to help him to hold it; -Olaf on his part promised to observe the -laws and rights of the people, and to -defend it from all invaders. -</p> - -<p> -These ceremonies occupied the better -part of the day, and it was sunset before -Sigurd and Astrid, who had watched the -ceremony, returned to the hall. They saw -nothing of Olaf for several days, for he -was very busy with the various leaders who -flocked to his banner, and he was raising -men and sending messages to all quarters -of Norway with news of his election. -</p> - -<p> -Soon, however, news arrived that the -levies were not needed, for Jarl Eirik and -his brother Svein had fled to Sweden as -soon as the news of their father's death -arrived. The whole country yielded to -Olaf's rule, glad once more to have a king -of the royal line of rulers, and glad to get -rid of Hakon, who to this day is known as -"Hakon the Bad." -</p> - -<p> -King Olaf was eager to preach the gospel -to his people, but Sigurd, his namesake -the Bishop, and the other chiefs saw that -Olaf must first make his hold on the country -firmer, for they foresaw that when the -people found that Olaf was intending to -overturn the old faith, there would be -tumults and revolts. The King, however, -yielded only in part to them; and refusing -to dwell in Thrandheim, where the great -temple of Thor was situated, began the -building of a second town, Nidaros, a few -miles distant. So the autumn and early -winter passed. -</p> - -<p> -Nevertheless, the news spread that Olaf -was no follower of the old gods, and grave -disturbances took place throughout the -country, for the bonders drew away from -the new King when they found that he was -preaching a new faith to them. Then one -day came the news that at many of the -larger temples great meetings of the bonders -had taken place, with sacrifices to the -old gods, and there the bonders had solemnly -vowed that they would not allow Olaf -to preach the "White Christ" in Norway. -</p> - -<p> -Now all agreed that it was indeed time -to act, unless the kingdom was to be -endangered. The heart of the country was -the district around Thrandheim, where the -land was most thickly populated, and -where the capital lay; so Olaf realized that -if he once established Christianity here, it -would not be long before the rest of -Norway gave in. -</p> - -<p> -With this object he called another -General Assembly at Frosta, near the capital; -but as the message went forth, the bonders -seized the messengers, and substituted a -war-arrow, so that all the chiefs and great -leaders assembled with a huge host, armed -and ready for war. -</p> - -<p> -Olaf, who came to the Assembly with -only Sigurd and a score of men, saw that -he was taken in a trap; however, on the -first day of the meeting he conciliated -the Assembly, although when he mentioned -Christ several of the leaders arose and -forbade him to speak on religious subjects -on that day. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd saw that the bonders were in -a bad mood, and that a spark might inflame -them; so that night, as he and King Olaf -sat in their tent, he said: -</p> - -<p> -"Olaf, I have a plan which I think will -save us all from further trouble." -</p> - -<p> -"Then, by St. Michael, let me have it!" -cried Olaf, "for I am at my wits' end for -want of one!" -</p> - -<p> -So Sigurd talked long with the King -that evening. The next morning, when -the Assembly opened, Olaf arose, and -after a short speech said: -</p> - -<p> -"Let us preserve the compact that we -made before, to strengthen and uphold each -other. To this end I will attend your great -sacrifice two weeks hence at the temple -in Thrandheim, and after this we will take -counsel together concerning the faith that -will be held, and we will agree to hold to -whatever faith we decide upon." -</p> - -<p> -At this the bonders gave a great shout -of joy, thinking that King Olaf was -yielding, and the other matters for which the -Assembly had been called passed off -without trouble. -</p> - -<p> -When Olaf returned to his new town of -Nidaros a number of men from Iceland -received baptism, shortly after Yuletide. -Many traders and others who were in the -new city of Nidaros, remained through the -winter at Olaf's court, and most of these -were also baptized in the end. -</p> - -<p> -For the next two weeks both Sigurd and -the King were busy perfecting Sigurd's -plan. The chief opponent of Christianity -among the bonders was Ironbeard, a very -powerful chief who was also priest at Moeri, -a town near Thrandheim. The winter sacrifice -was to be held at the great temple in -Moeri, and if Sigurd's plan went well, all -resistance to Christianity in the district -would be destroyed at one blow. -</p> - -<p> -Invitations were sent out to all the chief -men of the bonders, to a feast to be held -at Nidaros three days before the winter -sacrifice. The greatest chiefs and leaders -of the Thrandheim districts were invited, -and all accepted, save Ironbeard and one or -two others. -</p> - -<p> -On the morning bidden, the invited -chiefs streamed into town, on foot, on -horseback, and even on skis. Many came -over the ice from across the bay, and by -next morning the new city was filled with -men, as each chief brought a party with -him. Early in the morning Olaf and his -court attended service in the new church, -all the visitors refusing to watch the service. -</p> - -<p> -Immediately afterward Sigurd led fifty -men to the harbor. There they put on -skates, and the young Jarl led them to -Ladi, which was only three miles across -the ice, though more by land. -</p> - -<p> -Removing their skates, Sigurd and his -men tramped up from the shore to the -temple which stood on the hill, and raising -his axe, Sigurd struck the door. In five -minutes it was broken down, while the few -priests who lived near by stood watching -helplessly. -</p> - -<p> -Carrying out all the images, Sigurd piled -them in the show ana set fire to them as an -object lesson to the watching priests and -bonders that their gods were powerless. -The temple was then stripped of its valuables -and the building itself burned. When -this was done, Sigurd and his men made a -cross out of two beams of wood, and this -he planted in the snow over the ruins of -the idols. -</p> - -<p class="capcenter"> -<a id="img-081"></a> -<img class="imgcenter" src="images/img-081.jpg" alt="This cross he planted over the ruins of the idols." /> -<br /> -<i>This cross he planted over the ruins of the idols.</i> -</p> - -<p> -Then, seeing the bonders gathering fast, -he stepped out and addressed them: -</p> - -<p> -"Friends, we are here by command of -the King, and you have to-day seen how -powerless your gods are before the true -God. As you know, your chiefs are now in -Nidaros; when they return they will be -Christian men, no longer heathen." -</p> - -<p> -With this Sigurd and his men, laden with -the spoil of the temple, returned to Nidaros. -At the harbor mouth a man met them, for -it was noontime. -</p> - -<p> -"Hasten, Jarl! The Assembly has just -been called!" he cried to Sigurd. "King -Olaf posted me here to bid you hasten to -the hall." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd hurried on to the palace, bidding -his men wait in the outer rooms till he blew -his horn. Then he made his way to the -hall, entering it just as the Assembly was -opened by the King. -</p> - -<p> -"Chiefs and bonders," said Olaf, looking -sternly around on the two score great -leaders who sat below his high-seat, "I do -not forget that you chose me to be your -King, and gave me this realm of Norway; -but some two weeks ago I called a General -Assembly of the people, and there you and -others refused to hear me preach the gospel -of Christ, and only by promising to attend -the winter sacrifice did I escape injury at -your hands. -</p> - -<p> -"Now you and all men know that I have -in many places shamed the false gods, burnt -their images and temples, and in their stead -have erected the Cross of the true God. -But I am conscious of the oath which I -swore to you at that Assembly, and therefore -I propose to sacrifice to your gods the -greatest and highest sacrifice that man may -offer, namely, human life." -</p> - -<p> -A little murmur of joy ran around the -hall as Olaf paused. On great occasions -the Norsemen used to offer as the most -acceptable sacrifice a number of slaves or -criminals, condemned to death. At the -next words of Olaf, the joyous murmur -ceased. -</p> - -<p> -"I do not believe that thralls or malefactors -should be offered to the gods; instead, -they should delight in the blood of -noble men, great chiefs, powerful bonders. -Since you have refused to release me from -my oath, I propose to sacrifice this sort of -men, for we must do our best to appease -the gods, that they may favor us. Am I -right?" -</p> - -<p> -As the King paused again, a doubtful -murmur of assent rose up, and the men, not -quite sure of Olaf's meaning, fixed their -eyes on the King, who stood, handsome and -erect, by his throne. -</p> - -<p> -"Therefore," he continued, "I will offer -to your gods the greatest sacrifice that -Norway has ever known. You must be -eager to receive from them the reward of -your service and past offerings, and for -the purpose of this offering I shall select -you, Orm Lugg, you, Asbiorn of Orness, -you, Stirkar of Gimsa, you, Kar of Gryting, -and I will sacrifice you upon the high altar -of Thor at Thrandeim. And after this, I -shall select six others, the highest and -worthiest men of this district from among -you, and they shall be sacrificed likewise, -that the gods may send us fruitful seasons -and peace." -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap23"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XXIII. -<br /><br /> -HOW THE CHIEFS WERE BAPTIZED. -</h3> - -<p> -For a moment the chiefs stared at the -King, incredulous and amazed. Then, -as they caught the meaning of his -ironic speech, the four men he had named -leaped to their feet, and an angry roar -went up from all. Olaf's uplifted hand -stilled the murmur. -</p> - -<p> -"Wait! You do not seem so eager for -the companionship of your gods; can it be -that you doubt their power to save you? -If that is really the case, and you wish -to release me from that oath of mine, I -will be right glad to have you all baptized, -and believe in the mighty, gentle and kind -God whom I and my men serve." -</p> - -<p> -At these words Sigurd blew his horn, -and the doors in the side of the hall flew -open. His men brought in the spoils of the -Ladi temple and laid them at Olaf's feet, -while other armed men filed silently into -the room. -</p> - -<p> -"Here," exclaimed Olaf, pointing to the -temple utensils and trappings, "you see -how powerless your gods are to save their -belongings! Now think it over, while my -men watch the doors; I will return in a few -minutes." -</p> - -<p> -With these words he left the hall, -followed by Sigurd. Outside the door he -gripped the boy's arm joyfully, and was -about to speak when an indignant voice -broke on their ears: -</p> - -<p> -"What is this tale I hear, King Olaf?" -</p> - -<p> -Looking up they saw before them the -old English Bishop, Sigurd, clad in his -vestments. His face was stern and cold -as Olaf bowed to him. -</p> - -<p> -"Is this tale true? That you hold the -Thrandheim chiefs in the great hall, offering -them their choice of baptism or death? -Answer me!" -</p> - -<p> -Astounded, the King gazed at the Bishop, -then after a moment his eyes fell. -</p> - -<p> -"Why, Bishop, it is true, certainly! -What mean you?" -</p> - -<p> -The old man's eyes flashed. "Think -you that this is the way to spread the gospel -of Christ? Is baptism a thing to be forced -on men, or a thing which they must choose -willingly? Better lose this kingdom of -yours and flee back over the ocean again -than to do this thing, Olaf Triggveson!" -</p> - -<p> -At this the boy spoke out. "Bishop, it -it my fault, for I suggested the plan; but -why is it so bad? Did not the chiefs -entrap Olaf a week or two ago?" -</p> - -<p> -Bishop Sigurd turned on him. "What -of that? Do as you will with the bodies -of these men, Olaf, but force not their -souls! Let them come to Christ willingly." His -voice softened. "I know that you both -are only overzealous; but believe me, King -and Jarl, this is not Christianity. Christ -said, 'Come unto me'; think you he would -have men driven to him with whips and -swords, who died to save men?" -</p> - -<p> -Olaf bent his head, and Sigurd dropped -on his knees. "Pardon, Bishop! I had -not thought of it that way; I see how -wrong it was now!" -</p> - -<p> -The Bishop put his hand on Sigurd's -head. "And you, Olaf? Do you not see -that I am right? Must you be led by this boy?" -</p> - -<p> -Olaf, fixing his keen eyes on the old man, -nodded slowly. "I see, Bishop, and I will -obey your unspoken thought." -</p> - -<p> -He turned slowly, and Sigurd followed -him to the door of the great hall. As they -entered there was a hush, and Olaf curtly -bade his men leave the building, waiting in -silence as they filed out. -</p> - -<p> -Then, ascending the high-seat, he said -bitterly: -</p> - -<p> -"Chiefs, I came among you preaching -the Word of God, the gospel of peace and -salvation; but my own acts have been as -those of a pagan and worse. Small wonder -that you refused to accept my faith! Too -late I see that I have done ill by you; now -I stand ready to repair my faults, and to -act as a true Christian. Go in peace; those -of you who wish to accept Christianity will -be welcomed. If it is your wish that a -heathen King rule over you, I will return -whence I came, and will bring no fire and -sword into the land." -</p> - -<p> -The chiefs gazed in amazement at the -King, and Orm Lugg, one of the greatest -spoke out: -</p> - -<p> -"Is this truth, King? Are we free to go -to our homes?" -</p> - -<p> -"Yes," said Olaf, a flush mounting to his -brow. "I have proved myself a poor -Christian, friends, but forgive me for this -time; go, and whatever is your will I shall -abide by it." -</p> - -<p> -One by one, silent, incredulous, the chiefs -left the hall, and Sigurd alone remained -with the King. Then the boy, grasping -Olaf's hand, cried with tears in his eyes: -</p> - -<p> -"Olaf, we have been wrong, but how -you must suffer! Will you really go back -to Ireland if the chiefs refuse to accept -the gospel?" -</p> - -<p> -"Yes, my friend," and Olaf's tone was -very low and soft. "The good Bishop -yonder showed me more in that minute than I -can tell you. I have been proud, Sigurd, -and my pride is shattered; the Hammer -of Thor is not like Christ's Cross. I -thought to use the Cross like a weapon, like -Thor uses his Hammer; but the Cross is a -symbol, not of pride and might, but of -gentleness, of pity, of humility. Yes, my—" -</p> - -<p> -Suddenly the doors opened, and in came -the chiefs, to the King's amazement. Their -faces were very changed now; the fierceness, -the resistance, seemed to have given -way to some new emotion. -</p> - -<p> -"King Olaf," said Orm, the spokesman, -"we found it as you said; the palace is -unguarded, the streets are clear. Oh, King, -I have a hard thing to say, but mayhap -you will understand! Listen. -</p> - -<p> -"We bonders have in truth resisted your -faith because, as you said just now, you -preached one thing to us, and you acted -another thing. We have resisted, not -because we love the old gods, but because we -could not see wherein the White Christ was -better." -</p> - -<p> -Orm paused, fixing his eyes on the -King's. "But to-day, King Olaf, you have -shown us a new thing. We have not -known you long, yet we have found in you -a strong man, a proud man, a man used to -ruling the wills of others, and for this we -have rejoiced in a worthy King. To-day, -Olaf, we have found that there was one -thing stronger than these, a thing able to -overcome all your strength, pride—even -your will; and because this is so, we freely -accept from your hand the Cross of Christ." -</p> - -<p> -For a moment Olaf gazed at the men -around him, unable to speak. Then, the -tears flowing down his cheeks, he pressed -their hands, one by one, and said: -</p> - -<p> -"My friends, this is a victory where I -had found a defeat. I cannot tell you what -it means to me, but I think that none of -us will forget this day. Jarl Sigurd and I -have to-day learned a lesson from you and -from ourselves; pray God we may never -have to learn it over again!" -</p> - -<p> -Then Sigurd summoned the Bishop, telling -him what had happened on the way, -and without delay the chiefs were baptized -in Olaf's new church, together with their -men. That night Olaf and Sigurd sat in -Astrid's chamber, talking over the events -of the day until late. -</p> - -<p> -King Olaf had given Astrid part of Jarl -Hakon's forfeited estates, to compensate -her for those she possessed in Vendland, so -that she might be able to live as became -her dignity; further, he constituted himself -her ward, although with the laughing -declaration that he would run the risk of -forcing her to marry against her will. He had -also promised to give Sigurd an earldom, -as soon as he had put the country into some -kind of order. -</p> - -<p> -"What are now your plans, my lord?" -asked the girl, that same night. Olaf shook -his head. -</p> - -<p> -"Truly, Astrid, I know not. Practically -all of the greater chiefs from the Thrandheim -districts were baptized to-day, and I -think that the bond established between us -will never be broken. Ironbeard alone -holds out; I am strongly minded to visit -him at once, during the winter sacrifice, -and try to win him over. To-morrow, -Sigurd, we will go to Thrandheim and -demolish the great temple there." -</p> - -<p> -For a minute Sigurd looked at Olaf, then -the latter smiled. "No, Sigurd, I have -learned my lesson. There will be no -bloodshed, either there or at the winter -sacrifice, if I can help it. But the greatest -chiefs have been baptized; now it is essential -that Ironbeard be either forced to accept -my rule or leave the country." -</p> - -<p> -So, without the least opposition, Olaf and -Sigurd burned the old temple of the war-god -the very next day. Many of the chiefs so -recently baptized showed their sincerity by -joining Olaf or sending men to his aid; -and the idols were taken out before all the -people, and burned. Sigurd longed for Vagn -to be there, as he remembered their adventure -with Jarl Hakon; but his cousin was -far away to the south. -</p> - -<p> -The work was finished by midday, and -the party returned to Nidaros. The sudden -conversion of their greatest chiefs seemed -to have demoralized the bonders, for no -longer were threats heard against Olaf, but -instead, many of them came to Nidaros and -were baptized by the good Bishop. -</p> - -<p> -The day after the destruction of the -Thrandheim temple, Olaf prepared to go -to Moeri, where the winter sacrifice was -held. He took all his men, sailing up -Thrandheim Firth with his largest ships, -and came to Moeri the day of the sacrifice. -</p> - -<p> -The King sent Sigurd ashore, demanding -that the people first hold an Assembly. -Fairhair found a great multitude assembled -from all the countryside, with Ironbeard -and his men all present. They at once -agreed to Olaf's demand, so the King -landed with his men, and the Assembly was -constituted on the plain before the temple. -</p> - -<p> -When the noise and talking of the opening -had subsided, Olaf arose in his seat and -told the bonders what had taken place in -his hall at Nidaros, told them how he had -found his mistake, and would no longer try -to force a religion on them that they did -not want. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd could see a change sweep over -the faces of the bonders before him, and -they glanced at each other and began -whispering. At this, however, Ironbeard -leaped to his feet—an immense man, wearing -the robes of a priest of Thor, and with -an iron-gray beard that swept over his chest. -He lifted his hand and began to speak, -slowly and with great dignity. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap24"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XXIV. -<br /><br /> -OLAF'S ATONEMENT. -</h3> - -<p> -"King Olaf," rang out the priest's -deep voice, "we are unwilling -that you should violate our religion. -The wish of us all is that you -should offer sacrifice as other kings before -you have done, and even as Jarl Hakon did. -When King Hakon, foster son of King -Athelstan of England, wished to proclaim -the White Christ, he found the bonders too -strong for him, and he yielded to the old -faith. The only proper plan for you is to -do likewise, for our minds have not changed -since that Assembly wherein you promised -to visit this temple at this time." -</p> - -<p> -Ironbeard sat down, and his speech was -loudly applauded by the bonders who sat -around, and by the great crowd without. -Olaf flushed at the chief's proud demands, -but controlling his temper, he rose. -</p> - -<p> -"My friends, I promised to visit your -temple, and I shall do so now, before the -sacrifices. The Assembly is closed." -</p> - -<p> -With this he motioned to Sigurd, and, -followed by his men, who had laid aside -their arms, he walked to the door of the -temple. Olaf held in his hand a -gold-mounted staff of heavy wood, and as they -entered he said to Sigurd: -</p> - -<p> -"Jarl, do just as I do, and act quickly." -</p> - -<p> -Inside they saw many images around the -temple, and occupying the place of honor -was a large idol, heavily adorned with gold -and silver. The temple was now full of -Olaf's men, while Ironbeard and the bonders -stood in the doorway, watching him. -</p> - -<p> -Without another word the King walked -up to the large idol, and raising his heavy -staff, struck it. The idol toppled over, fell -to the stone floor, and broke in two parts. -At the same instant Sigurd and his men -rushed at the other images and swept them -from their pedestals. -</p> - -<p> -A loud cry of horror arose from the -bonders, and Ironbeard, seizing a spear, -poised it, in the act of hurling it at the -King. As he did so, one of Olaf's men, -who was outside, pierced him with an -arrow, and he fell at the temple threshold. -</p> - -<p> -The bonders drew back, in terror, and -the King turned angrily. -</p> - -<p> -"Who fired that arrow?" he shouted. The -man who had done so stepped to the door. -</p> - -<p> -"It was I, King Olaf, and I did it to save -your life. Ironbeard had poised a spear at -you—see, it is even now in his hand!" -</p> - -<p> -Olaf looked at the fallen leader, and saw -that the man spoke truly. "Order the -Assembly called," he said to Sigurd. "Bid -them have no fear." -</p> - -<p> -When the people had taken their places -again, Olaf came out of the temple and -addressed them from the steps: -</p> - -<p> -"Friends and bonders, I did not come -here to shed blood, and I am bitterly -grieved that Ironbeard drew his fate on -himself. As I told you a little time ago, -I will compel no man to leave his faith; I -have discovered the wickedness of that -course. But a few days ago your other chiefs, -some of whom stand at my side, accepted -from my hands the Cross of Christ, and -now I offer it to you also. -</p> - -<p> -"You have seen how your gods have -fallen and broken. Where is their power, -think you? The true God has protected -me, has brought me to this kingdom and -given it into my hand without a struggle, -and whether you will it or not, his faith -will prevail in Norway before many more -years have passed." -</p> - -<p> -The King paused, and one of the bonders -arose to reply. -</p> - -<p> -"Oh, King, your words to-day have -fallen pleasantly on our ears, and we easily -perceive that you have truth and justice -in your heart. We see, too, that the gods -are dead, and that they have no power -before the Cross of the White Christ. But, -King Olaf, the slaying of Ironbeard was an -evil deed, whether you intended it or not, -and before we say more on this subject we -would like to know whether you will punish -his murderer." -</p> - -<p> -The bonder sat down amid a faint murmur -of applause, and the Assembly fixed -their eyes on Olaf. For a moment the King -sat in silence, and it was evident that he -was struggling with himself; then his face -cleared. -</p> - -<p> -"My people, I will not punish the man, -for he saved my life. Wait! I am not -through. Are there any relatives of -Ironbeard present?" -</p> - -<p> -Two men stood up. "We are distant -relatives of his, oh, King, but he has left -no others to mourn him save a single -daughter." -</p> - -<p> -King Olaf took off his helm. "My people, -this is a lawful Assembly, able to give -judgment and to punish criminals, with -power to inflict penalty for offenses. I -appoint you two bonders judges, and I take -upon my own head the blood of Ironbeard. -Whatever you shall think right, I will agree -to, in compensation for his death. Whether -you demand my life, or my exile, or a scat -in money, these will I give, and you shall -fear no punishment from my men." -</p> - -<p> -At these words a silence fell on the -host, and Sigurd gazed at Olaf in love and -admiration. Truly, old Bishop Sigurd had -not spoken in vain! A murmur of appreciation -of Olaf's generous offer passed from -mouth to mouth, and presently the two -relatives of Ironbeard, after conferring -together, stood up. -</p> - -<p> -"King Olaf, by these words of yours you -have indeed shamed us, who came to this -Assembly with arms, and with war in our -hearts. It is a new departure in Norway, -that her Kings should offer themselves -under the laws like common men; and yet -it seems not unfair to us that you should -do so. The laws declare that for the -shedding of blood the relatives of the dead man -may claim the life of the slayer, or they -may claim a scat in lands or goods. Now, -King Olaf, Ironbeard has left no family -save a daughter, who has no lack of wealth -and is of good family. We, therefore, her -relatives, lay this judgment upon you: that -you make her your lawful wife and bestow -upon her lands befitting her position -as Queen." -</p> - -<p> -The King's men uttered a growl of protest, -even Sigurd looking somewhat blank, -for the King had thought of marrying one -of the daughters of the Swedish King, to -make an alliance between the two nations. -Olaf, however, checked the murmur with -a gesture, and replied to the bonders: -</p> - -<p> -"My friends, this is a lawful judgment, -and I accept it with good will. I will -expect you two men to look to it that the maid -is sent to Nidaros before Eastertide, at -which time I shall marry her and make her -the Queen of this land. It is the least I can -do, methinks, after my men have killed her -father and left her alone in the world. -Should this plan not meet with her consent, -I will expect you to appoint other penalty, -which I will fulfill most faithfully, and this -I swear on the Cross." -</p> - -<p> -Olaf sat down amid a shout of approval -and joy from the bonders, and a dozen -men rose at once to speak. Making one -of their number spokesman, he addressed -the King. -</p> - -<p> -"My lord, when I left home it was my -firm intention to resist your faith to the last -drop of my blood; but now I am proud to -take baptism from your hands, and to -swear anew my allegiance to you." -</p> - -<p> -Olaf started up in surprise, and one by -one the other bonders rose and declared -their intention to be baptized. Then Olaf -sent for Bishop Sigurd, whom he had left -at the ships, fearing that Ironbeard might -attack him, and turned to the bonders. -</p> - -<p> -"My people, nothing that you could do -would give me more pleasure than this -thing. It is the dearest wish of my heart -that this land of Norway should become -Christian, and once you and the other -leaders of Thrandheim and the districts around -have received baptism, we will meet with -little opposition from the rest of the land. -In pledge of your earnestness I ask that -you complete the destruction of this your -temple to the old gods, and on its site I -will erect at my own expense a church to -the true God." -</p> - -<p> -Shouting and clashing their arms, the -bonders sprang up without an instant's -hesitation. They ran to the temple, carried -out the broken images, and piled them in -the snow, while others stripped the temple -of its furnishings and set fire to it. As the -pile of idols broke into flame, old Bishop -Sigurd arrived from the ships. -</p> - -<p> -He had been told the whole story on the -way up the hill, and he gripped Olaf's hand -silently but heartily as the King met him. -At once the work of baptism was begun, -Sigurd and the rest of the King's men taking -part in the service, and standing as -godfathers to the new converts. -</p> - -<p> -When this was finished the afternoon -was nearly spent, and after arranging with -the leaders of the people for the building -of a church, for the burial of Ironbeard, -and for the sending of his daughter -Gudrun to Nidaros at Easter, Olaf's men -embarked, and the King sailed back down the -Firth to Nidaros. -</p> - -<p> -A few days before this the Firth had -opened, for although it was still winter, the -weather had warmed somewhat, and a -channel had been made from above Moeri to -the open sea. When the fleet came to the -harbor that night, they found the town -alight with torches, and lying in the harbor -were several newly arrived ships, or rather -cutters, for they were small. -</p> - -<p> -"I wonder what this means?" said the -King, as they drew into the anchorage. "I -had no tidings of visitors, when we left the -city yesterday, and it is strange that the -town is all alight!" -</p> - -<p> -So before the ships had come to anchor, -Olaf and Sigurd leaped into a small boat -and were rowed ashore. Their ships had -been seen entering, for great fires were lit -on either side of the harbor, making everything -plain to the sight, and a crowd of men -met them as they landed. -</p> - -<p> -"What is all this excitement about?" -demanded the King, looking around in wonder. -</p> - -<p> -A confused talking answered him. -"Here, one at a time!" shouted Olaf, and -one of the men stepped to his side. -</p> - -<p> -"We have been driven from home, my -lord King, and we come from the north. -There two chiefs, Raud the Strong and -Thori Hart, have revolted against the -White Christ, have gathered a fleet, and are -sailing against you. They are preparing to -restore the temples of Thor and Odin and -to burn the churches you have built; we, -who are Christians, have barely escaped -with our lives, fleeing in our small boats. -The heathen will enter the Firth in a few -days, unless you meet them first!" -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap25"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XXV. -<br /><br /> -THE WRESTLING MATCH. -</h3> - -<p> -Olaf at once went to the great hall, -and there the fugitives came before -him and told their story. The two -Northern chieftains had taken advantage of -the unexampled spell of warm weather to -raise a fleet and sail down the coast, -thinking to come upon the King just as he had -come upon Jarl Hakon. -</p> - -<p> -Olaf quickly consulted with Sigurd, the -Bishop, and his other leaders, and their -opinion was that not a minute was to be -lost. If the King embarked that night -and sailed out of the Firth, he would -reach the entrance by morning, and could -wait for the heathen fleet there. -</p> - -<p> -The King agreed to this plan, and at -once sent word to his men to return on -board the ships. The Thrandheim chiefs -now proved their loyalty by refusing to -return to their homes. -</p> - -<p> -"No, King," said they, "you have dealt -with us fairly and honorably, and we are -sensible of it. We and our men will be of -use if it comes to a battle, and the enemy -may lose heart when they see us, for -evidently they count on our forces joining -them. So set up our standards on your -ships, and we will gladly accompany you." -</p> - -<p> -At this decision the King was overjoyed, -for with these men were several hundred -warriors in all, who had gathered at the -Moeri Assembly. So a few hours later -Olaf and Sigurd left Nidaros again, with a -dozen ships, while more would follow as -soon as they had been taken off their -winter dry-docks. -</p> - -<p> -The ships rowed down the Firth all -night, while Olaf and Sigurd rested. The -day had been a terribly hard one on both, -and they were glad to get what sleep they -could before meeting the advancing foes. -</p> - -<p> -The week of warm weather seemed a -wonderful thing to all the men, and not a -few ascribed it to the favor of heaven -upon Olaf. It was only barely past -Yuletide, and although no one expected the -warm weather to last, few of the oldest -men could remember a winter when -Thrandheim Firth had remained open, or -had opened before April. -</p> - -<p> -By morning they were outside the cape -of Agdaness, where the traitor Thorkel had -been executed. The King ordered the ships -to be hove to here, in order to wait for the -six other ships which were following from -Nidaros. All day long they waited, seeing -nothing of the rebels. Two or three small -ships, bearing more fugitives, came down -the coast, and gave Olaf the news that -Raud and Thori were only fifteen miles to -the north, that they had landed at Theksdale, -and were summoning men to join -them from all the country. -</p> - -<p> -That afternoon the reinforcements came -up from Nidaros, and the King held a -council on his ship the "Crane." -</p> - -<p> -"First," he said, "I am resolved that if -it can possibly be avoided there shall be no -bloodshed in this matter. Now let me have -your council on how we shall act to gain -these rebels over, if that can be done." -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd spoke first. "It may be that you -did not note it, King Olaf, but old Biorn, -my forecastle man, is strongly of the opinion -that to-night a heavy frost will set in. -This warm weather has not been natural at -all; even this afternoon the sun has been -growing somewhat colder. -</p> - -<p> -"Now, if a frost returns to-night, it will -be no light one, and Biorn says that the -Firth will again be closed to us. In this -case, it seems to me that any ships lying -along the shore would be frozen fast, -especially if they were in such a narrow bay as -that at Theksdale. I think that Raud and -Thori will give little heed to their ships, -drawing them on shore carelessly, or -perhaps anchoring them near by; and if this -is the case, and we come upon them suddenly, -they will probably be so disheartened -at the loss of their ships, and at being left -so far from home without means of retreat, -that they will give in." -</p> - -<p> -A cry of delight broke from the King and -the others. "That is the very solution of -it!" exclaimed Olaf. "But—it depends on -whether or not a frost sets in. In any case -we will leave the land, so as not to be -frozen in ourselves." -</p> - -<p> -The chiefs separated to their respective -vessels, and all sailed out two or three miles -to sea, where they lay tossing quietly. At -sunset Bishop Sigurd, who was aboard the -"Crane," conducted a solemn service, -during which he offered a solemn prayer that -God would favor their enterprise; as the -men on all the ships joined in the responses, -it seemed to Sigurd Fairhair that never had -he witnessed a more impressive sight than -this. Eighteen ships, all crowded with -men, a large portion of whom had only a -few days before been worshipers of idols, -lay grouped together in the sunset glow, -while from them arose a devout and -heart-felt prayer to the White Christ. -</p> - -<p> -No sooner had the sun set and darkness -fallen upon the ocean, than the night turned -bitterly cold. Many of the men, not -expecting this, had left off their furs and -cloaks, so that the others divided theirs -among all. In some of the ships were bales -of merchandise, and at the King's order -these were opened by torchlight and all the -men without cloaks were furnished with them. -</p> - -<p> -By midnight it was evident that the -intense cold would close the Firth, and as -Sigurd had foreseen, would also hold the -enemy helpless. Amid a shout of rejoicing -from all the men, the prows were turned -north, and the ships rowed swiftly toward -Theksdale, for there was not a breath of -wind, and every minute the cold seemed to -increase. -</p> - -<p> -With sunrise the pilots announced that -they were not far from their goal, and an -hour later they rounded the islands outside -Theksdale Bay. There, however, they were -stopped by a ragged line of ice, nearly a -foot thick, which had formed during the -night. -</p> - -<p> -In all haste, for as yet they had not come -around the headland into the bay itself, the -crews disembarked without mishap, and -gained the shore, leaving men on board the -ships to keep them safe. They made their -way, under guidance of men who knew the -coast, across the headland; and there before -them lay the army of revolt, their fleet -fast-bound in fetters of ice along the shore! -</p> - -<p> -"Come," exclaimed Olaf to his nearest -leaders, "we must lose no time, for, see, -they are cutting the ships out of the ice!" -</p> - -<p> -So, leading the way, he dashed over the -rocks of the shore, and as the first shouts of -alarm went up from the heathen army, Olaf -and part of his men stood between them and -their ships, while over the brow of the hill -poured the remainder of his forces. -</p> - -<p class="capcenter"> -<a id="img-093"></a> -<img class="imgcenter" src="images/img-093.jpg" alt="Olaf and his men stood between them and their ships." /> -<br /> -<i>Olaf and his men stood between them and their ships.</i> -</p> - -<p> -The rebel camp seethed and boiled with -men, but seeing that Olaf made no move to -attack them, their haste quieted somewhat, -and in a few minutes two well-appareled -chiefs left the tents and with a dozen men -approached the King. -</p> - -<p> -"Have we safe conduct, King Olaf?" -shouted one. -</p> - -<p> -"Have no fear," replied Olaf, "come in peace." -</p> - -<p> -As they approached, men who knew them -whispered to the King that these were Raud -the Strong and Thori Hart. Both were of -lofty stature and magnificently built, with -strong, vigorous features. They stopped -a dozen paces from the King. -</p> - -<p> -"From your appearance you are Olaf -Triggveson," said one. "I am Raud the -Strong, and this is Thori Hart. Have you -come in peace or in war, oh, King?" -</p> - -<p> -A smile ran around Olaf's men, and he -himself laughed outright. -</p> - -<p> -"That is a strange question, Raud, when -you have attacked my people and declared -your intention of driving me from the -land!" -</p> - -<p> -The other two flushed, and Raud's face -darkened. "You have caught me," he cried -angrily, "by fault of the Ice King, where -my men can ill defend themselves, and I see -that you have many more warriors than I -looked for; yet you will not find me the last -to cross swords with you, Olaf!" -</p> - -<p> -"Hold, Raud," answered Olaf, "I mean -not to attack you. Now see, I have your -ships yonder, I have a much larger force -than you, and yet if you will not yield -willingly to me you shall depart in peace to -your homes, on condition simply that you -abandon the revolt against my rule." -</p> - -<p> -"Why," cried Thori Hart in wonder, -"we thought that you made choice of the -Cross or the sword to your subjects! Mean -you that we will not be forced to baptism?" -</p> - -<p> -Olaf smiled sadly. "You will not, Thori. -All the chiefs in the Thrandheim districts -have been baptized, but willingly, as those -with me here can testify. Now, what is -your decision?" -</p> - -<p> -The two whispered together for a minute, -until finally Raud spoke up, advancing -toward the King. -</p> - -<p> -"You have fairly overcome us, King -Olaf, and we thank you for our lives. Still, -I am not ready to accept your faith. I am -a great priest of Thor in the north, and -you seem to be the champion of the White -Christ, so I propose that you and I pray to -our gods, and after that we indulge in a -wrestling match. The winner, he who first -throws the other to earth, shall bestow his -faith on all the men of the loser. This -Thori and I agree to, if you will also." -</p> - -<p> -Olaf, without hesitation, replied, "I will -accept the trial, here and now, trusting to -the mercy of Almighty God that he will -nerve my arm against your power and that -of your false gods! -</p> - -<p> -"But one condition I would make, Raud; -that is, that whoever loses this contest shall -forfeit his life with it." -</p> - -<p> -The viking joyfully agreed, and then -returned to his camp. The men of King Olaf -had all arrived, and as word of the -challenge passed through the army, more than -one covert smile was seen, for already men -said that Olaf was the strongest man in all -the land. -</p> - -<p> -It was so bitterly cold that a great fire -was built, and on one side of the space, -scraped clear of snow, marked out for the -match, grouped Olaf's men; on the other -side the heathen followers of Raud stood, -full of confidence in their leader, for he was -very strong, whence his name, and skilled -in wrestling. -</p> - -<p> -Stepping into the open space between the -two armies, Olaf and Raud threw off their -helmets and armor, and took hold of each -other. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<p><a id="chap26"></a></p> - -<h3> -CHAPTER XXVI. -<br /><br /> -THE CROSS AND THE HAMMER. -</h3> - -<p> -Sigurd's heart sank as he saw the -mighty muscles and powerful limbs of -the pagan; but he glanced at Olaf, and -while the latter's muscles were not so big, -he knew that there was terrible strength in -them. -</p> - -<p> -At first the opponents tried out each other -carefully; then, gradually warming up, -Raud made terrific attempts to throw Olaf, -but the latter resisted every endeavor, -seemingly without effort. Now was seen the -difference in the two men's lives, for while -Raud speedily lost his wind, became flushed -and tired, King Olaf looked as fresh as -when he began the conflict, owing to his -temperate life. -</p> - -<p> -As the viking weakened, Olaf suddenly -seized him by the thigh in an unguarded -moment, and with a movement of his hands -flung the man over his head. Amid a shout -from his men, and a groan of dismay from -those of Raud, the latter struck the ground, -Olaf leaping to his side. -</p> - -<p> -As the fallen man struggled up, the King -seized his hand and aided him. "You -have won fairly, Olaf," gasped Raud, -looking with wondering eyes on his antagonist, -"and my life is yours." -</p> - -<p> -"Nay," said the King, kindly, handing -the viking his garments, "I seek no man's -blood, Raud. All I ask is that you serve -me faithfully, and you shall have the same -lands that you held from Hakon." -</p> - -<p> -Messengers were at once despatched -overland to Nidaros, to tell of the outcome -of the conflict; then, after Raud, Thori and -his men had been baptized, for they -accepted the condition willingly, Olaf -embarked his men again and they returned -south. -</p> - -<p> -The Firth was of course closed again, so -the ships were drawn ashore for the winter, -and the chiefs of the bonders left the King -for their homes, while he pushed on across -the snow-clad hills with his own men. At -Ladi they crossed the ice to Nidaros, and -were received with much joy. -</p> - -<p> -At Eastertide the marriage of King Olaf -and Gudrun, the daughter of Ironbeard, -was solemnized by Bishop Sigurd; and at -the same time Sigurd Fairhair and Astrid -were married. The wedding was a surprise -to no one, as the whole court knew the story -of their adventures, and had long since -agreed that sooner or later the two would -be wedded. -</p> - -<p> -Easter of this year came late in April, -and the Firth had been open for some time. -As the procession left the church and -wended through the streets of Nidaros to -the great hall, a wonderful ship was seen -entering the harbor. The prow ended in -a dragon's head, the stern in the coils and -tail of a dragon; both prow and stern were -gilded, shining bravely in the morning sun. -The hoisted sail represented a dragon's -wings, and the glistening oar blades the -beast's legs. -</p> - -<p> -A cry of amazement went up from all, -but the King turned, with a smile at Sigurd. -</p> - -<p> -"This ship I have had built in secret, and -it is my wedding gift to my faithful Jarl, -Sigurd Fairhair. It is not fitting that a -Jarl of mine should be landless, so I also -bestow on him the earldom of the Agdirs, -and command that he take his wedding -journey thither in this his new ship!" -</p> - -<p> -* * * * * * -</p> - -<p> -Four years later King Olaf Triggveson, -with a few of his ships, was entrapped by -the treacherous Jarl Sigvald among the -islands of Svold Sound, while the main -part of his fleet was out at sea. -</p> - -<p> -Here had gathered his enemies—the -King of Sweden, King Svein, of Denmark, -who had turned against Olaf, and the -heathen men of Norway, who had chosen -rather to leave the land than to accept the -Cross. One by one the King's ships were -taken, although he made such a defense as -Norway had never seen, and at one time it -seemed as though he would win, even -against such odds. Then Jarl Eirik, the -son of Jarl Hakon, tore the dragon-prows -from his ships, and rowed to the attack -under the sign of the Cross. -</p> - -<p> -As the last of King Olaf's men fell on -his forecastle, the King threw aside his -shield and sprang overboard. He was -famous as a swimmer through all the lands -of the north, and now he dived deeply, -swimming under the keels of his enemies' -ships, so that it seemed to them that he -had drowned. -</p> - -<p> -Coming up outside the ring of vessels, -the King swam swiftly to a fishing boat that -lay in by the islands, and was pulled -aboard by Sigurd and his wife Astrid, who -had come too late to warn Olaf of the plot -to betray him. That night, with his -wounds bound, the King sat in the stern of -the boat, which sailed swiftly south. -</p> - -<p> -Sigurd urged Olaf to go north, offering -to take him to his fleet, which could return -and meet the invaders, but the King refused. -</p> - -<p> -"No, my friends, I cannot do this. Toward -the end of the fight Jarl Eirik hoisted -the Cross, and I believe he made a vow -that he and his men would renounce the -old gods forever if he conquered me. -Therefore, it seems to me that by the will -of God, Norway has become Christian at -last, and also I am not without fear that -God has been displeased with my rule." -</p> - -<p> -"Then shall we go to England with you? -You have many great friends there, and -King Ethelred, who is almost driven from -his kingdom by the Danes, would gladly -give you a share of his realm," said Astrid. -Again the King shook his head. -</p> - -<p> -"No," he replied, "let me be as dead -to the realm of Norway, for I will never -trouble it again. I will go to Rome, and -after that to Jerusalem. There the Crusaders -rule the Holy Land, and I will join -them and devote the rest of my life to -serving against the Moslem. I believe that -God used me as an instrument for giving -his Word to Norway, and now that this is -accomplished, it were best to give peace to -this troubled realm." -</p> - -<p> -Seeing that it was useless to urge Olaf -further, Sigurd sadly gave up, and two -days later they arrived in his earldom of -Agdir. Here the King remained for two -weeks, then, fearing that his presence -would bring trouble on his old friends, -decided that he would at once start on his -pilgrimage. -</p> - -<p> -"Make your peace with the conquerors, -Sigurd," he said. "They will be glad to -retain you in your possessions here." -</p> - -<p> -With this he selected a score of men and -a small ship of Sigurd's, and departed -from Norway forever. As he and Sigurd -and Astrid stood together on the forecastle, -just as the anchor was raised, the -King said sadly: -</p> - -<p> -"My friends, it is for the best, believe -me, and now peace will come to the land. -The faith of Christ has been established, -and although men may return at times to -the old gods, I think that it will not be for -long. Now take this sword of mine, even -as you took one long ago in Ireland, and -wear it in memory of me; I will never use -a weapon again, save in defense of the -Holy Land." -</p> - -<p> -Embracing the King with tears, Sigurd -and Astrid left the ship; and an hour later -it was a white speck far on the horizon. -</p> - -<p> -"Come, Astrid," said Sigurd, "we will -never see Olaf again; yet he will always -be remembered as the first King of -Norway to overthrow the Hammer of Thor, -and to plant in its stead the Cross of -Christ!" -</p> - -<p><br /><br /></p> - -<p class="t3"> -THE END. -</p> - -<p><br /><br /><br /><br /></p> - -<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CROSS AND THE HAMMER ***</div> -<div style='text-align:left'> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will -be renamed. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. -</div> - -<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br /> -<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br /> -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person -or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the -Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when -you share it without charge with others. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work -on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the -phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: -</div> - -<blockquote> - <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most - other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions - whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms - of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online - at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you - are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws - of the country where you are located before using this eBook. - </div> -</blockquote> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg™ License. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format -other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain -Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -provided that: -</div> - -<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation.” - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ - works. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. - </div> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right -of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread -public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state -visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. -</div> - -</div> -</body> - -</html> - diff --git a/old/67528-h/images/img-009.jpg b/old/67528-h/images/img-009.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b298212..0000000 --- a/old/67528-h/images/img-009.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67528-h/images/img-023.jpg b/old/67528-h/images/img-023.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7fcd41f..0000000 --- a/old/67528-h/images/img-023.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67528-h/images/img-031.jpg b/old/67528-h/images/img-031.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f588560..0000000 --- a/old/67528-h/images/img-031.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67528-h/images/img-045.jpg b/old/67528-h/images/img-045.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 941f36d..0000000 --- a/old/67528-h/images/img-045.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67528-h/images/img-057.jpg b/old/67528-h/images/img-057.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a7d5be5..0000000 --- a/old/67528-h/images/img-057.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67528-h/images/img-071.jpg b/old/67528-h/images/img-071.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a89fa82..0000000 --- a/old/67528-h/images/img-071.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67528-h/images/img-081.jpg b/old/67528-h/images/img-081.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 504b5ab..0000000 --- a/old/67528-h/images/img-081.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67528-h/images/img-093.jpg b/old/67528-h/images/img-093.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 018cc5f..0000000 --- a/old/67528-h/images/img-093.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/67528-h/images/img-cover.jpg b/old/67528-h/images/img-cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2d761f8..0000000 --- a/old/67528-h/images/img-cover.jpg +++ /dev/null |
